Own funds Balance sheet total Net profit for year Subscribed capital of which called up

60 566 542 372 2 626 243 284 21 699

57 941 512 203 2 515 243 284 21 699

Own funds composition (EUR million)

2 515

Own funds of EUR 61bn representing more than 11% of the balance sheet total

2

Financial Report 2014

33 727

2 626

36 241

21 699

21 699

31/12/2013

31/12/2014

Profit for the financial year Reserves Called-up capital

Capital adequacy (CAD) ratio*

26.1%

26.0%

31/12/2013

31/12/2014

Ratio development driven by incremental lending, while the quality of the loan portfolio improved * Computed under Basel III and based on Bank standalone financial statements

Financing activity in 2014

7 551 7 875

Highlights 2014

(EUR million)

4 856 82 159

Approved

69 081

59 395

Signed

Disbursed

Outside EU European Union

Signatures by country in 2014

To

ta l EU R 77 bn

European Union EUR

EFTA & Enlargement Countries

69bn

EUR 8bn

Eastern Neighbours

2

1

EUR .5bn

EUR .2bn

Africa, Caribbean, Pacific, South Africa

Outside EU

1

EUR .2bn Asia and Latin America

1

EUR .4bn

2014

Southern Neighbours

1

EUR .7bn

Financial Report

3

Preface

Highlights of financial developments at the EIB in 2014

Overview

The quality of the loan portfolio remained high, with impaired loans representing only 0.2% of the total loan portfolio, the same as at the end of 2013. Similarly, overdue payments (> 90 days) amounted to just EUR 87m. The specific provisions on loans recorded at year-end were EUR 483m (end-2013: EUR 361m).

In 2014, the EIB was in the second year of implementation of incremental lending associated with the EUR 10bn capital increase, which was approved unanimously by the shareholders at the end of 2012 and enabled the Bank to conduct more business over 2013–2015, while at the same time reinforcing its financial strength. The size, cash nature and rapid implementation of the capital increase were also a clear demonstration of the importance attached to the Bank by the EIB’s shareholders.

The Bank’s financial performance maintained a steady progression in 2014. The annual net surplus was EUR 2.63bn – slightly higher than the EUR 2.51bn surplus recorded in 2013. The annual surplus is entirely retained, thus contributing to the growth of the EIB’s own funds and the Bank’s financing capacity.

The Bank continued to achieve the additional lending volumes targeted and signed (from all resources) a total of EUR 77.0bn of new loans in 2014 (2013: EUR 71.7bn). The Basel III capital adequacy ratio decreased slightly from 26.1% to 26.0% as the new capital was partially consumed. The incremental lending facilitated by the capital increase was delivered subject to reduced leverage, as planned. Overall, the Bank’s leverage1 remained substantially lower than the levels attained immediately prior to the capital increase, although it increased marginally on the previous year to 779% (end-2013: 764%).

To finance its lending activities, the EIB raised EUR 61.6bn in the capital markets. This was achieved with the targeted maturity profile (average of 7.2 years). The funding cost improved slightly compared to the prior year, benefiting from a tightening of spreads, which was more concentrated in the second half of the year, after the bulk of funding had been completed. Liquidity management remained prudent, with total treasury assets of EUR 65.6bn (end2013: EUR 66bn), ensuring coverage of 69% of 2015 total projected net cash outflows (compared with 70% at yearend-2013).

1

4

Financial Report 2014

Leverage is computed as gross debt (long and short-term) divided by adjusted shareholders’ equity (own funds less the EIB’s participation in the EIF’s capital).

Preface

1. The EIB’s importance to the EU reinforced by the Investment Plan for Europe

2. EIB financial results – continuous capital generation

The EIB remained committed to its traditional role of financing viable projects that promote the attainment of the EU’s policy objectives within all EU Member States. During the challenges of 2008-2011, the EIB provided exceptional support to the European economy to help soften the impact of the crisis. The Bank is again on course to do so with additional lending volumes for the period 2013-2015, facilitated by the EUR 10bn capital increase. Over 2015-2018, the EIB is once more expected to shoulder additional responsibilities to support sustainable long-term growth and employment in Europe, bolstered by EU guarantees.

The EIB has recorded a surplus in its statutory accounts in every year of its existence, which is traditionally retained to increase the Bank’s own funds. Overall, the net surplus after provisions in 2014 was higher than the previous year (see chart below).

In 2014 the European Commission unveiled an Investment Plan for Europe, intending to counter the low investment levels that have hampered the EU’s recovery in the wake of the global economic and financial crisis. The Investment Plan, which was endorsed by the European Council on 18 December 2014, aims to mobilise EUR 315bn of new investments through the European Fund for Strategic Investments (EFSI). The structure is designed to underpin the Bank’s capital adequacy, thanks to credit enhancements in the form of guarantees provided to the EIB Group from the EU budget. EFSI’s initial size was set at EUR 21bn, comprising EUR 16bn of EU guarantees and a EUR 5bn contribution from the EIB. Through EFSI, the EIB Group (including the EIF) is expected to deliver around EUR 60bn of new investments over roughly three to four years, starting in 2015. This will be in addition to average EIB baseline business volumes of around EUR 50bn per year from 2016, similar to pre-crisis volumes.

Evolution of the net result* (EUR million)

2 740

*

2 117

2 292

2010

2011

2012

2 515

2 626

2013

2014

The net result for 2012 included EUR 210m in exceptional income.

The Bank generates profits from large volumes of loans financed at low margins, consistent with its business model. The balance sheet total increased from EUR 512bn to EUR 542bn. The main driver of the growth was the net volume of loans disbursed, which increased from EUR 428bn to EUR 450bn (+5%).

2.1. High level of own funds – fuelling organic growth The Bank’s consistent profitability has enabled the buildup of substantial reserves. Own funds increased, on the back of the annual surplus, from EUR 57.9bn at end-2013 to EUR 60.6bn at end-2014.

2014

Financial Report

5

Own funds composition as at 31 December 2014 Own funds in EUR ‘000 Subscribed capital – Subscribed – Uncalled

It was decided that the surplus for the year be appropriated as follows: i) general loan reserve EUR 113.1m ii) special activities reserve EUR -96.8m iii) reserve fund EUR nil iv) additional reserve EUR 2 609.6m

2.2.

Evolution of the capital adequacy ratio

The Bank’s capital adequacy ratio remained relatively stable during the year, decreasing marginally from 26.1% in December 2013 to 26.0% in December 2014. The increase in the size of the Bank’s loan portfolio during the year was offset by an improvement in its credit quality (by way of internal rating upgrades) and an increase in own funds (due to the annual net surplus and payment of the second tranche of the 2013 capital increase), which meant that the effect on the capital adequacy ratio was broadly neutral.

2.3.

Capital structure – callable capital, additional backstop

The EIB’s capital is owned by the 28 EU Member States. In addition to the subscribed paid-in capital, the EIB has subscribed unpaid or callable capital. A special feature of the EIB is that the Member States have a legal obligation to pay their share of the callable capital on demand at the request of the EIB’s Board of Directors, as set out in the EIB’s Statute2 (an irrevocable, unconditional obligation). This legal obligation derives from an EU Treaty, which supersedes national law. The callable capital (which is not considered in the own funds, or for Basel III capital adequacy purposes) amounts to EUR 221.6bn and represents a buffer equivalent to roughly half of the Bank’s borrowings. EIB Statute, Article 5(3): “The Board of Directors may require payment of the balance of the subscribed capital, to such extent as may be required for the Bank to meet its obligations.” 3 Data on the loan portfolio provided in the Preface apply (unless otherwise stated) to what is termed the “risk portfolio” in the Financial Report, which excludes the portion of the portfolio outside the EU that benefits from a global guarantee from the EU or Member States (refer to Note U of the statutory financial statements for more details).

2

6

Financial Report 2014

21 699 135 22 828 922 1 144 024 6 090 520 3 663 165

36 241 432

33 726 631

2 625 851

2 514 801

60 566 418

57 940 567

3. A high-quality portfolio 3.1. Low level of arrears and impaired loans The conservative lending policy that the Bank applies, coupled with the nature of the projects financed, enabled a resilient high-quality loan portfolio3 to be maintained, even after taking into account the growth in risk-taking. The high credit quality of the loan portfolio is reflected in the EIB’s low rate of loan impairments and the historically low level of defaults. • At end-2014 there were 15 impaired loans (end-2013: 14 impaired loans) for a total disbursed exposure of EUR 955.5m (2013: EUR 873.7m), representing 0.2% of the total portfolio (end-2013: 0.2%), for which the Bank has specific provisions of EUR 483m (end-2013: EUR 361.4m). • The vast majority of loans outside the European Union are secured by guarantees from the European Union budget or the Member States. Arrears of over 90 days on such loans amounted to EUR 10.0m as at 31 December 2014 (end-2013: EUR 9.7m). Loans where guarantees had already been called from the European Union budget or the Member States involved a total outstanding amount of EUR 270.9m (2013: EUR 205.4m). • For loans not secured by European Union budget or Member State guarantees (known as the Bank’s risk portfolio, though many of these loans also benefit from various credit enhancements), arrears over 90 days amounted to EUR 87m as at 31 December 2014 (end-2013: EUR 80.6m).

3.2. Highly secured loanbook The vast majority (79%) of the Bank’s loan portfolio is secured through credit enhancements or recourse to EU Member States, the latter benefiting from the EIB’s preferred creditor status (PCS) and statutory protection. Credit en-

Preface

hancements are largely in the form of guarantees from EU sovereigns, the European Community budget, investmentgrade banks and corporates, as well as financial collateral and assignments of rights or pledges. Unsecured loans to banks and corporates had a combined value of EUR 102.5bn, representing 21% of the overall loan portfolio at 31 December 2014 (end-2013: 19%); the remainder of the portfolio benefits from security or has recourse to Member States. The share of the risk portfolio with a borrower or guarantor with an investment grade-equivalent internal rating was 79.4% as at end-2014 (end-2013: 79.3%). The disbursed sovereign exposures of the Bank through its lending activities amounted to EUR 38bn (end-2013: EUR 35bn), and the sovereign-guaranteed exposure was EUR 82bn (end-2013: EUR 73bn) – see also Note U of the statutory financial statements. In 2014 and 2013, the Bank did not record any impairment in respect of its holding of EU sovereign and sovereign-guaranteed exposures. For the Bank’s financing activities, which mainly entail lending, the Bank’s preferred creditor status and the protection afforded by the Bank’s Statute are deemed to guarantee full recovery of the Bank’s sovereign assets on maturity.

3.3. Watchlist stabilised The amount of operations on the watchlist remained on a downward trend in 2014, ending the year at EUR 9.0bn (2013: EUR 10.2bn; 2012: EUR 12.4bn). Watchlist operations now represent 1.7% of the risk portfolio (2013: 2.1%). Loans are placed on the internal watchlist for heightened monitoring in the event of counterparty downgrades or other adverse events, though they generally continue to perform.

3.4. Operations outside the EU By offering finance outside the EU, the Bank actively promotes the EU’s external policy objectives. The majority of its non-EU activities are covered by the guarantee of the EU (External Lending Mandate) or Member States (Cotonou Agreement), in the form of either a comprehensive or political risk guarantee.

Identification of a project opportunity

In its activities in Russia and with Russian entities, the Bank applies the sanctions adopted by the European Council. The Bank’s total disbursed exposure to borrowers in the Russian Federation was limited to EUR 335m at 31 December 2014, of which EUR 255m is at the EIB’s own risk. The remaining EUR 80m relates to operations under the EC comprehensive guarantee. In addition, the EIB has exposure to foreign subsidiaries of Russian groups outside the Russian Federation amounting to EUR 928m; EUR 314m of this exposure is secured by pledge of bonds or financial collateral. As far as operations in Ukraine are concerned, total disbursed exposure amounted to EUR 749m as at 31 December 2014. Of this amount, EUR 717m is covered by the EU External Lending Mandate guarantee and the residual EUR 32m in the EIB’s risk portfolio is secured by financial collateral. A further EUR 2.3bn is committed to Ukraine in signed operations not yet disbursed, of which approximately EUR 0.5bn is expected to be at the EIB’s risk.

3.5. Solid due diligence and stable selection criteria The due diligence process helps to ensure a high loan quality, with strict eligibility criteria being applied. Projects are appraised by a team that comprises, in addition to bankers, economists, engineers and other sector specialists, risk managers and lawyers. The viability of projects is assessed from five angles (financial, economic, social, environmental and technical) and strict risk policies and guidelines are applied at selection and throughout the lifecycle of the loan. Post-signature monitoring is performed with a view to intervening early in a transaction where the initial conditions may have deteriorated or contractual clauses may have been breached. Strict adherence to screening and ex ante evaluation rules, coupled with systematic ex post reviews, have, over time, benefited loan portfolio quality. The Bank continues to pursue lending activities with due regard for the need to balance market demand for financing with cost-coverage, financial self-sustainability and riskbearing capacity.

The total outstanding volume of signed loans as of end2014 amounted to EUR 549bn (end-2013: EUR 522bn), of which 89% were for projects within the EU (end-2013: 90%). The volume of loans disbursed as of the end of the year amounted to EUR 450bn (end-2013: EUR 428bn).

3.6. Annual volumes As far as new signatures are concerned (from all resources), the flows in 2014 further increased to EUR 77.0bn (2013: EUR 71.7bn). In parallel, disbursements increased from EUR 54.0bn in 2013 to EUR 64.3bn in 2014. The cumulative signed volume over the past two years is in line with the target to deliver an additional EUR 60bn in lending over 20132015, as enabled by the capital increase. A geographical analysis of signatures during the year is shown in the table below.

4. Risk management activities – following best banking practice The Bank aligns its risk management systems with best market practices, and adherence to those practices is monitored by the independent Audit Committee. The methodology used to determine operational targets and orientations takes into account the Bank’s objective of maintaining a robust credit standing, the long-term nature of its lending business and the granularity of its portfolio. The Bank has defined a set of indicators to monitor the credit, liquidity, market and operational risks inherent in its operations. These indicators include minimum capital requirements, credit quality distribution of the Bank’s portfolio, risk concentration measures and liquidity measures. The EIB’s lending policies establish minimum credit quality levels for both borrowers and guarantors in lending operations and identify the types of security that are deemed acceptable. In analysing risks, the Bank applies an internal loan grading system and assigns internal ratings to counterparties. In addition, via a counterparty and sector limit system, the credit policies ensure an acceptable degree of diversification in the loan portfolio. The established sector limits for the Bank’s ten largest industries effectively cap the aggregated exposure to each industry in the case of a downturn, whilst the Bank also monitors the aggregate exposure to 12 additional industries. With respect to market risk arising from the Bank’s lending and borrowing operations, the main principle of the Bank’s financial risk policy is that all material financial risks are hedged. For more details on financial risk management, refer to Note U of the statutory financial statements.

5. Prudent liquidity management Treasury activities are conducted with the primary objective of protecting the capital invested and to ensure that the Bank can meet its payment obligations on time and in full. Liquidity is consistently maintained at appropriate levels to cater for the operating environment. Total treasury assets amounted to EUR 65.6bn (end-2013: EUR 66bn), ensuring coverage of 69% of 2015 total projected net cash outflows (end-2013: 70%). The EIB is an eligible counterparty in the Eurosystem’s monetary policy operations and therefore has access to the monetary policy operations of the European Central Bank. This access has been activated, albeit at low levels, in a continuous manner to ensure its permanent operational maintenance. The Bank conducts the operations via the Central Bank of Luxembourg, where it maintains a deposit to cover the minimum reserve requirements. The ability to repo ECB-eligible collateral adds substantially to the EIB’s liquidity buffer. The treasury assets include several portfolios with different investments, benchmarks and maturities. The bulk of these assets (87% at end-2014) were held in an operational portfolio invested in short-term instruments with a maturity of up to three months. Secured transactions (e.g. repo instruments) accounted for 39% of treasury investments (end-2013: 53%), thus further enhancing portfolio quality. The other portfolios form a buffer to be used in exceptional circumstances, and are invested in a diversified range of liquid securities. They include some mediumterm debt issued by private and public sector entities with good credit standards (for a breakdown of the credit exposure on various treasury portfolios, please see Note S in the Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS). The total EU sovereign treasury exposure, excluding loan substitutes, as of 31 December 2014 was EUR 13.0bn, or 20% of total treasury assets (end-2013: EUR 14.7bn and 22% respectively). In terms of maturity, the bulk of these exposures (83% at end-2014) were held in short-term instruments of less than three months (end-2013: 84%).

2014

Financial Report

9

Borrowing Activities in 2014

Resilient funding strategy The EIB raises long-term funds via bond issuance in international capital markets to support its lending operations. With the objectives of attaining adequate volume and maturity, as well as optimising the funding cost on a sustainable basis, the EIB’s funding strategy combines the issuance of large and liquid bonds (“benchmarks”) in core currencies – EUR, USD and GBP – with targeted and tailor-made issuance across currencies. Guided by this approach, the EIB raised EUR 61.6bn in 2014.

Highlights of funding in the EIB’s core currencies The pillar of the EIB’s funding continued to be issuance in the Bank’s core currencies EUR, USD and GBP, which together accounted for 88% of the total volumes raised, 76% of which in benchmark format. •

EUR: EUR remained the largest source of funding (representing EUR 24.7bn, or 40% of total issuance) and contributed the longest average maturity among the EIB’s core currencies (9.3 years). The all-time low and decreasing level of interest rates encouraged investors to pursue yields in the 6 to 10-year maturity bracket, but tended to curtail interest beyond 10 years. The EIB thus concentrated issuance on the intermediate part of the curve. Mini-benchmarks (“ECoops”) raised EUR 11.9bn in total, proving again to be a valuable tool in addressing specific pockets of demand, for example in maturities beyond 10 years. ECoop is also the chosen format for the EIB’s EUR-denominated Green Bonds. In 2014, EUR 2.2bn of ECoops were issued in Climate Awareness Bond (CAB) format, in 5- and 12-year maturities, creating the largest and longest benchmarks in this market.

•

USD: With almost USD 28.8bn issued, 2014 was one of the strongest years to date for the EIB in this funding currency, and the Bank was the only SSA issuer to refresh its full USD benchmark curve (3, 5, 7 and 10-year)

Market conditions In 2014, the funding environment was generally positive. The low level of interest rates supported a compression and convergence of spreads in the sovereign, supranational and agency (SSA) sector. Generally this had a favourable impact on bond performance and funding cost. The Bank’s funding benefited from the reinforcement of the EIB’s high credit standing, supported by the EUR 10bn capital increase of 2013, stabilisation of the Bank’s asset quality and diminishing risks emanating from the euro area debt crisis.

10

Financial Report 2014

EIB Borrowing Activity

twice. The Bank issued its first ever 7-year in full Global benchmark size, and returned to the 10-year tenor for the first time since 2011. In the course of 2014, US regulators explicitly classified EIB bonds as Level 1 High Quality Liquid Assets for the calculation of the Basel III Liquidity Coverage Ratio, which further boosted bank demand for the EIB’s USD bonds. In addition, the Bank launched an inaugural USD 1bn 10-year Global Climate Awareness Bond.

Rate Note (FRN) issuance. A low-yield environment, combined with the EIB’s position as the leading nongilt issuer, enabled the Bank to issue a new 7-year FRN, the longest ever in the sterling SSA sector. 2014 was also marked by a record volume of buybacks in GBP. In addition, last year several innovative EIB transactions were presented: the first SSA Green Bond in sterling, the first intra-day SSA public exchange offer in Europe and the first intra-day multi-tranche buyback offer.

GBP: In 2014, the EIB achieved its third largest ever funding volume in GBP. This was made possible in particular by demand from bank treasuries for Floating

The EIB remained committed to currency diversification in 2014, issuing in 18 currencies, of which three in synthetic format (2013: 15 currencies, of which one in synthetic format). Non-core currency issuance increased significantly on 2013, in terms of both volume and frequency of issuance. These currencies provided a cost advantage for the Bank, particularly in the last quarter of the year, when issuance could be more selective as most of the programme had been completed. In 2014, the EIB was the market leading sub-sovereign issuer in Turkish lira (TRY) and South African rand (ZAR), representing more than 50% of global non-domestic

•

•

sovereign issuance, driven by attractive cost levels and sizes. Likewise, the AUD market became more attractive, and there were sizeable opportunities in CAD and CHF. The EIB also became more active in issuing in Central and Eastern European (CEE) currencies, as investor demand increased, particularly for floating-rate products. Structured issuance was active, albeit modest in terms of overall volumes, representing only 3% of total funding. Notably, the EIB issued a number of JPY-denominated structured Power Reverse Dual Currency (PRDC) bonds in the first half of the year. Demand for issuance in synthetic-currency format, and more specifically for BRL, was still buoyant in 2014, permitting the Bank to issue several transactions payable in EUR and USD. The EIB was also active in the IDR market, with a couple of fixed-rate issues, and the Bank issued a bond in synthetic INR after a three-year hiatus.

Non-core currency issuance

2014          

TRY AUD ZAR CAD CHF SEK JPY NOK NZD Others

2013 24% 16% 16% 11% 10% 6% 6% 5% 4% 2%

2014 Currency

No. of issues

Amount in EUR m equiv.

Average maturity (years)

TRY

70

1 744

4.6

AUD

8

1 217

6.6

ZAR

45

1 172

5.7

CAD

2

801

4.8

CHF

5

734

10.9

SEK

6

481

5.1

JPY

34

437

17.1

NOK

9

393

6.4

NZD

4

267

4.8

CZK

3

73

17.5

PLN

2

24

8.3

RON

1

20

5.0

Total

189

7 362

6.8

12

Financial Report 2014

        

TRY AUD ZAR CAD CHF SEK JPY NOK Others

13% 12% 16% 13% 13% 10% 5% 16% 2%

Green Bonds •

•

•

During 2014, the EIB issued EUR 4.3bn of Climate Awareness Bonds (CABs). In the course of the year, EUR 3.7bn of disbursements were found eligible for allocation of proceeds from CAB issuance and EUR 3.3bn of CAB proceeds were allocated to such disbursements following the EIB’s allocation procedures. The balance of unallocated CAB proceeds in the treasury CAB portfolio amounted to EUR 0.1bn at the beginning of the year and to EUR 1.1bn at the end of the year. The EUR Climate Awareness Bond due 2019 was increased to EUR 2.6bn, making it the largest Green Bond outstanding in the market. The EIB added a second key reference on its EUR Green Bond curve with a 12-year transaction, the longest Green Bond benchmark in any currency. An additional highlight of last year was the EIB’s inaugural Climate Awareness Bond in USD, which established

EIB Borrowing Activity

the longest (10-year) USD Green Bond benchmark in the market. The Bank also launched its first GBP-denominated CAB, the first Green Bond in this currency from an SSA issuer.

•

Issuance in EUR, GBP and USD was complemented by transactions in other currencies, notably CHF, JPY, SEK and ZAR.

2014

Maturity mix of EIB funding Currency

•

The average maturity of funding was 7.2 years, in line with historical levels and ALM needs, and slightly lower than in 2013 (8.2 years).

Diversification in non-core currencies offered good duration at very attractive costs.

2013

Average maturity (years)

Currency

EUR GBP USD TRY AUD ZAR Others

9.3 4.8 5.9 4.6 6.6 5.7 8.5

EUR GBP USD NOK ZAR CHF Others

Total

7.2

Total

100

Geographic highlights

Average maturity (years) 10.9 5.6 5.1 10.0 5.3 12.0 9.1 8.2

5% 4%

3% 7%

2% 12%

34%

27%

24%

63%

62%

80

•

•

Europe, with a 62% share, remained the largest source of investor demand. Within the European Union, the largest markets were the UK, Germany and France. The relative importance of the Americas increased significantly, largely thanks to higher demand from USbased bank treasuries and asset managers for the EIB’s USD products.

60

40

57%

20

0 2012 

Europe

2013 

Asia



Americas

2014 

Middle East & Africa

Investor types 100

•

Bank treasuries remained the leading investor type, with their relative importance increased from 2013, influenced by regulatory requirements for highly rated credits.

3% 24%

80

•

The search for higher yields in a low interest rate environment supported demand in the intermediate part of the curve (up to 10 years), in particular among bank treasuries. Central banks remained the leading investors in the short part of the curve (up to five years).

Note: Although the data cover the bulk of placements, not all placement information was made available to the EIB. Consequently, comments and graphs on placements by geography or investor type in this section are of an indicative nature only. Numbers and percentages may not total due to rounding.

2014

Financial Report

13

Treasury Activities in 2014

Sound investment strategy The treasury management has a dual role of ensuring that the Bank has the capacity to continually meet its financial commitments and of implementing the Bank’s asset and liability policy. Funds are invested in designated portfolios with defined criteria based on a low-risk strategy of diversification, which must comply at all times with the guidelines, prudential limits and indicators laid down by the EIB’s governing bodies.

Focus on liquidity to meet commitments Treasury management is compliant with the set prudential ratios such as the total liquidity ratio, which at end-2014 stood at 69.1%, in excess of the minimum liquidity requirement of 25%.1 The component portfolios of the operational treasury included at year-end 2014: • •

•

1

14

Financial Report 2014

a short-term money-market portfolio (A1), designed for daily liquidity management in 15 different currencies; a securities liquidity portfolio (SLP), which invests in the core currencies (EUR, GBP, USD) and aims to provide good diversification and to enhance the treasury’s performance. Operating under the constraint of holding 75% of ECB-eligible assets, the SLP also serves as an additional line of liquidity. It is divided into two subportfolios, a rates portfolio (P1) and a credit spread portfolio (P2); a long-term hedge portfolio (LTHP), which serves as an asset and liabilities management (ALM) tool, targeting high-quality EUR-denominated assets. It was last used in June in order to balance the ALM position. The minimum liquidity ratio is 25% of the forecast net cash outflows for the following calendar year.

EIB Treasury Activity

Treasury financial result in 2014 Despite a low-yield environment the total average rate of return on the Bank’s liquidity remained at a stable level of 0.44% in 2014 (0.42% at year-end 2013). Similarly, the financial income from treasury operational portfolios (including the LTHP) remained almost unchanged (increase from EUR 254.6m in 2013 to EUR 256.2m in 2014). The A1 Liquidity Portfolio produced an accounting income of EUR 177.7m in 2014, compared to EUR 205.8m in 2013. In 2013 a new structure for the medium to longterm portfolios was approved, which provides increased flexibility in asset management whilst retaining a prudent risk framework; the resulting SLP portfolio, which became operational in January 2014, generated an accounting income of EUR 44.9m in 2014, compared to the EUR 6.8m of its predecessor (the so-called “Meta portfolio”) in 2013. The LTHP portfolio showed an accounting income of EUR 33.6m in 2014, compared to EUR 42.0m in 2013.

The Management Committee approved the launch of implementation of a new collateral management solution for the EIB. The objective is to further improve the Bank’s resilience to liquidity risk and to allow for dynamic and integrated management of its diverse collateral sources.

Asset and liability management The interest rate and foreign exchange rate risk position of the Bank’s assets and liabilities is managed within prescribed limits. This involves rebalancing the interest rate risk profile through the use of standard derivative instruments to achieve a target financial duration. The ALM policy aims to ensure self-sustainability of the Bank’s business and growth of own funds. The Bank’s exposure in Polish zloty, Czech koruna and Hungarian forint is managed on a portfolio basis through the deployment of cross-currency swaps from EUR. In terms of currency volume Polish zloty commitments in 2014 represented for the first time the third-largest disbursement segment after EUR and GBP, but before USD.

Strong liquidity situation The 2014 daily average total net liquidity amounted to EUR 59.9bn, i.e. 5% below the 2013 level of EUR 63.1bn. The EIB was able to achieve an average liquidity ratio of 83%, which was well above the minimum liquidity requirement of 25% of the forecast net cash outflows for the following calendar year. At 31 December 2014 the Bank’s total treasury assets amounted to EUR 65.6bn (EUR 66.0bn at yearend 2013), corresponding to a total liquidity ratio of 69%. The prudent approach adopted in the treasury management concentrated the net liquidity in the short-term money-market portfolio. However, in comparative terms, the size of the short-term portfolio decreased in 2014 in the context of low yields and the split between the short-term and other portfolios moved to 87.6% vs 13.4% at year-end 2014 (93.2% vs 6.8% in 2013).

2014

Financial Report

15

EIB Statutory Bodies

Situation at 12 March 2015 The composition of the Bank’s statutory bodies, the curricula vitae of their members and additional information on the remuneration arrangements are regularly updated and posted on the EIB’s website: www.eib.org.

(Netherlands) Minister for Finance Minister for Finance Deputy Prime Minister, Minister of Finance Minister for Business and Growth Federal Minister for Finance Minister for Finance Minister for Finance Minister for Finance Minister for Economic Affairs and Competitiveness Minister for Finance and Public Accounts Minister of Finance Minister of Economy and Finance Minister for Finance Minister for Finance Minister for Finance Minister for Finance Minister for National Economy Minister for Finance Minister for Finance Federal Minister for Finance Minister for Finance Minister of State and Minister of Finance Minister of Public Finance Minister for Finance Deputy Prime Minister and Minister of Finance Minister of Finance Minister for Finance Chancellor of the Exchequer

Board of Directors The Board of Directors consists of 29 Directors, with one Director nominated by each Member State and one by the European Commission. There are 19 Alternates, meaning that some of these positions will be shared by groupings of states. Furthermore, in order to broaden the Board of Directors’ professional expertise in certain fields, the Board is able to co-opt a maximum of six experts (three Directors and three Alternates), who participate in the Board meetings in an advisory capacity, without voting rights. Directors Franciscus GODTS Karina KARAIVANOVA

Head of Department, International and European Financial Affairs, Treasury, Ministry of Finance, Brussels Deputy Minister of Finance, Ministry of Finance, Sofia

Jan GREGOR

Deputy Minister of Finance, Prague

Hans HØJ

Head of Division, Financial Affairs, Ministry for Business and Growth, Copenhagen

Thomas WESTPHAL

Director General – European Policy, Federal Ministry of Finance, Berlin

Martin PÕDER

Head of the Finance Section, Estonia’s Permanent Representation to the EU, Brussels

Head of the International Economics and Financial Institutions Division, Foreign Financial Relations Directorate, Ministry of Finance, The Hague Deputy Head of Division for Coordination of European Integration Matters and Trade Policy, Federal Ministry of Finance, Vienna Undersecretary of State, Ministry of Finance, Warsaw

Elsa RONCON SANTOS

Director General for Treasury and Finance, Ministry of Finance, Lisbon

Enache JIRU

Secretary of State, Ministry of Public Finance, Bucharest

Anton ROP

Honorary Vice-President of the European Investment Bank, Vodice

Katarina KASZASOVÁ

Director General of the State Reporting Section, Ministry of Finance, Bratislava

Independent non-executive director, former Senior Advisor to the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change, former Chairman of KPMG, Global Infrastructure & Projects, Essex Member of the Executive Board, KfW Bankengruppe, Frankfurt

(…)

…

Alternates Gauthier BOURLARD (…)

Inspector, Coordinator within the Multilateral Institutions Unit, International and European Financial Affairs (IEFA), Treasury, Ministry of Finance, Brussels …

Martin HEIPERTZ

Head of Division “European Policy”, Federal Ministry of Finance, Berlin

Rudolf LEPERS

Head of Division, Federal Ministry of Economic Affairs and Technology, Berlin

Chief of Staff of the General Secretary of Treasury and Financial Policy, Ministry for Economic Affairs and Competitiveness, Madrid Head of Bilateral Affairs and European Financial Instruments Office, Europe Department, Treasury Directorate General, Ministry for Economic Affairs and Finance, Paris Chief Executive Officer of Agence Française de Développement, Paris

(…)

Adviser in the European Union and International Affairs Department, Ministry of Finance, Tallinn Division Chief, International Financial Relations Directorate, Department of the Treasury, Ministry of Economic Affairs and Finance, Rome …

Audit Committee – The Audit Committee is an independent statutory body, appointed by and reporting directly to the Board of Governors, in compliance with the formalities and procedures defined in the Bank’s Statute and Rules of Procedure. The role of the Audit Committee is to verify that the Bank’s operations have been conducted and its books kept in a proper manner and that the activities of the Bank conform to best banking practice. The Audit Committee has overall responsibility for the auditing of the Bank’s accounts. The Audit Committee is composed of six members, who are appointed by the Board of Governors for a non-renewable term of six years. Members are chosen from among persons having independence, competence and integrity and who possess financial, auditing or banking supervisory expertise in the private or public sector. In addition, a maximum of three observers may be appointed to the Audit Committee on the basis of their particular qualifications, especially with regard to banking supervision. The Audit Committee provides Statements each year on whether the financial statements, as well as any other financial information contained in the financial report drawn up by the Board of Directors, give a true and fair view of the financial position of the Bank, the EIB Group, and certain Trust Funds administered by the Bank. The Audit Committee reports on the EIB’s compliance with best banking practice through its Annual Report to the Board of Governors.

20

Financial Report 2014

Audit and Control

In fulfilling its role, the Audit Committee meets with representatives of the other statutory bodies, reviews the financial statements, oversees the verification procedures and practical modalities for implementing and maintaining the framework of best banking practices applicable to the Bank’s services, takes note of the work performed by the internal auditors, monitors the work of the external auditors, safeguards the independence of the external audit function and coordinates audit work in general. Regular meetings with Bank staff and reviews of internal and external reports enable the Audit Committee to understand and monitor how Management is providing for adequate and effective internal control systems, risk management and internal administration. The Inspector General, the Chief Compliance Officer and the Financial Controller have direct access to the Audit Committee and may request private meetings if necessary. External Auditors – The EIB’s external auditors, KPMG, report directly to the Audit Committee, which is empowered to delegate the day-to-day work of auditing the financial statements to them. The external auditors are not allowed to carry out any work of an advisory nature or act in any other capacity that might compromise their independence when performing their audit tasks. A summary of services provided by the external auditors and the associated fees is published each year by the Bank on its website. Financial Control – Financial Control (FC) is an independent Directorate and reports directly to the Bank’s Management Committee. FC’s main responsibilities relate to the Bank’s books and records and its various financial statements. Together with the Secretary General, the Financial Controller manages the relationship with the external auditors, the Audit Committee and the European Court of Auditors. Inspectorate General – The Inspectorate General (IG) for the EIB Group comprises four independent control functions. Internal Audit. Catering for audit needs at all levels of management of the EIB Group and acting with the guarantees of independence and of professional standards conferred upon it by its Charter, Internal Audit examines and evaluates the relevance and effectiveness of the internal control systems and the procedures involved in managing risk within the Group. An internal control framework covering all key operational activities of the Group and any newly identified processes continues to be maintained. Action Plans agreed with the Bank’s departments are a catalyst for improving procedures and strengthening controls. In support of the Audit Committee’s mandate on best banking practice, Internal Audit includes such assessments in all elements of its work. Internal Audit therefore reviews and tests controls in critical banking, information technology

and administrative areas on a rotational basis using a riskbased approach. Operations Evaluation. Operations Evaluation (EV) independently carries out evaluations (mainly ex post) of the EIB Group’s operations. The objective is to assess EIB activities with a view to identifying aspects that could improve operational performance, accountability and transparency. EV focuses on how the institution (EIB/EIF) conducts its operations within the framework of relevant EU policies and the decisions of the EIB’s Governors. EV’s work also includes analysis of the related policies and strategies to identify those aspects that may need to be reviewed by the appropriate bodies. Evaluation reports are published in a dedicated section of the EIB’s website (www.eib.org/ evaluation). Fraud Investigation. Under the anti-fraud policy approved by the Board, the Inspector General, through the Fraud Investigation Division (IG/IN), has the authority to conduct independent inquiries into allegations of possible fraud, corruption, collusion, coercion or obstruction involving EIB operations or activities. The Bank may also call upon external assistance or experts in accordance with the requirements of the inquiry, and works closely with the services of the European Anti-Fraud Office (OLAF). The scope of activities also encompasses a proactive anti-fraud approach – the Proactive Integrity Reviews (PIRs). Through PIRs the Inspectorate General supports the Bank’s efforts to monitor projects, identify red flags and search for possible indicators of fraud and/or corruption. Projects are selected for PIRs independently by IG on the basis of an extensive risk assessment process. Moreover, IG/IN is working to implement Exclusion Procedures, which will permit the Management Committee, following an adversary procedure resulting in a recommendation from an Exclusion Committee, to exclude from future operations and activities for a certain length of time entities found to have engaged in fraud or corruption. Complaints Mechanism. The EIB Complaints Mechanism, as defined by its published Principles, Terms of Reference and Rules of Procedure, is a tool of horizontal accountability of the EIB Group vis-à-vis its stakeholders as regards the handling of complaints concerning its activities. It ensures that stakeholders have appropriate means available to voice their concerns and aims to provide the public with procedures to enable the pre-emptive settlement of disputes between the public and the EIB Group. Any member of the public has access to a two-tier sequential mechanism: an internal part – under the responsibility of the Complaints Mechanism Division (EIB-CM) – and, if a complainant is not satisfied with the outcome of the internal mechanism, an external one – the European Ombudsman. To that end, the EIB and the European Ombudsman have signed a Memorandum of Understanding.

2014

Financial Report

21

Office of the Group Chief Compliance Officer (OCCO) – In accordance with the principles set out by the Basel Committee, OCCO’s remit is: “to identify, assess, advise on, monitor and report on the compliance risk of the EIB Group, that is, the risk of legal or regulatory sanctions, financial loss, or loss to reputation a member of the EIB Group may suffer as a result of its failure to comply with all applicable laws, regulations, staff codes of conduct and standards of good practice.” In particular, OCCO “acts as a first line detector of potential incidents of non-observance or breaches by the staff of the rules on ethics and integrity, monitors compliance therewith by the staff of the EIB Group and recommends the adoption of such protective or redressing measures as are appropriate.”

2. the establishment and updating of policies and guidelines, with particular reference to (i) money laundering/ financing of terrorism (AML-CFT); (ii) specific transparency/integrity risks (e.g. for operations linked to noncompliant jurisdictions); and (iii) primary ethics and regulatory issues (e.g. insider dealing, conflicts of interest, etc.); 3. administration of (i) the Staff Code of Conduct and (ii) the Management Committee Code of Conduct, except for matters within the remit of the Ethics and Compliance Committee (where the GCCO delivers opinions and participates without voting rights); and 4. controls on procedures related to procurement for the Bank’s own account.

OCCO is a group function headed by the Group Chief Compliance Officer (GCCO), supported by a dedicated compliance unit at the EIF. As set out in the EIB Integrity Policy and Compliance Charter, in line with best banking practices and the Basel Committee, OCCO is an independent function “reporting directly to the President of the EIB under the functional authority of a Vice-President”. In October 2012, OCCO was transformed into a Directorate.

The above activities are complemented by regular training and awareness-building initiatives (AML-CFT training; presentations of OCCO activities to newcomers and members of EIB governing bodies; presentations and workshops on main OCCO policies and general compliance issues), in order to ensure staff awareness and, whenever possible, involvement in OCCO control activities for the timely detection and management of compliance risks within the EIB Group.

OCCO is entrusted with a control mission and acts in close cooperation with EIB operational services, the Legal Directorate and other control services such as IG/Investigations. Regular contacts are held by GCCO with peer international financial institutions (such as the World Bank, the EBRD and the IFC), EU bodies, standard-setting international organisations (e.g. FATF) and local authorities (e.g. FIU Luxembourg) in order to enable ongoing alignment of OCCO activities with relevant international standards and best banking practice. OCCO activities are currently focused on the following main areas: 1. the assessment of integrity, money laundering and financing of terrorism risks in EIB operations for EIB lending, borrowing and treasury activities;

22

Financial Report 2014

Management Control – Within the Secretariat General, the Planning, Budget and Analytics Division brings together the functions responsible for management control – namely operational planning, budget/cost accounting and associated analyses. This structure ensures that the overall planning and management reporting processes are coordinated and support the achievement of the Bank-wide objectives and ultimately that the results achieved are monitored. Key tools include the Corporate Operational Plan, the budget and independent opinions and analysis on proposals affecting them, plus the associated management accounting and control systems. A suite of integrated reports facilitates ongoing evaluation of the situation in relation to strategy, institutional and operational (including financial) objectives and business plans.

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

2014 Financial Report

27

Cash flow statement for the year ended 31 December 2014 (in EUR ‘000)

A. Cash flows from operating activities: Profit for the financial year Adjustments for: Change in value adjustments on loans and advances (Note D.2) Change in provisions on pension plans and health insurance scheme Change in provisions for commitment on investment funds and guarantees on venture capital operations Value adjustments in respect of tangible and intangible assets Value (re-)adjustments in respect of shares and other variable-yield securities Held to maturity portfolio amortisation Effect of exchange rate changes Profit on operati activities Disbursements of loans and advances to credit institutions and customers Repayments of loans and advances to credit institutions and customers Change in deposits with central banks Change in treasury securities liquidity portfolios Change in venture capital operations included in shares and other variable-yield securities Change in shares and other variable-yield securities excluding venture capital operations Change in amounts owed to credit institutions and customers Change in prepayments and accrued income Change in other assets Change in short term treasury derivative valuations Change in accruals and deferred income Change in other liabilities Net cash used in o eratin activities B. Cash flows from investing activities: Purchase and sale of EIF shares Securities in Long Term Hedge Portfolio purchased during the year Securities from Long Term Hedge Portfolio matured during the year Purchase of loan substitutes included in the debt securities portfolios Redemption of loan substitutes included in the debt securities portfolios Purchase and disposal of tangible and intangible assets Net cash used in investin activities C. Cash flows from financing activities: Issuance of debts evidenced by certificates Redemption of debts evidenced by certificates Member States’ contribution Net cash from financin activities Summary statement of cash flows: Cash and cash equivalents at be inni financial ear Net cash from: Operating activities Investing activities Financing activities Effect of exchange rate changes on cash held Cash and cash equivalents at end of financial ear Cash and cash equivalents are composed of: Cash in hand, balances with central banks and post office banks, excluding deposits with Central Bank of Luxembourg to cover minimum reserve requirement (Note B.1) Treasury bills maturing within three months of issue (Note B.2: A1 portfolio) Loans and advances to credit institutions: Repayable on demand Other loans and advances (Note C)

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Notes to the financial statements as at 31 December 2014 The European Investment Bank (the ‘Bank’ or ‘EIB’) was created by the Treaty of Rome in 1958 as the long-term lending bank of the European Union (‘EU’). The task of the Bank is to contribute towards the integration, balanced development and economic and social cohesion of the EU Member States. The EIB raises substantial volumes of funds on the capital markets and lends these funds on favourable terms to projects furthering EU policy objectives. The EIB continuously adapts its activities to developments in EU policies. The Bank has its registered office at 98-100, boulevard Konrad Adenauer, Luxembourg.

Note A – Significant accounting policies

A.1.

Accounting standards

The unconsolidated financial statements (the ‘Financial Statements’) of the European Investment Bank have been prepared in accordance with the general principles of the Directive 86/635/EEC of the Council of the European Communities of 8 December 1986 on the annual accounts and consolidated accounts of banks and other financial institutions, as amended by Directive 2001/65/EC of 27 September 2001, by Directive 2003/51/EC of 18 June 2003 and by Directive 2006/46/EC of 14 June 2006 on the annual and consolidated accounts of certain types of companies, banks and other financial institutions (the ‘Directives’). However, the Financial Statements do not include any management report. The Bank prepares an Activity Report which is presented separately from the Financial Statements and its consistency with the Financial Statements is not audited. On a proposal from the Management Committee, the Board of Directors adopted the Financial Statements on 12 March 2015 and authorised their submission to the Board of Governors for approval by 28 April 2015. In preparing the Financial Statements, the Management Committee is required to make estimates and assumptions that affect reported income, expenses, assets, liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. Use of available information and application of judgement are inherent in the formation of estimates. Actual results in the future could differ from such estimates and the resulting differences may be material to the Financial Statements. The Bank also publishes consolidated financial statements as at the same date as the annual Financial Statements.

A.2.

Foreign currency translation

The EIB uses the euro (EUR) as the unit of measure for the capital accounts of Member States and for presenting its Financial Statements. The Bank conducts its operations in the currencies of its Member States, in euro and in non-EU currencies. Its resources are derived from its capital, borrowings and accumulated earnings in various currencies. Foreign currency transactions are translated at the exchange rate prevailing on the date of the transaction. The Bank's monetary assets and liabilities denominated in currencies other than euro are translated into euro at closing exchange rates prevailing at the balance sheet date. The gain or loss arising from such translation is recorded in the profit and loss account.

A.3.

Derivatives

The Bank uses derivative instruments, mainly currency and interest rate swaps, as part of its asset and liability management (“ALM”) activities to manage exposures to interest rate and foreign currency risks, including exposures arising from forecast transactions. All derivatives transactions are booked at nominal as off-balance sheet items at the date of the transaction. The majority of the Bank’s swaps are concluded with a view to hedging specific bond issues. The Bank enters into currency swaps, whereby the proceeds of a borrowing are initially converted into a different currency and on maturity the Bank will obtain the amounts needed to service the borrowing in the original currency. The Bank also enters into currency, interest rate and overnight index swaps as part of its hedging operations on loans or for the global ALM position. The corresponding interest is accounted for on a pro rata temporis basis. The Bank also uses derivative instruments as part of its treasury operations.

A.3.1. Trading portfolio derivatives Trading portfolio derivatives are recorded at market value in the balance sheet as Other assets when their market value is positive or Other liabilities when their market value is negative. Changes in the market value are included in Net result on financial operations. Market values are

2014 Financial Report

29

obtained from quoted market prices, discounted cash flow models and option pricing models, which consider current market and contractual prices for the underlying instrument, as well as time value of money, yield curve and volatility of the underlying. Interest on derivative instruments is accrued pro rata temporis under Prepayments and accrued income or Accruals and deferred income. Currency swaps Currency swap contracts are entered into in order to adjust currency positions. The revaluation of the spot leg of a currency swap is neutralised in Accruals and deferred income or Prepayments and accrued income. The premium/discount between the spot and forward settlement amounts is amortised pro rata temporis through the profit and loss account in Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. The market value is recorded under Other assets when their market value is positive or Other liabilities when their market value is negative. Changes in the market value are included in Net result on financial operations. Interest rate swaps The interest received and paid under interest rate swaps is accrued pro rata temporis and reported in the profit and loss account under Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. The market value is recorded under Other assets when their market value is positive or Other liabilities when their market value is negative. Changes in the market value are included in Net result on financial operations.

A.3.2

All other derivatives

Currency swaps Currency swap contracts are entered into in order to adjust currency positions. The revaluation of the spot leg of a currency swap is neutralised in Accruals and deferred income or Prepayments and accrued income. The forward leg of the currency swap is recorded off-balance sheet at settlement amount and is not revalued. The premium/discount between the spot and forward settlement amounts is amortised pro rata temporis through the profit and loss account in Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. Interest rate swaps The hedging interest rate swaps are not revalued. The interest received and paid under interest rate swaps is accrued pro rata temporis and reported in the profit and loss account under Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. Currency forwards Currency forwards are entered into in order to adjust future currency positions. The forward leg is recorded off-balance sheet at settlement amount and is not revalued. The difference between the spot amounts and the forward settlement amounts is amortised pro rata temporis through the profit and loss account in Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. Interest on derivative instruments is accrued pro rata temporis under Prepayments and accrued income or Accruals and deferred income.

A.4.

Financial assets

Financial assets are accounted for using the settlement date basis.

A.5.

Cash and cash equivalents

The Bank defines cash and cash equivalents as short term, highly liquid securities and interest-earning deposits with maturities of 90 days or less.

A.6.

Treasury bills and other bills eligible for refinancing with central banks and debt securities including fixed-income securities

The Bank changed its debt securities portfolio structure during 2014, in order to reduce the portfolio complexity and optimise allocation of liquid assets. As a result, three new portfolios were created (Securities liquidity portfolios P1 and P2, classified as held for trading, and long term hedge portfolio, classified as held to maturity) and five former portfolios are phased out (Operational bond portfolio A2, B1, B3 and B4 and the investment portfolio).

A.6.1. Long term hedge portfolio (formerly the Investment portfolio) The long term hedge portfolio consists of securities purchased with the intention of holding them to maturity. These securities are issued or guaranteed by: • Governments of the European Union Member States, G10 countries and their agencies; • Supranational public institutions, including multinational development banks. These securities are initially recorded at purchase price or more exceptionally at transfer price. Value adjustments are accounted for, if these are other than temporary. The difference between entry price and redemption value is accounted for pro rata temporis over the life of the securities. All the securities remaining in the former Investment portfolio were transferred into the newly created Long term hedge portfolio, where they will continue to be held until final maturity.

30

Financial Report

2014

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

A.6.2. Operational portfolios A.6.2.1 Current operational portfolio structure • Operational money market portfolio A1 and Unitary Fund (UF) In order to maintain an adequate level of liquidity, the Bank purchases money market products with a maximum maturity of 3 months, in particular Treasury bills and negotiable debt securities issued by public bodies and credit institutions. The securities in the A1 portfolio are held until their final maturity and presented in the Financial Statements at amortised cost. Value adjustments are accounted for, if these are other than temporary. The UF portfolio includes securities with maturities of up to 12 months which are available for sale. Bonds are initially recorded at acquisition cost and presented in the Financial Statements at market value. Changes in market value are recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account.

• Securities liquidity portfolios P1 and P2 The P1 ‘fixed rate’ and P2 ‘floating rate’ portfolios comprise bonds issued or guaranteed by national governments, supranational institutions, financial institutions and corporations. Securities in these portfolios are initially recorded at acquisition cost and presented in the Financial Statements at market value. Changes in market value are recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. The market value of treasury portfolios is based on published price quotations in an active market as the first source. For instruments without available published price quotations, the market values are determined by obtaining quotes from market participants and/or by using valuation techniques or models, based whenever possible on observable market data prevailing at the balance sheet date. A.6.2.2 Former operational portfolio structure • Operational bond portfolios A2, B1, B3 and B4 The A2 portfolio included securities with maturities of up to 18 months which were available for sale. Bonds were initially recorded at acquisition cost and presented in the Financial Statements at market value. Changes in market value were recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. The difference between the acquisition cost and redemption amount was amortised pro rata temporis as Interest receivable and similar income. The B1 ‘Credit Spread’ portfolio comprised floating-rate and fixed-rate bonds issued or guaranteed by national governments, supranational institutions, financial institutions and corporations. These securities were available for sale. Bonds were initially recorded at acquisition cost and presented in the Financial Statements at market value. Changes in market value were recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. The difference between the acquisition cost and redemption amount was amortised pro rata temporis as Interest receivable and similar income. The B3 ‘Global Fixed Income’ portfolio comprised listed securities with a maximum residual maturity of 10 years, issued and/or guaranteed by sovereigns, their agencies or by financial institutions. Securities held in this portfolio were marked to market value in the balance sheet; the corresponding changes in market value were recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. The B4 ‘Inflation Linked Investment’ portfolio comprised listed securities with a maximum residual maturity of 30 years, issued by EU Governments. Securities held in this portfolio were marked to market value in the balance sheet; the corresponding changes in market value were recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. No change has occurred in the treatment of A1 portfolio.

A.6.3. Loan substitutes This portfolio mainly consists of obligations in the form of bonds, notes or certificates issued by Special Purpose Vehicles (SPV), trust vehicles or financial institutions. These securities are classified as held to maturity and initially recorded at purchase price and valued at amortised cost. The difference between purchase price and redemption value is accounted for pro rata temporis over the life of the securities. Value adjustments are accounted for, if these are other than temporary.

A.7.

Loans and advances to credit institutions and customers

A.7.1. Loans and advances Loans and advances are included in the assets of the Bank at their net disbursed amounts. Value adjustments have been made for loans and advances outstanding at the end of the financial year and presenting risks of non-recovery of all or part of their amounts. Such value adjustments are held in the same currency as the assets to which they relate. Value adjustments are accounted for in the profit and loss account as ‘Value adjustments in respect of loans and advances’ and are deducted from the appropriate asset items on the balance sheet.

2014 Financial Report

31

A.7.2. Interest on loans Interest on loans are recorded in the profit and loss account on an accruals basis, i.e. over the life of the loans. On the balance sheet, accrued interest is included in ‘Prepayments and accrued income’ under assets. Value adjustments to interest amounts on these loans are determined on a case-by-case basis by the Bank’s Management and deducted from the appropriate asset item on the balance sheet.

A.7.3. Reverse repurchase operations (reverse repos) Under a tripartite reverse repo, a custodian/clearing agency arranges for custody, clearing and settlement of the transactions between the Bank and a third party. The custodians/clearing agencies operate under standardised global master purchase agreements and provide for delivery against payment systems, substitution of securities, automatic marking to market, reporting and daily transaction administration. Reverse repos are carried at the amounts of cash advanced and are entered on the balance sheet under Loans and advances to credit institutions – b) other loans and advances. Interest on reverse repos is accrued pro rata temporis.

A.7.4. Interest subsidies Interest subsidies received in advance (see Note I) are deferred and recognised in the profit and loss account over the period from disbursement to repayment of the subsidised loan.

A.8.

Shares, other variable-yield securities and shares in affiliated undertakings

A.8.1. Shares and other variable-yield securities The Bank acquires shares and other variable-yield securities when it enters into venture capital operations, infrastructure funds or investment funds. Shares and other variable-yield securities are initially recorded at acquisition cost. Their carrying value is adjusted to the lower of cost or market value at subsequent measurement at the balance sheet date. Investments in venture capital enterprises, infrastructure funds and investment funds represent shares and other variable-yield securities acquired for the longer term in the normal course of the Bank’s activities. They are initially recorded at their original purchase cost. Based on the reports received from fund managers, the portfolios of investments are valued on a line-by-line basis at the lower of cost or attributable net asset value (‘NAV’), thus excluding any attributable unrealised gain that may be prevailing in the portfolio. The attributable NAV is determined through applying either the Bank’s percentage ownership in the underlying vehicle to the NAV reflected in the most recent report or, to the extent available, the value per share at the same date, submitted by the respective Fund Manager. The attributable NAV is adjusted for events having occurred between the date of the latest available NAV and the balance sheet date to the extent that such adjustment is considered to be material. Unrealised losses due solely to administrative expenses and management fees of venture capital, infrastructure funds and investment funds in existence for less than two years at the balance sheet date are not taken into consideration in determining the attributable NAV.

A.8.2. Shares in affiliated undertakings Shares in affiliated undertakings represent medium and long-term investments and are accounted for at cost. Value adjustments are accounted for, if these are other than temporary.

A.9.

Tangible assets

Tangible assets include land, Bank-occupied properties, other machines and equipment. Land is stated at acquisition cost and buildings are stated at acquisition cost less accumulated depreciation. The value of the Bank's headquarter buildings in Luxembourg-Kirchberg and its building in Luxembourg-Weimershof are depreciated on a straight-line basis as set out below. Permanent equipment, fixtures and fittings, furniture, office equipment and vehicles have been recorded in the balance sheet at their acquisition cost, less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the estimated life of each item purchased, as set out below: • • • •

Buildings in Kirchberg and Weimershof: 30 years Permanent equipment, fixtures and fittings: 10 years Furniture: 5 years Office equipment and vehicles: 3 years

A.10.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets comprise developed computer software. Software development costs are capitalised if they meet certain criteria relating to identifiability, to the probability that future economic benefits will flow to the enterprise and to the reliability of cost measurement.

32

Financial Report

2014

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

Internally developed software meeting these criteria is carried at cost less accumulated amortisation calculated on a straight-line basis over three years from completion.

A.11.

Pension plans and health insurance scheme

A.11.1. Pension plan for staff The Bank operates defined benefit pension plans to provide retirement benefits to substantially its entire staff. The Bank's main pension scheme is a defined benefit pension scheme funded by contributions from staff and from the Bank which covers all employees. All contributions of the Bank and its staff are invested in the assets of the Bank. Commitments for retirement benefits are valued at least every year using the projected unit credit method, in order to ensure that the provision entered in the accounts is adequate. The latest valuation was carried out as at 30 September 2014 and was updated as at 31 December 2014 with an extrapolation (roll forward method) for the last three months of 2014. The main assumptions used by the actuary are set out in Note L. Cumulative prior year actuarial deficits and surpluses in excess of 10% of the commitments for retirement benefits are recognised over the expected average remaining service lives of the plan’s participants on a straight line basis.

A.11.2. Health insurance scheme The Bank has set up its own health insurance scheme for the benefit of staff, financed by contributions from the Bank and its employees. The health insurance scheme is managed and accounted for under the same principles as the pension plan for staff described in Note A.11.1. The latest valuation was carried out as at 30 September 2014 and was updated as at 31 December 2014 with an extrapolation (roll forward method) for the last three months of 2014.

A.11.3. The Management Committee pension plan The Management Committee pension plan is a defined benefit pension scheme funded by contributions from the Bank only which covers all Management Committee members. All contributions of the Bank are invested in the assets of the Bank. The Management Committee pension plan is managed and accounted for under the same principles as the pension plan for staff described in Note A.11.1.

A.11.4. Optional Supplementary provident scheme The optional supplementary provident scheme is a defined contribution pension scheme, funded by voluntary staff’s contributions and employer’s contributions. The corresponding liability is recorded in Other liabilities.

A.12.

Amounts owed to credit institutions and customers

Amounts owed to credit institutions and customers are presented in the financial statements at their redemption amounts. Interest on amounts owed to credit institutions and customers is recorded in the profit and loss account on an accruals basis as Interest payable and similar charges. Accrued interest is included in Accruals and deferred income under liabilities.

A.13.

Debts evidenced by certificates

Debts evidenced by certificates are presented at their redemption amounts, except for zero coupon bonds which are presented at their amortised cost. Transaction costs and premiums/ discounts are amortised in the profit and loss account on a straight line basis over the life of the debt through Accruals and deferred income or Prepayments and accrued income. Interest expense on debt instruments is included in Interest payable and similar charges in the profit and loss account.

A.14.

Provision for guarantees issued and for commitment on investment funds

A.14.1 Provision for guarantees issued This provision is intended to cover risks inherent in the Bank’s activity of issuing guarantees in favour of financial intermediaries or issued in respect of loans granted by third parties. A provision for guarantees issued is established if there is objective evidence that the Bank will have to incur a loss in respect of a given guarantee granted.

A.14.2 Provision for commitment on investment funds This provision is intended to cover risks inherent in the Bank’s commitment on investment funds signed but not yet disbursed.

2014 Financial Report

33

A.15.

Reserves

A.15.1. Reserve fund As foreseen by Article 22.1 of the Statute, “a reserve fund of up to 10% of the subscribed capital shall be built up progressively” from the retained profit of the Bank.

A.15.3. Special activities reserve As foreseen by Article 16.5 of the Statute, “the special activities of the Bank […] will have a specific allocation of reserve”. The reserve is based on the capital allocation of each operation.

A.15.4. General loan reserve In 2009 a “general loan reserve” was introduced for the expected loss of the Bank’s loan and guarantee portfolio, modelled upon the Bank’s policy guidelines.

A.16.

Prepayments and accrued income

Expenditure incurred during the financial year but relating to a subsequent financial year, together with any income for which payment is not due until the expiry of the underlying instrument.

A.17.

Accruals and deferred income

Income received before the balance sheet date but relating to a subsequent financial year, together with any charges which, though relating to the financial year in question, will be paid only in the course of a subsequent financial year.

A.18.

Interest receivable and similar income

Revenues on loans are mainly composed of interest revenue, commitment fees, front-end fees and prepayment indemnities. Prepayment indemnities are recognised in the profit and loss when received, as the revenue is earned. From 1 January 2014, commitment fees are classified under “Interest receivable and similar income” while those fees were previously classified under “Commission receivable”. See note A.20. The Bank changed the accounting policy applied on front-end fees from 1 January 2014. Those front-end fees are now deferred and recognised under “Interest receivable and similar income” in the profit and loss account over the life of the underlying loan. Front-end fees were previously recognised in the P&L under “Commission receivable” when received. See note A.20. In addition to revenue on loans, the ‘Interest receivable and similar income’ includes also interest revenue from the securities portfolio and derivatives.

A.19.

Dividend income

Dividends are recognised in the profit and loss account when the entity’s right to receive payment is established.

A.20.

Reclassification of prior year figures

Certain prior year figures have been reclassified to conform with the current year’s presentation. The reclassifications principally relate to: •

The Protocol on the privileges and Immunities of the European Union appended to the treaty on European Union and the treaty on the functioning of the European Union, stipulates that the assets, revenues, and other property of the Institutions of the Union are exempt from all direct taxes.

The cash in hand and balances with central banks and post office banks equal to EUR ’000 114,283 at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 106,382). EIB is an eligible counterparty in the Eurosystem’s monetary policy operations, and therefore has been given access to the monetary policy operations of the European Central Bank. The Bank conducts the operations via the Central Bank of Luxembourg, where the Bank maintains a deposit to cover the minimum reserve requirement. The balance of this deposit amounts to EUR ‘000 113,873 as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 106,258).

B.2.

Debt securities portfolio

The Bank changed its debt securities portfolio structure during 2014. The debt securities portfolio is now composed of the long term hedge portfolio, the operational money market portfolios A1 and UF, the securities liquidity portfolios P1 and P2 and the loan substitutes portfolio. Previously, the Bank’s debt securities portfolio was composed of the investment portfolio, the operational money market portfolios A1 and A2, the operational bond portfolios B1 ‘Credit Spread’, B3 ‘Global Fixed Income’ and B4 ‘Inflation Linked Investment’ and the loan substitutes portfolio. The details of the debt security portfolios as at 31 December 2014 and 2013 are as follows:

Treasury bills and other bills eligible for refinancing with central banks Debt securities including fixed-income securities Total debt securities(*) (*)

31.12.2014 29,704,168 13,639,726 43,343,894

31.12.2013 25,594,364 6,948,745 32,543,109

Value at final maturity 2,145,800

Market value 2,358,524

of which EUR ‘000 12,197,453 unlisted in 2014 and EUR ‘000 5,975,714 in 2013.

Loan substitutes, which represent acquisitions of interest in pools of loans or receivables in connection with securitisation transactions, are considered as part of the aggregate loans (Note D). Some of these transactions have been structured by adding credit or project related remedies, thus offering additional recourse. No value adjustment is required and has thus been accounted for as at 31 December 2014 and 2013. EU sovereign exposure in bond holdings The Bank did not record value adjustments in 2013 and 2014 in respect of its held to maturity EU sovereign and sovereign guaranteed exposure as at the year end, in view of the Bank’s preferred creditor status and the protection given by the Bank’s Statute as well as a detailed review of any value adjustments requirements. The following tables show the exposure to debt issued or guaranteed by EU sovereigns in the Bank’s debt securities portfolios (including loan substitutes) as at 31 December 2014 and 2013:

Note C – Loans and advances to credit institutions – other loans and advances (in EUR ‘000) The Bank enters into collateralised reverse repurchase and repurchase agreement transactions that may result in credit exposure in the event that the counterparty to the transaction is unable to fulfil its contractual obligations. The Bank controls credit risk associated with these activities by monitoring counterparty credit exposure and collateral values on a daily basis and requiring additional collateral to be deposited with the Bank when deemed necessary. 31.12.2014 12,239,410 182,330 25,415,488 37,837,228 36,499,653

Term deposits Overnight deposits Tripartite reverse repos(*) Total other loans and advances to credit institutions of which cash and cash equivalents (*)

31.12.2013 5,754,912 413,273 39,318,249 45,486,434 43,946,434

These operations are carried out with a third-party custodian who undertakes, on the basis of a framework contract, to guarantee compliance with the contractual terms and conditions, notably with respect to: - delivery against payment; - verification of collateral; - the collateral margin required by the lender which must always be available and adequate, with the market value of the securities being verified daily by the said custodian; and - organisation of substitute collateral provided that this meets all the contractual requirements.

Provision at 1 January Release during the year Use during the year Allowance during the year Foreign exchange adjustment At 31 December

In 2013 the Bank has retroceded EUR ‘000 5,200 to the European Commission regarding a contribution previously made on an operation which has been fully repaid in 2013. Such retrocession was accounted for in the profit and loss account as Value adjustments in respect of loans and advances and provisions for contingent liabilities. Such retrocession did not occur in 2014.

2014 Financial Report

37

D.3.

Geographical breakdown of lending by country in which projects are located (in EUR ‘000)

D.3.1. Loans for projects within the European Union Countries and territories in which projects are located

The amount of EUR ‘000 157,500 (2013: EUR ‘000 157,500) corresponds to the capital paid in by the Bank as at 31 December 2014 with respect to its subscription of EUR ‘000 900,440 to the capital of the EBRD (European Bank for Reconstruction and Development).

As at 31 December 2014, the Bank holds 3.04% of the subscribed capital of the EBRD. Based on the audited 2013 EBRD financial statements prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, the share of underlying net equity of the Bank in EBRD amounted to EUR 450.7 million (2013: EUR 424.1 million). In EUR million EBRD (31.12.2012)*restated EBRD (31.12.2013)

E.2.

% held 3.04 3.03

Total own funds 13,950 14,876

Total net result 831 922

Total assets 51,142 48,958

Shares in affiliated undertakings

The balance of EUR ‘000 806,976 (2013: EUR ‘000 493,588) corresponds to the amount paid in by the Bank in respect of its subscription of EUR ‘000 2,650,000 (2013: EUR ‘000 1,863,000) to the capital of the European Investment Fund (‘EIF’), with its registered office in Luxembourg. The Bank holds 63.69% (2013: 62.10%) of the subscribed capital of the EIF amounting to EUR 4.16bn (2013: EUR 3.00bn). With respect to the 1,511 EIF shares subscribed by other EIF investors, the EIB is offering to buy these shares at any time under a Replacement Share Purchase Undertaking at a price per share of EUR ‘000 404. This price corresponds to the part of each share in the called capital of the EIF, increased by the share premium account, the statutory reserves, the disclosed unrealised gains in venture capital operations, the profit brought forward and the profit of the year. As a result of the General Meeting’s approval of the EIF’s capital increase in May 2014, the EIF’s authorised capital has been increased from EUR 3bn to EUR 4.5bn. As a result, the subscribed capital of the EIF amounts EUR 4.16bn as at 31 December 2014, as 339 shares have not yet been subscribed at year end. Following the capital increase of EIF, the Bank has purchased 939 of its shares and subsequently sold 152 shares to other investors. As a result Bank’s holding has increased from 1,863 shares as of 1 January 2014 to 2,650 shares as of 31 December 2014. The nominal value of EUR ‘000 609,774 (2013: EUR ‘000 441,336) of the put option granted to EIF minority shareholders, shown off-balance sheet, has been calculated on the basis of the 2014 audited EIF statutory accounts prepared according to the International Financial Reporting Standards. In EUR ‘000 EIF (31.12.2013) EIF (31.12.2014)

42

% held 62.10 63.69

Financial Report

2014

Total own funds 1,164,780 1,679,200

Total net result 47,459 84,665

Total assets 1,472,974 2,040,229

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

Note F – Intangible and tangible assets (in EUR ‘000)

Cost: At 1 January 2014 Additions Disposals At 31 December 2014 Accumulated depreciation: At 1 January 2014 Depreciation Disposals At 31 December 2014 Net book value: At 31 December 2014 At 31 December 2013

Land

Luxembourg buildings

Furniture and equipment

Total tangible Total intangible assets assets

24,393 0 -4,248 20,145

374,827 3,081 -27,304 350,604

75,165 15,327 -14,820 75,672

474,385 18,408 -46,372 446,421

15,912 6,938 -8,668 14,182

0 0 0 0

-148,679 -9,792 10,770 -147,701

-36,425 -13,636 13,551 -36,510

-185,104 -23,428 24,321 -184,211

-7,075 -6,672 8,668 -5,079

20,145 24,393

202,903 226,148

39,162 38,740

262,210 289,281

9,103 8,837

On 1 January 2014 the Bank sold its Hamm building for EUR’000 24,280. The gain on sale of EUR’000 1,925 is recorded under Other operating income (refer to Note Q) in the profit and loss account.

Note G – Other assets and other liabilities (in EUR ‘000) Other assets Guarantee calls from Member States & Guarantee fund Guarantees disbursed (Venture Capital operations) Staff housing loans and advances(*) Commission receivable on guarantees Fair value of derivatives Advances on salaries and allowances Other Total

31.12.2014 18,921 6,585 5,219 979 964 365 26,781 59,814

31.12.2013 22,151 9,780 7,098 1,442 602 416 31,997 73,486

(*)

The balance relates to staff housing loans disbursed previously to the employees by the Bank. Since 1999 these housing loans have been substituted by an arrangement with an external financial institution, whereby permanently employed staff members of the Bank may be granted staff housing loans in accordance with the Bank’s staff regulations. The same interest rates, terms and conditions are applicable to all said employees.

(*)Can be called by decision of the Board of Directors to such extent as may be required for the Bank to meet its obligations. (**) On 1 July 2013, the subscribed capital increased from EUR 242,392,989,000 to EUR 243,284,154,500 by virtue of the contributions of Croatia, a new Member State that joined on 1 July 2013. The contributions of the new Member State to the Paid-in capital and to the Reserves amount to EUR 79.5 million and EUR 128.4 million respectively. The total amount to be paid by the new Member State has been equally spread over 8 instalments due on 30 November 2013, 30 November 2014, 30 November 2015, 31 May 2016, 30 November 2016, 31 May 2017, 30 November 2017, and 31 May 2018. The instalments up to and including 30 November 2014 were settled in full.

2014 Financial Report

45

H.2.

Own funds and appropriation of profit

Statement of movements in own funds (in EUR ‘000) Share capital: - Subscribed capital - Uncalled capital - Called capital - Capital called but not paid - Paid in capital Reserves and profit for the year: Reserve fund: - Balance at beginning of the year - Appropriation of prior year's profit(1) - Contribution of Croatia - Balance at end of the year - Reserves called but not yet paid - Paid in balance at end of the year Additional reserves: - Balance at beginning of the year - Appropriation of prior year's profit(1) - Balance at end of the year Special activities reserve: - Balance at beginning of the year - Appropriation of prior year's profit(1) - Balance at end of the year General loan reserve: - Balance at beginning of the year - Appropriation of prior year's profit(1) - Balance at end of the year Profit for the financial year Total own funds

2014

2013

243,284,155 -221,585,020 21,699,135 -479,811 21,219,324

243,284,155 -221,585,020 21,699,135 -909,944 20,789,191

22,828,922 1,499,493 0 24,328,415 -96,286 24,232,129

21,596,628 1,103,914 128,380 22,828,922 -112,333 22,716,589

1,144,024 1,532,758 2,676,782

1,144,024 0 1,144,024

6,090,520 -59,798 6,030,722

5,140,386 950,134 6,090,520

3,663,165 -457,652 3,205,513 2,625,851 59,990,321

2,976,909 686,256 3,663,165 2,514,801 56,918,290

(1) On 25 April 2014, the Board of Governors decided to appropriate the profit for the year ended 31 December 2013, which amounted to EUR ‘000 2,514,801 to the Reserve Fund, the Additional reserves, the Special activities reserve or the General loan reserve. The fact that amounts are being released from the General loan reserve and the Special activities reserve is the consequence of the evolution of the risks of the underlying operations.

H.3.

Subscribed capital and reserves, called but not paid

As a result of the decision by the Member States, the subscribed and called capital of the Bank increased by EUR 10 billion on 31 December 2012. The Member States were due to pay in their respective shares of this EUR 10 billion capital increase over no more than three instalments due on 31 March 2013, 31 March 2014 and 31 March 2015. All contributions due on 31 March 2013 and 31 March 2014 were settled in full and 95.8% of the 10 billion capital increase has been settled as at 31 December 2014. The amount of EUR ‘000 576,097 shown in the balance sheet under the caption Subscribed capital and reserves, called but not paid contains EUR ‘000 420,197 receivable from the Member States in 2015 in respect of their share of the capital increase and EUR ‘000 155,900 related to net receivable from the new Member State, Croatia.

Statement of movements in own funds (in EUR ‘000) Subscribed capital receivable from Member States in respect of 2012 capital increase Subscribed capital called but not paid (Croatia) Reserves called but not paid (Croatia) Total

Redemption premiums on swaps receivable and payable represent end payments of the underlying swap agreements for those agreements which include such features.

(**)

Part of the amounts received from the European Commission has been made available as a long-term advance which is entered on the liabilities side under item Accruals and deferred income and comprises: • amounts in respect of interest subsidies for loans granted for projects outside the European Union, under Conventions signed with the ACP States and Protocols concluded with the Mediterranean Countries; and • interest subsidies, concerning certain lending operations put in place within the EU from the Bank's own resources, made available in conjunction with the EMS under Council Regulation (EEC) No 1736/79 of 3 August 1979 and in conjunction with the financial mechanism established by the EFTA Countries under the EFTA Agreement signed on 2 May 1992. (***) Refer to A.18.

Repayable on demand Short term deposits Cash deposited on swaps payable Total

J.2.

31.12.2014 6,915,224 51,110 358,290 7,324,624

31.12.2013 4,089,233 79,764 315,423 4,484,420

31.12.2014 112,844

31.12.2013 50,799

356,979 1,518,849 270,840 2,259,512

316,619 1,582,192 537,775 2,487,385

Amounts owed to customers

Overnight deposits European Union and Member States' accounts: - For Special Section operations and related unsettled amounts - Deposit accounts Short-term deposits Total

2014 Financial Report

47

Note K – Debts evidenced by certificates In its financing activity, one of the Bank’s objectives is to align its funding strategy with the funds required for the loans granted, notably in terms of currencies. The caption ‘Debts evidenced by certificates’ includes ’Debt securities in issue’ (securities offered to the general investing public) and ‘Others’ (private placements). The table below discloses the details per currency of debts outstanding at 31 December 2014 and 2013, together with the average rates and due dates. Debts evidenced by certificates (in EUR '000) Outstanding at Average rate Due dates 31.12.2014 2014(*)

The principal and interest of certain structured borrowings are index linked to stock exchange indexes (historical value: nil in 2014 and EUR 288 million in 2013). All borrowings are fully hedged through structured swap operations. The table below provides the movements in 2014 and 2013 for debts evidenced by certificates (including the short term commercial papers): 2014 426,358 102,581 -89,235 -5,029 18,778 453,453

(In EUR million) Balance at 1 January Issuance during the year Contractual redemptions Early redemptions Exchange adjustments Balance at 31 December

48

Financial Report

2014

2013 424,674 84,934 -68,197 -1,303 -13,750 426,358

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

Note L – Provisions – pension plans and health insurance scheme (in EUR ’000) The Bank's main pension scheme is a defined benefit pension scheme funded by contributions from staff and from the Bank covering all employees. All contributions of the Bank and its staff are invested in the assets of the Bank. The pension plans and health insurance scheme provisions are as follows (in EUR ‘000):

Staff pension plan: Provision at 1 January Payments made during the year Recognition of actuarial losses Annual contributions and interest Sub-total Management Committee Pension Plan Provision at 31 December Health insurance scheme: Provision at 1 January Payments made during the year Recognition of actuarial losses Annual contributions and interest Provision at 31 December Total provisions at 31 December

2014

2013

1,645,284 -66,470 11,287 188,740 1,778,841 35,854 1,814,695

1,516,395 -61,564 29,931 160,522 1,645,284 35,789 1,681,073

177,765 -15,593 1,852 29,243 193,267 2,007,962

163,257 -14,414 2,021 26,901 177,765 1,858,838

The above figures do not include the liability towards members of staff in respect of the Optional Supplementary Provident Scheme (a defined contribution pension scheme). The corresponding amount of EUR 356 million (2013: EUR 311 million) is classified under ‘Other liabilities’ (Note G). The provision in respect of future retirement and health insurance benefits was valued as at 30 September 2014 by an independent actuary using the projected unit credit method. The actuarial valuation was updated as at 31 December 2014 with an extrapolation (‘roll forward’ method) for the last 3 months of 2014, using the prevailing market rates of 31 December 2014 and the following assumptions (for the staff pension and medical plans): • a discount rate of 3.14% (2013: 5.10%) for determining the actuarial present value of benefits accrued in the pension and health insurance schemes, corresponding to 19.80 year duration (2013: 19.42 year duration); • in the light of past experience, the Bank estimates that the overall expected remuneration of post-employment reserves is set at a rate of 1.5% (2013: 1.5%) above the discount rate mentioned above; • a progressive retirement between the age of 55-65 (same as 2013); • a combined average impact of the increase in the cost of living and career progression of 4.5% (same as 2013); • probable resignation rate varies between 30% and 0% and decreases with age (same as 2013); • a rate of adjustment of pensions of 2% per annum (same as 2013); • use of the ISCLT longevity table 2013 ( 2013: ISCLT longevity table 2008); • a medical cost inflation rate of 4.0% per annum (2013: 4%); and • a medical cost profile per age updated in 2014. The provisions for these schemes are adjusted when needed (Note A.11.1) according to the actuarial valuation, as per the tables above. Cumulative prior year actuarial deficits or surpluses in excess of 10% of the commitments for retirement benefits are recognised over the expected average remaining service lives of the participants on a straight line basis. In 2013, the actuarial valuation on the pension plans and the healthcare scheme displayed an unrecognised loss of EUR ‘000 419,998. EUR ’000 192,114 was reported in excess of the 10% corridor, and recognised over the expected average remaining service lives of the participants on a straight line basis from 1 January 2014. Thereby, the net loss recognised in 2014 is EUR ’000 13,171. In 2014, the actuarial valuation on the pension plans and the healthcare scheme displayed an unrecognised loss of EUR ‘000 1,416,153. EUR ‘000 1,073,741 was reported in excess of the 10% corridor, and the net loss which will be recognised in 2015 will be EUR ‘000 74,134.

Note M – Profit for the financial year The appropriation of the balance of the profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 2014, amounting to EUR ‘000 2 625 851 will be submitted for approval by the Board of Governors by 28 April 2015.

2014 Financial Report

49

Note N – ‘Interest receivable and similar income’ and ‘Interest payable and similar charges’

N.1.

Net interest income (in EUR ‘000)

Interest receivable and similar income: Cash in hand, balance with central banks and post office banks Treasury bills and other bills eligible for refinancing with central banks and debt securities including fixed income securities Loans and advances to credit institutions and customers Derivatives Total Interest payable and similar charges: Amounts owed to credit institutions and customers Debts evidenced by certificates Derivatives Other Total Net interest income

Unrealised result on securities liquidity portfolios / operational treasury portfolios Net amortisation on foreign exchange derivatives Value (re-)adjustment on venture capital operations Net realised result on securities liquidity portfolios / operational treasury portfolios Net result on repurchase of debts evidenced by certificates Result on long-term futures Value (re-)adjustment on shares and other variable yield securities other than venture capital Net unrealised result on derivatives Net result on translation of balance sheet positions Net result on unwind of swaps Realised result on sale of shares and other variable yield securities Total net result on financial operations

Note Q – Other operating income (in EUR ‘000)

Reversal of previous year’s unutilised accruals on general administrative expenses Rental income Sale of EIF Shares (Note E.2) Other Total

On 1 January 2014 the Bank sold its Hamm building for EUR’000 24,280 (refer to Note F). The gain on sale of EUR’000 1,925 is recorded under ‘Other’ in the above table.

Salaries and allowances(*) Welfare contributions and other staff costs Staff costs Other general administrative expenses Total general administrative expenses

2013 -237,910 -178,038 -415,948 -127,845 -543,793

(*) of which the amount for members of the Management Committee is EUR ‘000 3,168 at 31 December 2014 and EUR ‘000 3,200 at 31 December 2013.

The number of persons employed by the Bank was 2,277 at 31 December 2014 (2,125 at 31 December 2013).

Note S – Off-balance sheet special deposits for service of borrowings This item represents the amount of coupons and bonds due, paid by the Bank to the paying agents, but not yet presented for payment by the holders of bonds issued by the Bank.

2014 Financial Report

51

Note T – Fair value of financial instruments At balance sheet date, the Bank records balance sheet financial instruments on the basis of their historical cost in foreign currency (apart from the SLP portfolio) representing the amount received in the case of a liability or the amount paid to acquire an asset. The fair value of the financial instruments (mainly loans, treasury, securities and borrowings) entered under assets or liabilities compared with their accounting value is shown in the table below: At 31 December 2014 (in EUR million) Financial assets: Cash in hand, balances with central banks and post office banks Loans and advances to credit institutions and customers, excluding loan substitutes Treasury bills and debt securities portfolios including loan substitutes (Note B.2) Shares and other variable yield securities (Note E) Total financial assets Financial liabilities: Amounts owed to credit institutions and customers (Note J) Debts evidenced by certificates (Note K) Total financial liabilities

Note U – Risk management This note presents information about the Bank’s exposure to and its management and control of risks, in particular the primary risks associated with its use of financial instruments. These are: • Credit risk - the risk of loss resulting from client or counterparty default and arising on credit exposure in all forms, including settlement risk; • Interest rate risk - the risk that an investment's value will change due to a change in the absolute level of interest rates, in the shape of the yield curve or in any other interest rate relationship; • Liquidity and funding risk - the risk that the Bank is unable to fund assets or meet obligations at a reasonable price or, in extreme situations, at any price; • Foreign exchange rate risk - the risk of an investment's value changing due to changes in currency exchange rates and • Operational risk - the potential loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events.

Risk Management organisation The Bank aligns its risk management systems to changing economic conditions and evolving regulatory standards. It adapts them on an ongoing basis as best market practice develops. Systems are in place to control and report on the main risks inherent in its operations, i.e. credit, market and operational risks. The Bank analyses and manages risks so as to obtain protection for its assets, its financial result, and consequently its capital. While the Bank is not subject to full regulation, it aims to comply with the relevant EU banking directives and the recommendations of the banking supervisors of the EU Member States, EU legislation and the competent supranational bodies, such as the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS). The following sections disclose the credit, market and liquidity risks to which the Bank is exposed on its activities performed on own resources. The Risk Management Directorate (RM) independently identifies, assesses, monitors and reports credit, market and operational risks to which the Bank is exposed in a comprehensive and consistent way. Within a framework, whereby the segregation of duties is preserved, RM is independent of the Front Offices and provides second opinion on all proposals made which have risk implications. The Director General of RM reports, for credit, market and operational risks to the Management Committee and meets regularly with the Audit Committee to discuss topics relating to credit, market and operational risks. He is also responsible for overseeing risk reporting to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors. Two risk-oriented committees support the implementation of the Bank’s risk policies:

52

Financial Report

2014

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

The Credit Risk Assessment Group (CRAG) is a high-level forum for discussing relevant credit risk issues arising in the course of the Bank’s activities and for advising the Management Committee on these. Its members are the Directors General of the Operations, Projects, RM, Transaction Monitoring & Restructuring (TMR), Finance and Legal Affairs Directorates. The CRAG is intended to complement, and does not replace, the existing case-by-case review of lending operations, which remains central to the loan approval process. An Asset/Liability Committee (ALCO), made up of the Directors General of the Operations, Finance, Financial Control and RM Directorates and the Chief Economist, provides a high-level forum for debating the Bank’s Asset/Liability Management (ALM) matters and for making proposals in this field to the Management Committee. It promotes and facilitates the dialogue among the Directorates represented in it, while providing a wider perspective on, and enhancing their understanding of, the main financial risks. The Bank continued to develop its capacity to manage loans post signature in line with the Bank’s overall higher lending volume and the economic environment. For significant parts of the portfolio this is the responsibility of TMR, a Directorate independent from RM. TMR is focusing on monitoring higher risk counterparts and certain forms of security and it also manages transactions requiring particular attention. All of its proposals which have credit risk implications are subject to an independent second opinion by RM. Risk measurement and reporting system Risks are assessed both under normal circumstances and possible stressed conditions, with the purpose to quantify their impact on the Bank’s solvency, liquidity and operations. Risk measurements combine metrics such as expected and unexpected loss estimations based on historical default probabilities together with scenario-based and sensitivity analyses. Worst case scenarios aim at capturing extreme, low probability events which could impact the Bank. Information on the risk measures described above are presented and explained to the Management Committee and to the Board of Directors on a monthly basis. The reports include aggregate credit exposures, credit concentration analyses and other key portfolio risk indicators, as well as Value at Risk (VaR), sensitivity analysis, liquidity indicators and cumulative funding gaps. The Bank maintains two reserves within its own funds for the expected and unexpected losses – the General Loan Reserve (GLR) and the Special Activities Reserve (SAR), respectively. The General Loan Reserve is a dedicated reserve for the expected loss of the Bank's loan portfolio. It is calculated monthly according to the evolution of the underlying assets and reported to the Bank's senior management. The Special Activities Reserve is a dedicated reserve for the capital allocation covering the unexpected loss of those activities which have a risk profile higher than what is generally accepted by the Bank, including venture capital activities undertaken by the EIF on the Bank’s behalf. It is calculated monthly according to the evolution of the underlying assets. The Bank’s financial risk tolerance As a public institution, the Bank does not aim to make profits from speculative exposures to financial risks, setting its financial risk tolerance to a minimum level as defined by approved limits, and applying a conservative financial framework. As a consequence, the Bank does not consider its treasury or funding activities as profit-maximising centres, even though performance objectives are attached to these activities. Investment activities are conducted within the primary objective of protection of the capital invested. With respect to exposures arising from the Bank’s lending and borrowing operations, the main principle of the Bank’s financial risk policy is therefore to ensure that all material financial risks are hedged. All new types of transactions introducing operational or financial risks must be authorised by the Management Committee, after the approval of the New Products Committee, and are managed within approved limits. Sustainability of revenue and self-financing capacity The Bank’s ALM policy forms an integral part of the Bank’s overall financial risk management. It reflects the expectations of the main stakeholders of the Bank in terms of stability of earnings, preservation of the economic value of own funds, and the self-financing of the Bank’s growth in the long term. To achieve these aims, the ALM policy employs medium to long term indexation for the investment of own funds to promote stability of revenues and enhance overall returns. This indexation policy implies an exposure to medium to long term yields and is not influenced by any short term views on trends in interest rates. This is accomplished by targeting a duration for the Bank’s own funds of between 4.5 and 5.5 years.

U.1.

Credit risk

Credit risk concerns mainly the Bank's lending activities and, to a lesser extent, its derivative transactions and treasury instruments, such as debt securities, certificates of deposit and interbank term deposits. No credit risk is attached to the Bank’s venture capital operations, which are performed entirely through equity participations and are therefore only exposed to market risk. As regards lending, treasury and derivatives operations, credit risk is managed by an independent Risk Management Directorate under the direct responsibility of the Management Committee of the Bank. The Bank has thus established an operationally independent structure for determining and monitoring credit risk. The credit risk associated with the use of derivatives is analysed in Note V. The Bank’s policies on credit risk are approved by the governing bodies. They set out minimum credit quality levels for both borrowers and guarantors in lending operations and identify the types of security that are deemed acceptable. They also detail the minimum requirements which loan contracts must meet in terms of key legal clauses and other contractual stipulations to ensure that the Bank's position ranks at least equal to that of other senior lenders, with prompt access to security when required. In addition, via a counterparty and sector limit system, the credit

2014 Financial Report

53

policies ensure an acceptable degree of diversification in the Bank’s loan portfolio. The Bank’s limit system draws its inspiration from the traditional prudential regulations on concentration and large exposure management contained in the EU banking directives, though the Bank generally adopts a more restrictive approach to risk-taking than commercial banks. The policies also set out the minimum credit quality of counterparties of derivatives and treasury transactions as well as the contractual framework for each type of transaction. Following the capital increase in 2012, the Bank expanded its Credit Risk Policy Guidelines by a dedicated chapter on the remedy of noncompliance events with bank intermediaries, and a dedicated chapter for incremental new lending in connection with the additional capital. Credit policies undergo periodic adaptations to incorporate evolving operational circumstances and respond to new mandates that the Bank may receive. Management of credit risk is based, firstly, on the level of credit risk vis-à-vis counterparties and, secondly, on an analysis of the solvency of counterparties.

U.1.1.

Loans

In order to limit the credit risk on its loan portfolio, the Bank lends only to counterparties with demonstrated long term creditworthiness and with sound guarantees. In order to measure and manage credit risk on loans, the Bank has graded its lending operations according to generally accepted criteria, based on the quality of the borrower, the available security and, where appropriate, the guarantor.

The structure of borrowers and guarantors relating to the loan portfolio as at 31 December 2014 is analysed below, including undisbursed portions. Loans outside the European Union (apart from those under the Facilities(*)) are, in the last resort, secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States (loans in the ACP Countries and the OCT). The agreements decided by the Council of the European Union on 14 April 1997 (Decision 97/256/EC) introduced the concept of risk sharing whereby certain Bank loans are secured by third-party guarantees with respect to the commercial risk, the budgetary guarantee applying in the case of political risks solely arising from currency non-transferability, expropriation, war and civil disturbance. (*) Loans granted under Article 16 (previously Article 18) of the Bank’s Statute and loans granted under the Pre Accession Facility, the Mediterranean Partnership Facility, the Energy Sustainability Facility and the EFTA Facility. These loans, granted under the Facilities, are not secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States. Therefore, lending under the Facilities is from the Bank’s own resources and at the Bank’s own risk. The table below shows (in EUR million) the loans for projects inside and outside the European Union granted under the Facilities and under the risk-sharing operations:

Guarantor Borrower States Public institutions Banks Corporates Total 2014(1)(2)(3)(4)(5) Total 2013(1)(2)(3)(4)(5) (1)

(2) (3) (4) (5)

States

Public institutions

Banks

Corporates

Not guaranteed (1)

0 26,565 33,529 21,961 82,055 73,023

0 16,186 33,115 9,503 58,804 61,457

0 617 35,330 26,838 62,785 64,883

0 2,655 28,088 42,740 73,483 76,600

46,299 68,497 23,326 79,212 217,334 196,870

Total 2014

Total 2013

46,299 114,520 153,388 180,254 494,461

43,971 106,188 149,445 173,229 472,833

These amounts include loans for which no formal guarantee independent from the borrower and the loan itself was required, the borrower’s level of solvency itself representing adequate security. In the event of certain occurrences, appropriate contractual clauses ensure the Bank’s right to access independent security. The loans in risk-sharing operations amount to EUR 7,209 million as of 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 6,817 million). This amount includes loans granted under Facilities. This amount does not include loan substitutes (2014: EUR 16,510 million; 2013: EUR 13,179 million). These amounts exclude loans to current European Union Member States but granted before their accession to the European Union and guaranteed by the European Union budget or the Member States.

The Bank did not record value adjustments in 2013 and 2014 in respect of its EU sovereign and sovereign guaranteed exposure as at the year end as the Bank’s preferred creditor status and the protection given by the Bank’s Statute are deemed to guarantee a full recovery of the Bank’s assets on maturity. The table below discloses information regarding the sovereign credit risk on loans granted inside and outside the European Union granted under the Facilities and under the risk-sharing operations:

The table below shows (in EUR million) the loans for projects outside the European Union (apart from Article 16 Facility and those falling under the Pre Accession Facility, the Mediterranean Partnership Facility, the Energy Sustainability Facility and the EFTA Facility):

Secured by: Member States European Union budget(1) Total(2) (1) (2)

31.12.2014 2,641 42,714 45,355

31.12.2013 2,486 39,800 42,286

of which EUR 7,209 million in risk-sharing operations as explained above (2013: EUR 6,817 million). including loans to current European Union Member States but granted before their accession to the European Union and guaranteed by the European Union budget or the Member States.

Collateral on loans (in EUR million) Among other credit mitigant instruments, the Bank uses pledges of financial securities. These pledges are formalised through a Pledge Agreement, enforceable in the relevant jurisdiction. The portfolio of collateral received in pledge contracts amounts to EUR 33,755 million (2013: EUR 33,902 million), with the following composition:

Loan Financial Collateral (in EUR million)(1)

As at 31 December 2014 Bonds Moody's or equivalent rating

Government

Supranational

Agency

Secured Bonds (covered bonds)

Bank and Corporate Bonds

ABS

Equities & Funds

Cash

Total

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 Below A1 Non-Rated Total

366 1,402 355 15,023 0 17,146

105 30 0 0 0 135

0 190 0 944 0 1,134

7 29 764 1,417 0 2,217

1,556 1,483 428 7,124 0 10,591

0 0 0 113 0 113

0 0 0 0 358 358

0 0 0 0 2,061 2,061

2,034 3,134 1,547 24,621 2,419 33,755

Loan Financial Collateral (in EUR million)(1)

As at 31 December 2013 Bonds Moody's or equivalent rating

Government

Supranational

Agency

Secured Bonds (covered bonds)

Bank and Corporate Bonds

ABS

Equities & Funds

Cash

Total

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 Below A1 Non-Rated Total

560 1,429 415 10,836 0 13,240

113 136 0 0 0 249

7 32 0 837 0 876

547 635 0 2,892 0 4,074

1,262 1,424 524 8,831 0 12,041

0 91 0 84 0 175

0 0 0 0 654 654

0 0 0 0 2,593 2,593

2,489 3,747 939 23,480 3,247 33,902

(1)

Bonds, equities and funds are valued at their market value (including haircuts)

A breakdown of disbursed loans outstanding including loan substitutes (in EUR million) at 31 December according to the sectors in which borrowers are engaged is set out below:

A global loan is a line of credit to an intermediary financing institution or a bank which then on-lends the proceeds, at its own risk, to finance small and medium-sized projects being undertaken by private or public sector promoters.

Arrears on loans Amounts in arrears are identified, monitored and reported according to the procedures defined into the bank-wide “Financial Monitoring Guidelines and Procedures”. These procedures are adopted for all loans managed by the EIB. Loans not secured by global guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States: As of 31 December 2014, the arrears above 90 days on loans on own resources not secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States amount to EUR 87.3 million (2013: EUR 80.6 million). The outstanding principal amount related to these arrears is EUR 327.1 million as of 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 77.4 million). These arrears on loans are covered by a value adjustment of EUR 267.8 million (2013: EUR 78.2 million).

2014 Financial Report

57

Loans secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States: Loans for projects located outside the European Union and carried out on the basis of mandates are guaranteed by the European Union, the Member States or on a risk-sharing basis. For such loans, if an instalment remains unpaid, the primary guarantee is first called, where available, otherwise the guarantee of the Member States or of the European Union is officially invoked. According to the guarantee agreements, each unpaid instalment is called individually. As of 31 December 2014, these arrears above 90 days amount to EUR 10 million (2013: EUR 9.7 million). Loans called under guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States: During 2014 EUR 58.7 million have been called under the guarantee of the European Union budget and nothing under the Member States guarantee. Corresponding amounts in 2013 were EUR 63.3 million and EUR 0.7 million respectively. The table below gives an overview of the arrears above 90 days on loans:

Loans not secured by EU or Member State guarantees Amount in arrears (EUR'000) Related principal outstanding (EUR'000) Loans secured by EU or Member State guarantees (callable) Amount in arrears (EUR'000) Related principal outstanding (EUR'000) Loans called under the EU or Member State guarantees Amount called (during the year) (EUR'000) Cumulative amount called and not refunded as at year end (EUR'000) 1

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

87,253 327,081

80,6031 77,413

9,999 175,156

9,662 175,156

58,707 270,892

63,968 205,395

The amount in arrears is higher than the related principal outstanding since it includes accrued interest, penalties and fees.

Loan renegotiation and forbearance The EIB considers loans to be forborne if in response to adverse changes in the financial position of a borrower the EIB renegotiates the original terms of the contractual arrangements with this borrower affecting directly the future cash flows of the financial instrument, which may result in a loss to the Bank. However, the financial impact of restructuring activities is in general limited to value adjustment losses, if any, as financial neutrality is generally applied by the Bank and reflected in the renegotiated pricing conditions of the operations restructured. In the normal course of business, the Loan Grading (LG) of the loans in question would have deteriorated and the loan would have been included in the Watch List before renegotiation. Once renegotiated, the EIB will continue to closely monitor these loans. If the renegotiated payment terms will not recover the original carrying amount of the asset, the Bank will consider to account for value adjustments in the profit and loss account. The corresponding value adjustment will be calculated based on the forecasted cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate. The need for a value adjustment for all loans whose LG deteriorated to E- is assessed regularly; all loans with a LG of F require a value adjustment. Once the Loan Grading of a loan has improved sufficiently, it will be removed from the Watch List in line with the procedures of the Bank. Forbearance measures and practices undertaken by the Bank’s restructuring team during the reporting period includes extension of maturity, deferral of capital only, deferral of capital and interest and capitalisation of arrears. Such forbearance measures do not lead to the derecognition of the underlying operation. Exposures subject to changes in contractual terms which do not affect future cash flows, such as collateral or other security arrangements or the waiver of contractual rights under covenants, are not considered as forborne and hence those events are not considered as sufficient to indicate the requirement of a value adjustment on their own.

58

Financial Report

2014

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

Operations subject to forbearance measures are considered by the Bank as forborne until their final maturity and are reported as such in the table below.

(in EUR million)

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

17

12

1,266

1,091

of which being subject to value adjustments

714

356

Value adjustments recognised

323

159

12

24

0

30

Operations subject to forbearance practices Carrying values

Interest income in respect of forborne operations Exposures written off (following the termination/sale of the operation)

The credit risk associated with treasury (securities, commercial paper, term accounts, etc.) is managed through selecting sound counterparties and issuers. Limits governing the structure of the securities portfolio and outstanding treasury instruments have been laid down by the Management. These limits are reviewed regularly by the Risk Management Directorate. The table below provides a percentage breakdown of the credit risk associated with the securities in the Treasury portfolios and the money markets products (deposits and tripartite reverse repos) in terms of the credit rating of counterparties and issuers:

Collateral on Treasury transactions Collateral received The Treasury transactions include EUR 25,415 million (2013: EUR 39,318 million) of tripartite reverse repurchase agreements. These transactions are governed by Tripartite Agreements, for which the exposure is fully collateralised, with daily margin calls. The market value of the collateral portfolio at 31 December 2014 is EUR 26,289 million (2013: EUR 40,965 million), with the following classification:

Tripartite Agreements Collateral (in EUR million) Bonds

At 31 December 2014 Moody's or equivalent rating

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 Below A1 Total

Government

792 662 527 9,576 11,557

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 Below A1 Total

Agency

Secured Bonds (covered bonds)

Bank and Corporate Bonds

ABS

355 420 0 0 775

0 0 0 0 0

6,417 263 484 10 7,174

851 1,215 1,301 3,215 6,582

201 0 0 0 201

Total

8,616 2,560 2,312 12,801 26,289

Tripartite Agreements Collateral (in EUR million) Bonds

At 31 December 2013 Moody's or equivalent rating

Supra-national

Government

3,122 3,357 647 13,232 20,358

Supra-national

Agency

Secured Bonds (covered bonds)

Bank and Corporate Bonds

ABS

665 1,103 0 0 1,768

0 0 0 0 0

7,524 210 176 41 7,951

1,958 2,794 999 4,987 10,738

150 0 0 0 150

Total

13,419 7,464 1,822 18,260 40,965

Securities deposited In the context of the Eurosystem’s monetary policy operations, the EIB deposited securities with the Central Bank of Luxembourg with a market value of EUR 3.3 billion as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 3.3 billion).

U.1.3.

Guarantees granted by the Bank in respect of loans granted by third parties and on venture capital operations

The structure of beneficiaries of guarantees granted by the Bank as at 31 December 2014 and 31 December 2013 is analysed below (in EUR million):

Granted to: Banks Corporates Public Total

60

2014 841 1,385 146 2,372

Financial Report

2014

2013 948 801 60 1,809

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

U.2.

Interest rate risk

Interest rate risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Bank’s positions due to adverse movements in market yields or the term structure of interest rates. Exposure to interest rate risk occurs when there are differences in repricing and maturity characteristics of the different asset, liability and hedge instruments. In measuring and managing interest rate risk, the Bank refers to the relevant key principles of the Basel Committee for Banking Supervision (BCBS). The main sources of interest rate risk are: repricing risk, yield curve risk, basis risk and spread risk. An interest rate risk that is particularly relevant for the Bank is spread risk. Spread risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Bank’s positions due to movements in the funding or lending spread of the Bank. The Bank manages its global structural interest rate position on the basis of a notional reference portfolio. The majority of the financial risk indicators and controls in use by the Bank apply to this portfolio. Financial indicators and controls for the rest of the activities outside this portfolio only relate to the risks, which are not transferred to it via the transfer pricing system which therefore remain with their respective activities, such as the equity risk in the venture capital activity or the interest rate or credit risks taken in those treasury portfolios predominantly managed for yield-enhancement purposes. U.2.1.

Value-at-Risk for the own funds of the Bank

The Bank’s ALM strategy aims at maintaining a balanced and sustainable revenue profile as well as limiting the volatility of the economic value of the Bank. A clear preference has been given to the revenue profile in light of the objective of self-financing of the Bank’s growth. This overall objective is achieved by investing the Bank’s own funds according to a medium to long term investment profile, implying an own funds duration target of 4.5 – 5.5 years. Apart from the duration target for own funds, the Bank’s balance sheet should be match-funded with respect to currency and interest rate characteristics. However, small deviations are authorised for operational reasons. The net residual positions that arise from outstanding operations are managed within pre-set limits to constrain market risk to minimum levels. The Risk Management department quantifies the Value at Risk (‘VaR’) of own funds for both interest rates and foreign exchange risk factors. It is measured on the Bank’s positions using a 99% confidence level and a one-day time horizon. As at 31 December 2014, the VaR of the EIB own funds amounted to EUR 184 million (2013: EUR 202 million). The evolution of the VaR of own funds since 2013 reflects the effective decrease of the volatility of the risk factors and not a change in the risk profile of the Bank’s positions. The computation is based on the so-called Riskmetrics methodology, which assumes a linear dependency between the changes in portfolio or position values and the underlying risk factors. Given the nature of the positions held, the Bank deems this assumption appropriate to measure its exposure to interest rate risk. Volatility and correlation data are computed internally on the basis of historical market data. More generally, the VaR does not purport to measure the worst loss that could be experienced. For this reason, it is complemented by regular stress testing. As of 31 December 2014, the impact of a 200 basis point upward parallel shift of the interest rate curves would reduce the economic value of own funds by EUR 7.65 billion (2013: EUR 6.45 billion). Among the financial instruments in the Bank’s portfolio, some deals (borrowings and associated swaps) present callability options and may be redeemed early, introducing uncertainty as to their final maturity. At cash flow level all such borrowings are fully hedged by swaps so that they can be considered synthetic floating rate notes indexed to Libor/Euribor. Below is a summary of the features of the Bank’s callable portfolio as of 31 December 2014 and 31 December 2013, where the total nominal amount, the average natural maturity and the average expected maturity (both weighted by the nominal amount of the concerned transactions) are shown per funding currency and per main risk factor involved: By funding currency (after swap): 31.12.2014 (in EUR million) EUR Pay Notional Average maturity date Average expected maturity

The sensitivity of earnings quantifies the amount of net interest income that would change during the forthcoming 12 months if all interest rate curves rose by one percentage point or decreased by one percentage point. Such exposure stems from the mismatch between interest rate repricing periods, volumes and rates of assets and liabilities that the Bank accepts within the approved limits. With the positions in place as of 31 December 2014, the earnings would increase by EUR 72.15 million (2013: EUR 151.33 million) if interest rates increased 100 basis points and decrease by EUR 82.10 million (2013: EUR 128.14 million) if interest rates decreased by 100 basis points. The Bank computes the sensitivity measure with dedicated software that simulates earnings on a deal by deal basis. The sensitivity of earnings is measured on an accruals basis and is calculated under the ‘’ongoing’’ assumption that, over the time horizon analysed, the Bank realises the new loan business forecast in the Corporate Operational Plan, maintains exposures within approved limits and executes monetary trades to refinance funding shortages or invest cash excesses. Earnings are simulated on monthly time steps, assuming that all the fixed rate items carry their contractual rate and that all floating rate items are subject to interest rate repricing according to the interest rate scenario applied in the simulation. The monetary trades to refinance funding shortages or invest cash excesses carry rates equal to the money market rates prevailing according to the interest rate scenario applied in the simulation. In line with the current practice of the Bank, the model uses the hypothesis that simulated earnings are not distributed to the shareholders, but are used to refinance the Bank’s business. The administrative costs are projected according to the forecasts of the Corporate Operational Plan.

U.3.

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk refers to the ability of the Bank to fund increases in assets and meet obligations as they come due, without incurring unacceptable losses. It can be further split into funding liquidity risk and market liquidity risk. Funding liquidity risk is connected to the risk for the Bank to be unable to refinance the asset side of its balance sheet and to meet payment obligations punctually and in full out of readily available liquid resources. Funding liquidity risk may have an impact on the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from Bank’s positions, due to potentially increasing immediate risks to meet payment obligations and the consequent need to borrow at unattractive conditions. Market liquidity risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Bank’s positions due to potential inability to execute a transaction to offset, eliminate or reduce outstanding positions at reasonable market prices. Such an inability may force early liquidation of assets at unattractive prices when it would be better to avoid such liquidation. This risk is tied to the size of the position compared to the liquidity of the instrument being transacted, as well as to potential deterioration of market availability and efficiency. The liquidity risk of the Bank is managed in order to ensure the regular functioning of the Bank’s core activities at reasonable cost. The main objective of liquidity policy is to ensure that the Bank can always meet its payment obligations punctually and in full. In contrast to commercial banks, the EIB does not have retail deposits but relies on its access to capital markets to raise the funds it on-lends to its clients. The Bank manages the calendar of its new issues so as to maintain a prudential liquidity buffer. Liquidity planning takes into account the Bank’s needs to service its debt, disbursements on loans and cash flows from the loan portfolio. It also takes into account the sizeable amount of signed but un-disbursed loans, whose disbursements typically take place at the borrowers’ request. The Bank further assures management of liquidity risk by maintaining a sufficient level of short term liquid assets, and by spreading the maturity dates of its placements according to the forecasts of liquidity needs. Liquidity risk policy also incorporates a floor on treasury levels. The Bank's total liquidity ratio (defined as a target percentage of annual projected net cash flows) must at all times exceed 25% of the average forecast net annual cash flows for the following twelve months. The Bank has in place a Contingency Liquidity Plan (CLP), which specifies appropriate decision making procedures and corresponding responsibilities. The CLP has been benchmarked against the “Principles for Sound Liquidity Risk Management and Supervision” by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (September 2008). The CLP is subject to ad-hoc updates and is presented to the Management Committee annually for approval. Regular stress-testing analyses tailored to the specific business model of the EIB are executed as a part of the liquidity risk monitoring. On 8 July 2009, the Bank became an eligible counterparty in the Eurosystem’s monetary policy operations, and therefore has been given access to the monetary policy operations of the European Central Bank. The Bank conducts the operations via the Central Bank of Luxembourg, where the Bank maintains deposits to cover the minimum reserve requirement.

62

Financial Report

2014

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

The table hereafter analyses the assets and liabilities of the Bank by maturity on the basis of the period remaining between the balance sheet date and the contractual maturity date. Assets and liabilities for which there is no contractual maturity date are classified under "Maturity undefined". Liquidity risk (in EUR million) Maturity at 31 December 2014

Some of the borrowings and associated swaps include early termination triggers or call options granted to the investors or the hedging swap counterparties and the Bank as well has the right to call the related bonds before maturity. If the Bank were to exercise all the call options on its bonds at their next contractual exercise date, cumulated early redemptions for the period 2015 - 2017 would amount to EUR 2.678 billion.

U.4.

Foreign exchange rate risk

The FX risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Bank’s positions due to adverse movements of FX rates. The Bank is exposed to FX risk whenever there is a currency mismatch between its assets and liabilities. FX risk also comprises the effect of unexpected and unfavourable changes in the value of future cash flows caused by currency movements, such as the impact of FX rate changes on the Bank’s future lending intermediation revenue. The sources of foreign exchange rate risk are to be found in the margins on operations and in general expenses incurred in non-euro currencies. The Bank’s objective is to eliminate exchange risk by reducing net positions per currency through operations on the international foreign exchange markets. A foreign exchange hedging programme exists in order to protect the known loan margins in USD and in GBP for the next 3 years on a rolling basis. Foreign exchange position (in EUR million) Currency at 31 December 2014 Assets: Cash in hand, balances with central banks and post office banks Treasury bills and other bills eligible for refinancing with central banks Other loans and advances: - Current accounts - Credit institutions Loans: - Credit institutions - Customers Debt securities including fixed-income securities Shares and other variable-yield securities Shares in affiliated undertakings Other assets Total assets Liabilities: Amounts owed to credit institutions Amounts owed to customers Debts evidenced by certificates: - Debt securities in issue - Others Capital, reserves and profit Other liabilities Total liabilities Off balance sheet currency swaps Net position

The management of operational risk is performed at all levels within the organisation and is a responsibility of all the various departments of the Bank. The Risk Management Directorate is responsible for defining the operational risk framework and related policies while the responsibility for implementing the framework as well as day-to-day operational risk management lies with the Bank’s operational departments. The Bank employs an assessment methodology that takes into account all available information including loss history, results of risk selfassessment and the business and control environment through a set of Key Risk Indicators (KRIs) organised in an Operational Risk Scorecard. A statistical model and a Value at Risk calculation engine complete the operational risk environment. Information concerning operational risk events, losses and KRIs, and updates on the activities of the New Products Committee, are regularly forwarded to the Bank’s senior management and to the Management Committee.

2014 Financial Report

65

Note V – Derivatives The Bank uses derivative instruments mainly as part of its asset and liability management activities to manage exposures to interest rate and foreign currency risks, including exposures arising from forecast transactions. Derivatives are contractual financial instruments, the value of which fluctuates according to trends in the underlying assets, interest rates, exchange rates or indices. The majority of the Bank’s swaps are concluded with a view to hedging specific bond issues, as part of its resource-raising operations (funding activity). The Bank also enters into swaps as part of its hedging operations on loans, treasury, or for the global Assets and Liabilities Management (ALM) position (ALM hedging activity). The Bank also enters into short-term currency swap contracts in order to adjust currency positions in its operational treasury in relation to its benchmark currency, the euro, and to cater for demand for currencies in conjunction with loan disbursements. Future contracts (futures) are used in the context of the treasury activities, to hedge the exposure deriving from some investments in government bonds. Futures are standardised derivatives, negotiated on regulated markets, and they do not fall within the general policy for counterparty risk measurement and control (see note V.2.).

V.1.

As part of funding and ALM hedging activity

The Bank uses long term derivatives mainly as part of its funding strategy in order to bring the characteristics of the funds raised, in terms of currencies and interest rates, into line with those of loans granted and also to reduce funding costs. Long-term derivatives transactions are not used for trading, but only in connection with fund-raising and for the reduction of market risk exposure. All swaps linked to the borrowing portfolio have maturities matching the corresponding borrowings and are therefore of a long-term nature. The derivatives used in the context of funding and ALM hedging activities are: • Currency swaps; • Interest rate swaps; and • Structured swaps.

V.1.1.

Currency swaps

Currency swaps are contracts under which it is agreed to convert funds raised in one currency into another currency and, simultaneously, a forward exchange contract is concluded to re-exchange the two currencies in the future in order to be able to repay the funds raised on the due dates. The Bank enters into currency swaps, in which, at inception, the proceeds of a borrowing are converted into a different currency, mainly as part of its resource-raising operations, and, thereafter, the Bank will obtain the amounts needed to service the borrowing in the original currency. The following table shows the maturities of currency swaps (excluding short-term currency swaps – see Note V.2.), sub-divided according to their notional amount and fair value. The notional amounts are disclosed off balance sheet.

More than More than 1 year or less 1 year and up 5 years and to 5 years up to 10 years

29,824 230

103,690 7,098

86,573 -1,274

30,223 261

Including the fair value of macro-hedging currency swaps which stood at EUR 308 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 144 million).

66

Financial Report

2014

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

V.1.2.

Interest rate swaps

Interest rate swaps are contracts under which, generally, it is agreed to exchange floating-rate interest for fixed-rate interest or vice versa. Interest rate swaps enable the Bank to modify the interest rate structure of its borrowing portfolio and other portfolios in order to accommodate requests from its clients and also to reduce funding costs by exchanging its advantageous access conditions to certain capital markets with its counterparties. The following table shows the maturities of interest rate swaps (including synthetic swaps, whereby interest computed in a foreign currency is synthetically converted to EUR), sub-divided according to their notional amount and fair value. The notional amounts are disclosed off balance sheet. Interest rate swaps at 31 December 2014 (in EUR million)

Notional amount Fair value (i.e. net discounted value)(*)

More than More than 1 year or less 1 year and up 5 years and to 5 years up to 10 years

More than 10 years

Total 2014

113,106 8,067

136,244 5,012

472,520 17,862

More than More than 1 year or less 1 year and up 5 years and to 5 years up to 10 years

More than 10 years

Total 2013

134,339 2,458

444,567 11,081

57,723 662

Interest rate swaps at 31 December 2013 (in EUR million)

Notional amount Fair value (i.e. net discounted value)(*)

50,279 938

165,447 4,121

169,740 4,359

90,209 3,326

(*)

Including the fair value of macro-hedging interest rate swaps which stood at EUR -585 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR -362 million).

V.1.3.

Structured swaps

The Bank does not generally enter into any options contracts in conjunction with its risk hedging policy. However, as part of its strategy of raising funds on the financial markets at a lesser cost, the Bank enters into borrowing contracts and loans encompassing notably interest rate or stock exchange index options. Such structured borrowings and loans are entirely covered by swap contracts to hedge the corresponding market risk. The table below further details the number, value and notional amounts of structured swaps:

The fair value of swap transactions is computed using the income approach, applying valuation techniques to convert future amounts to a single present amount (discounted). The estimate of fair value is based on the value indicated by marketplace expectations about those future amounts. Valuation techniques can range from simple discounted known cash flows to complex option models. The valuation models applied are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing financial instruments, and incorporate the factors that market participants consider when setting a price. For a portion of derivative transactions, internal estimates and assumptions might be used in the valuation techniques when the market inputs are not directly available. All option contracts embedded in, or linked with, borrowings are negotiated over the counter. The structured deals include a variety of transactions dependent on interest rates, FX rates, inflation rates, stock indexes and IR volatilities.

V.1.4.

Derivatives credit risk mitigation policy

The credit risk with respect to derivatives lies in the loss which the Bank would incur where the counterparty would be unable to honour its contractual obligations. In view of the special nature and complexity of the derivatives transactions, a series of procedures has been put in place to safeguard the Bank against losses arising from the use of such instruments. • Contractual framework: All of the Bank’s derivative transactions are concluded in the contractual framework of ISDA Swap Agreements and Credit Support Annexes, which specify the conditions of exposure collateralisation. These are generally accepted and practised contract types.

2014 Financial Report

67

• Counterparty selection: The minimum rating at the outset is set at A3. The EIB has the right of early termination if the rating drops below a certain level. • Collateralisation: − Exposures (exceeding limited thresholds) are collateralised by cash and bonds. − Complex and illiquid transactions could require collateralisation over and above the current market value. − Both the derivatives portfolio with individual counterparties and the collateral received are regularly monitored and valued, with a subsequent call for additional collateral or release. The market value of collateral received for swaps amounts to EUR 36,051 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 17,651 million), with the following composition:

Swap collateral (in EUR million) Bonds Moody's or equivalent rating

Government

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 to A3 Baa1 to Baa3 Below Baa3 Non-Rated Total 2014

4,398 5,894 970 11,705 1,351 0 24,318

Agency, supranational, covered bonds 4,252 609 0 0 0 0 4,861

Cash

Total 2014

0 0 0 0 0 6,872 6,872

8,650 6,503 970 11,705 1,351 6,872 36,051

Cash

Total 2013

0 0 0 0 0 3,677 3,677

3,062 1,789 36 7,376 1,711 3,677 17,651

Swap collateral (in EUR million) Bonds Moody's or equivalent rating

Government

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 to A3 Baa1 to Baa3 Below Baa3 Non-Rated Total 2013

1,671 1,780 36 7,376 1,711 0 12,574

Agency, supranational, covered bonds 1,391 9 0 0 0 0 1,400

• Credit risk measurement for derivatives: The credit risk associated with derivatives varies according to a number of factors (such as interest and exchange rates) and generally corresponds to only a small portion of their notional value. The Bank measures the credit risk exposure related to swaps and derivatives transactions using the Current Unsecured Exposure and Total (Current and Potential) Unsecured Exposure for reporting and limit monitoring, and the Credit Risk Equivalent for capital allocation according to the recommendations of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) sponsored by the BIS. The Bank computes the Current Unsecured Exposure, which is the larger of zero and the market value of the portfolio of transactions within the netting set with a counterparty, less the value of collateral received. It is the amount that would be lost upon the default of the counterparty, using the received collateral and assuming no recovery on the value of those transactions in bankruptcy as well as immediate replacement of the swap counterparty for all the transactions. As of 31 December 2014 the Current Unsecured Exposure stood at EUR 3,586 million (EUR 807 million as of 31 December 2013). In addition, the Bank computes the Total Unsecured Exposure, which takes into account the possible increase in the netting set’s exposure over the margin period of risk, which ranges between 10 and 20 days, depending on the portfolio of transactions. The EIB computes the Total Unsecured Exposure at 90% confidence level using stressed market parameters to arrive at conservative estimates. This is in line with the recommendations issued by regulators in order to take into consideration the conditions that will prevail in case of default of an important market participant. As of 31 December 2014 the Total Unsecured Exposure stood at EUR 16,352 million (EUR 11,933 million as of 31 December 2013).

68

Financial Report

2014

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

• Limits: The limit system for banks covers both exposure, Current Unsecured Exposure and Total Unsecured Exposure. The Current Unsecured Exposure is limited by the Threshold applicable to the counterparty as defined in the Credit Support Annex and is dependent on the rating of the counterparty. For any exposure exceeding this Threshold, the EIB receives collateral posted by the counterparty. The Total Unsecured Exposure limit determines the maximum Total Unsecured Exposure accepted for each counterparty. The derivatives portfolio is valued and compared against limits on a daily basis. The following table provides a breakdown of counterparties by rating. Grouped ratings Moody’s or equivalent rating Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 A2 to A3 Below A3 Non-rated Total

The Bank also enters into short-term currency swap contracts in order to adjust currency positions in its operational treasury portfolios in relation to its benchmark currency, the euro, and to cater for demand for currencies in conjunction with loan disbursements. The notional amount of short-term currency swaps stood at EUR 42,902 million at 31 December 2014 against EUR 12,748 million at 31 December 2013. The notional amount of short term currency forwards was EUR 404 million at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 372 million). The fair value of these contracts was EUR 1,141 million at 31 December 2014 for currency swaps and EUR -38 million for currency forwards (2013: respectively EUR -77 million and EUR 4 million).

2014 Financial Report

69

Note W – Conversion rates The following conversion rates were used for establishing the balance sheets at 31 December 2014 and 2013: 31.12.2014

Related party transactions with the European Investment Fund (‘EIF’) are mainly related to the management by the Bank of the EIF treasury, the IT, the pension fund and other services on behalf of the EIF. In addition, the EIF manages the venture capital activity of the Bank. The amounts included in the Financial Statements and relating to the EIF are disclosed as follows:

(in EUR´ 000) Assets: Shares in affiliated undertakings Prepayments and accrued income Other assets Total assets Liabilities: Other liabilities Total liabilities Profit and loss account: Income from shares in affiliated undertakings Interest payable and similar charges Commission income Commission expenses Other operating income Total profit and loss account Off balance sheet: EIF capital – uncalled EIF treasury management Nominal value of put option granted to EIF minority shareholders Total off balance sheet

X.2.

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

806,976 5,747 688 813,411

493,588 557 10,281 504,426

-86,387 -86,387

-67,944 -67,944

9,737 -3,487 2,591 -24,357 5,131 -10,385

3,810 -2,753 2,830 -16,060 3,247 -8,926

2,120,000 1,521,210 609,774 4,250,984

1,490,400 1,035,076 441,336 2,966,812

Key Management Personnel

The Bank has identified members of the Board of Directors, the Audit Committee, the Management Committee, the Directors General heading the different EIB organisational directorates as key management personnel. Key management personnel compensation for the relevant reporting periods, included within General administrative expenses (Note R), is disclosed in the following table: (in EUR ’000) Short-term benefits(1) Post employment benefits(2) Termination benefits

2014 7,881 660 600 9,141

2013 8,026 750 550 9,326

(1) Short-term employee benefits comprise salaries and allowances, bonuses and social security contributions of the Management Committee, the Directors General and other Directors, and benefits paid to the members of the Board of Directors and the Audit Committee. (2) Post employment benefits comprise pensions and expenses for post employment health insurance paid to members of the Management Committee and Directors General and other Directors.

Open balances with key management personnel as at 31 December 2014 comprise the compulsory and optional supplementary pension plan and health insurance scheme liabilities, and payments outstanding as at the year end: (in EUR ’000) Pension plans and health insurance (Note L) Other liabilities (Note G)

31.12.2014 -29,810 -12,181

31.12.2013 -26,804 -12,217

Note Y – Post balance sheet events There have been no material events after the balance sheet date that would require adjustment of, or disclosure in, the Financial Statements as at 31 December 2014.

2014 Financial Report

71

Note Z – Management of third party funds Z.1.

Investment Facility – Cotonou

The Investment Facility, which is managed by the EIB, has been established within the framework of the Cotonou Agreement on cooperation and development of the African, Caribbean and Pacific Group of States and the European Union and its Member States on 23 June 2000 and subsequently revised. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Investment Facility.

Z.2.

Guarantee Fund

The Guarantee Fund for External Actions was set up in 1994 to cover defaults on loans and loan guarantees granted to non-Member States or for projects in non-Member States. The European Commission (‘EC’) entrusted financial management of the Guarantee Fund to the EIB under an agreement signed between the two parties in November 1994. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Guarantee Fund. Z.3.

NER300

The EIB supports the EC as an agent in the implementation of the NER 300 initiative - a funding programme for carbon capture and storage demonstration projects and innovative renewable energy technologies. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for NER300.

Z.4.

JESSICA (Contribution and Holding Funds)

JESSICA (The Joint European Support for Sustainable Investment in City Area) is an initiative developed by the EC and the EIB, in collaboration with the Council of Europe Development Bank. Under new procedures, Managing Authorities are being given the option of using some of their EU grant funding to make repayable investments in projects forming part of an integrated plan for sustainable urban development. These investments are delivered to projects via Urban Development Funds or if required Holding Funds (JESSICA Holding Funds). JESSICA Holding Funds are used in the context of the JESSICA initiative. As manager, EIB gathers the funding received from the Managing Authorities and invests it in Urban Development Funds, according to investment guidelines agreed with the donors. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for JESSICA.

Z.5.

EIF treasury

The EIF treasury is managed by the Bank in accordance with the treasury management agreement signed between the two parties in December 2000.

Z.6.

Risk-Sharing Finance Facility (‘RSFF’)

The RSFF has been established within the framework of the Co-operation Agreement, entered into force on 5 June 2007 between the EC on behalf of the European Union and the EIB. The RSFF aims at fostering investment in research, technological development and demonstration, and innovation. As part of the RSFF, the EIF set up the Risk Sharing Instrument for Innovative and Research oriented SMEs and small Mid-Caps (‘RSI’). The RSI provides guarantees to banks and leasing companies for loans and financial leases to research-based small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) and small Mid-Caps. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the RSFF.

Z.7.

EU-Africa Infrastructure Trust Fund (the ‘Trust Fund’)

The Trust Fund has been created within the framework of the Trust Fund Agreement between the EC on behalf of the European Union as the Founding Donor and the EIB as Manager, also open to Member States of the European Union which subsequently accede to this agreement as Donors. On 9 February 2006, the EC and the EIB signed a Memorandum of Understanding to promote jointly the EU-Africa Infrastructure Partnership and, in particular, to establish a supporting EU-Africa Infrastructure Trust Fund. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Trust Fund.

Z.8.

Special Section

The Special Section was set up by the Board of Governors on 27 May 1963. Under a decision taken on 4 August 1977, its purpose was redefined as being that of recording financing operations carried out by the EIB for the account of and under mandate from third parties. It includes the FED, MED/FEMIP, IPA (Instrument for Pre-Accession), Turkey mandates and the guarantee component of the European Development Finance Institutions Private Sector Development Facility.

Z.9.

InnovFin

The InnovFin or “InnovFin-EU Finance for Innovators” is a joint initiative between the EIB, the EIF and the European Commission under the new EU research programme for 2014-2020 “Horizon 2020”. On 11 December 2013, Regulation (EU) N 1291/2013 of the European Parliament and

72

Financial Report

2014

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

the Council establishing Horizon 2020 – the Framework Programme for Research and Innovation (2014-2020) and repealing Decision N 1982/2006/EC (“Horizon 2020 Regulation”) was adopted. On 12 June 2014 the European Commission, the EIB and the EIF signed a Delegation Agreement establishing the financial instrument InnovFin. InnovFin consists of a series of integrated and complementary financing tools and advisory services offered by the EIB Group, covering the entire value chain of research and innovation (R&I) in order to support investments from the smallest to the largest enterprise. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the InnovFin.

Z.10.

GF Greece

The Fund is a joint initiative between the Hellenic Republic, the EC and the EIB and was set up to support the lending to SMEs in Greece. Established by using unabsorbed Structural Funds for Greece, the Fund will guarantee EIB loans to SMEs via partner banks in Greece. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the GF Greece.

Z.11.

Loan Guarantee Instrument for Ten-T Projects (’LGTT’)

The LGTT has been established within the framework of the Co-operation Agreement, entered into force on 11 January 2008 between the EC on behalf of the European Union and the EIB. The LGTT aims at facilitating a greater private sector involvement in the financing of Trans-European transport networks infrastructure. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the LGTT.

Z.12.

European Neighbourhood and Partnership Instrument (‘ENPI’)

The Framework Agreement between the European Union and the EIB on the implementation of operations financed from the general budget of the European Union in the countries covered by the European Neighbourhood Policy is channelled through the ENPI. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for ENPI.

Z.13.

Project Bond Initiative (‘PBI’)

A Cooperation Agreement between the EC and the EIB in respect of the Project Bond Instrument: Pilot Phase was signed in November 2012. The PBI is designed to stimulate capital market financing for infrastructure delivered under ‘project finance’ structures, including Public Private Partnerships (PPPs). The initiative will seek to enhance the credit rating of bonds issued by project companies to a rating level that is attractive for investors and to lower the project’s overall financing costs. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the PBI.

Z.14.

AECID

This partnership agreement signed between the Kingdom of Spain (the Spanish Agency for International Development Cooperation (AECID)) and the EIB was set up to invest in operations in the countries covered by the FEMIP together with Mauritania (the "Southern Mediterranean region"), targeting mainly risk capital activities for micro and small/medium enterprises as well as engaging in the wider development of the private sector in the region. Z.15.

Neighbourhood Investment Facility (‘NIF’) Trust Fund

The NIF Trust Fund managed by the EIB was set up to achieve the strategic objective of the European Neighbourhood Partnership Instrument through targeted funding aimed at strengthening infrastructure interconnection between the EU and its neighbours in the areas of Transport and Energy, at addressing common environmental concerns and at supporting other relevant activities. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the NIF Trust Fund.

Z.16.

Heavily Indebted Poor Countries (‘HIPC’) Initiative

The HIPC Initiative (the ‘Initiative’) is an international debt relief mechanism that provides special assistance to the world's poorest countries. It was launched in 1996 following a proposal from the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund. The principal objective of the Initiative is to reduce the debt burden of poor countries to sustainable levels. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Initiative.

Z.17.

FEMIP Trust Fund

The FEMIP (Facility for Euro-Mediterranean Investment and Partnership)Trust Fund, which is also managed by the EIB, was set up to enhance the existing activities of the EIB in the Mediterranean Partner Countries, with the support of a number of donor countries and with a view of directing resources to operations in certain priority sectors through the provision of technical assistance and risk capital. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the FEMIP Trust Fund.

Z.18.

EPTA Trust Fund

EPTA (The Eastern Partnership Technical Assistance) Trust Fund is focused on increasing the quality and development impact of EIB Eastern Partnership operations by offering a multi-purpose, multi-sector funding facility for technical assistance. It will be complementary to the Neighbourhood Investment Facility. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for EPTA Trust Fund.

2014 Financial Report

73

Z.19.

Private Finance for Energy Efficiency (‘PF4EE’) Instrument

The Private Finance for Energy Efficiency (PF4EE) instrument is a joint agreement between the EIB and the European Commission with aims to address the limited access to adequate and affordable commercial financing for energy efficiency investments. The instrument targets projects which support the implementation of National Energy Efficiency Action Plans or other energy efficiency programmes of EU Member States. In December 2014 the European Commission and the EIB signed a Delegation Agreement establishing the financial Instrument PF4EE.

Z.20.

Research and Innovation Advisory (‘RDI Advisory’)

RDI Advisory was set up in partnership with the European Commission under a 7 year framework agreement signed in June 2014, as part of the InnovFin programme under Horizon 2020. It has two main lines of activity: (i) upstream project related advisory and (ii) horizontal activities destined to improve the overall framework conditions for RDI investments as well as the financing tools under Horizon 2020.

Z.21.

Financial Instrument (‘fi’) compass advisory platform

The fi-compass advisory platform provides EU Member States and their managing authorities as well as microcredit providers with advisory support and learning opportunities for developing financial instruments, within the scope of European Structural Investment Funds (ESIF) and the Programme for Employment and Social Innovation (EaSI). It is implemented by the EIB and funded by the EC under a Framework Contract for the period 2014-2020.

Z.22.

JASPERS

JASPERS (Joint Assistance to Support Projects in European Regions) provides advice to the 13 countries that joined the European Union in 2004, 2007 and 2013 (Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Malta, Poland, Romania, Slovak and Slovenia) as well as to Greece, the former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, Montenegro and Serbia during project preparation, to help improve the quality of the major projects to be submitted for grant financing under the Structural and Cohesion Funds.

Z.23.

FP7 Guarantee Fund

The 7th Framework Programme (‘FP7’) is designed to support research, technological development and demonstration projects all over Europe. The rules and principles for the management of the FP7 are laid out in the Agreement between the EC on behalf of the European Atomic Energy Community and the EIB. The EC entrusted financial management of the FP7 Guarantee Fund to the EIB under an agreement signed between the two parties in December 2007. The EIB prepared separate financial statements for FP7 Guarantee Fund until 2013 and the FP7 Guarantee Fund was transferred back to the European Commission in 2014.

Z.24.

ECHA

On 1 April 2011 the EIB entered into an asset management agreement with the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA). Under this agreement the EIB manages the investment portfolio of ECHA in accordance with the pre-agreed Asset Management Guidelines. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for ECHA.

74

Financial Report

2014

EIB Statutory Financial Statements

Statement of Special Section(1) as at 31 December 2014 and 2013 (in EUR ‘000) ASSETS Turkey From resources of Member States Disbursed loans outstanding Total(2) Instrument for Pre-Accession ('IPA') From resources of Member States Disbursed loans outstanding Total(3) Mediterranean Countries From resources of the European Union Disbursed loans outstanding Risk capital operations - amounts to be disbursed - amounts disbursed Total(4) African, Caribbean and Pacific State and Overseas Countries and Territories From resources of the European Union · Yaoundé Conventions Loans disbursed Contributions to the formation of risk capital - amounts disbursed Total(5) · Lomé Conventions Operations from risk capital resources - amounts to be disbursed - amounts disbursed Total(6) Total LIABILITIES Funds under trust management Under mandate from the European Union - Financial Protocols with the Mediterranean Countries - Financial Protocols with the instrument for Pre-Accession ('IPA') - Yaoundé Conventions - Lomé Conventions - Other resources under the Lomé Conventions Under mandate from Member States Total funds under trust management Funds to be disbursed On loans and risk capital operations in the Mediterranean countries On operations from risk capital resources under the Lomé Conventions Total funds to be disbursed Total

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

3,595 3,595

4,914 4,914

21,883 21,883

20,933 20,933

72,725

84,145

42,732 76,323 119,055 191,780

49,244 106,105 155,349 239,494

2,430

3,584

419 2,849

419 4,003

2,084 315,117 317,201 317,201 537,308

2,099 399,543 401,642 401,642 670,986

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

149,048 21,883 2,849 315,117 0 488,897 3,595 492,492

190,250 20,933 4,003 399,543 0 614,729 4,914 619,643

42,732 2,084 44,816 537,308

49,244 2,099 51,343 670,986

For information: Total amounts disbursed and not yet repaid on loans on special conditions made available by the Commission in respect of which the Bank has accepted an EU mandate for recovering principal and interest: a) Under the First, Second and Third Lomé Conventions as at 31 December 2014 EUR ‘000 369,925 (2013: EUR ‘000 393,482) b) Under Financial Protocols signed with the Mediterranean Countries as at 31 December 2014 EUR ‘000 72,908 (2013: EUR ‘000 79,121) In the context of the European Union – European Development Finance Institutions Private Sector Development Facility, the implementation agreement for the Guarantee Component was signed on 20 August 2014. Total amount of the EU guarantee to be issued is EUR ‘000 43,200 as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR nil). Note (1): The Special Section was set up by the Board of Governors on 27 May 1963. Under a decision taken on 4 August 1977, its purpose was redefined as being that of recording financing operations carried out by the European Investment Bank for the account of and under mandate from third parties. However, for the Investment Facility under the Cotonou Agreement, the EU-Africa Infrastructure Trust Fund, the Neighbourhood Investment Facility (NIF) Trust Fund and the FEMIP Trust Fund, separate financial statements are presented. In addition, since 2005, the EIB also prepares financial statements of different types for other mandates.

2014 Financial Report

75

The Statement of Special Section reflects amounts disbursed or to be disbursed, less cancellations and repayments, under mandate from the European Union and the Member States. Amounts disbursed and to be disbursed and funds received and to be received are carried at nominal value. No account is taken in the Statement of Special Section of provisions or value adjustments, which may be required to cover risks associated with such operations except for definite write-offs. Amounts in foreign currency are translated at exchange rates prevailing on 31 December. Note (2): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in Turkey under mandate, for the account and at the risk of Member States.

Initial amount: add: less:

exchange adjustments cancellations repayments

405,899 20,514 215 422,603 -422,818 3,595

Note (3): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects under the Instrument for Pre-Accession, for the account and at the risk of the European Union.

Initial amount: less:

29,640 exchange adjustments cancellations repayments

7,757 0 0 -7,757 21,883

Note (4): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in the Maghreb and Mashreq countries, Malta, Cyprus, Turkey and Greece (EUR 10 million lent prior to accession to the EC on 1 January 1981) under mandate, for the account and at the risk of the European Union.

Initial amount: less:

840,457 exchange adjustments cancellations repayments

51,048 130,445 467,184 -648,677 191,780

Note (5): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in the Associated African States, Madagascar and Mauritius and the Overseas Countries, Territories and Departments (AASMM-OCTD) under mandate, for the account and at the risk of the European Union.

Loans on special conditions Contributions to the formation of risk capital Initial amount: add:

139,483 2,503 141,986 capitalised interest exchange adjustments

1,178 9,823 11,001

less:

cancellations repayments

3,310 146,828 -150,138 2,849

Note (6): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in the African, Caribbean and Pacific States and the Overseas Countries and Territories (ACP-OCT) under mandate, for the account and at the risk of the European Union:

Independent Auditor’s Report To the Chairman of the Audit Committee of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK 98-100, Boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 LUXEMBOURG

REPORT OF THE REVISEUR D’ENTREPRISES AGREE We have audited the accompanying financial statements of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK, which comprise the balance sheet as at 31 December 2014, the profit and loss account and the cash flow statement for the year then ended, and a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information. Management’s responsibility for the financial statements The Management is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these financial statements in accordance with the general principles of the Directive 86/635/EEC of the Council of the European Communities of 8 December 1986 on the annual accounts and consolidated accounts of banks and other financial institutions, as amended by Directive 2001/65/EC of 27 September 2001, by Directive 2003/51/EC of 18 June 2003 and by Directive 2006/46/EC of 14 June 2006 (the ‘Directives’), and for such internal control as the Management determines is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. Responsibility of the Réviseur d’Entreprises agréé Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing as adopted for Luxembourg by the Commission de Surveillance du Secteur Financier. Those standards require that we comply with ethical requirements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance

about whether the financial statements are free from material misstatement. An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. The procedures selected depend on the judgement of the Réviseur d’Entreprises agréé, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the Réviseur d’Entreprises agréé considers internal control relevant to the entity’s preparation and fair presentation of the financial statements in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity’s internal control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the Management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion. Opinion In our opinion, the financial statements give a true and fair view of the financial position of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK as of 31 December 2014, and of the results of its operations and its cash flows for the year then ended in accordance with the general principles of the Directives.

KPMG Luxembourg, Société coopérative Cabinet de révision agréé

E. DOLLÉ

2014

Financial Report

77

Statement by The Audit Committee The Audit Committee reports to the Board of Governors, the following statement being communicated to the Governors prior to their approval of the Annual Report and the financial statements for the past financial year.

-

received assurance from the Management Committee concerning the effectiveness of the internal control structure and internal administration,

and considering Statement by the Audit Committee on the Bank’s unconsolidated financial statements prepared in accordance with the general principles of the EU Directives The Committee, instituted in pursuance of Article 12 of the Statute and Chapter V of the Rules of Procedure of the European Investment Bank for the purpose of verifying that the operations of the Bank are conducted and its books kept in a proper manner, having -

-

-

-

designated KPMG as external auditors, reviewed their audit planning process, examined and discussed their reports, noted that the opinion of KPMG on the unconsolidated financial statements of the European Investment Bank for the year ended 31 December 2014 prepared in accordance with the general principles of the EU Directives is unqualified,

-

the financial statements for the financial year ended 31 December 2014 as drawn up by the Board of Directors at its meeting on 12 March 2015,

-

that the foregoing provides a reasonable basis for its statement and,

-

Articles 24, 25 & 26 of the Rules of Procedure,

to the best of its knowledge and judgement: -

confirms that the activities of the Bank are conducted in a proper manner, in particular with regard to risk management and monitoring;

-

has verified that the operations of the Bank have been conducted and its books kept in a proper manner and that, to this end, it has verified that the Bank’s operations have been carried out in compliance with the formalities and procedures laid down by the Statute and Rules of Procedure;

-

confirms that the financial statements, comprising the balance sheet, the profit and loss account and the cash flow statement and a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information give a true and fair view of the financial position of the Bank as at 31 December 2014 in respect of its assets and liabilities, and of the results of its operations and cash flows for the year then ended, in accordance with the general principles of EU Directives.

convened on a regular basis with the Heads of Directorates and relevant services including, •

the Financial Controller,

•

the Directors General of Risk Management and Transaction Monitoring and Restructuring,

met regularly the Head of Internal Audit and discussed the relevant internal audit reports, and studied the documents which it deemed necessary to examine in the discharge of its duties,

Luxembourg, 12 March 2015 The Audit Committee

78

M. MATEJ

M. ÜÜRIKE

B. JAKOBSEN

J.N. SCHAUS

D. PITTA FERRAZ

J. SUTHERLAND

Financial Report 2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU Directives

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU Directives as at 31 December 2014

Value adjustments in respect of loans and advances and provisions for contingent liabilities (Note D.2) Profit for the financial year Profit attributable to minority interest (Note H) Profit attributable to equity holders of the Bank

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

84

Financial Report

2014

-599,123

-24,352 -6,499 -30,536

-30,851

-96,628 2,727,233 -46,989 2,680,244

-109,463 2,561,283 -14,859 2,546,424

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

Consolidated cash flow statement for the year ended 31 December 2014 (in EUR ‘000) A. Cash flows from operating activities: Profit for the financial year Adjustments for: Change in value adjustments on loans and advances (Note D.2) Change in provisions on pension plans and health insurance scheme Change in provisions for commitment on investment funds and guarantees on venture capital operations Value adjustments in respect of tangible and intangible assets Value (re-)adjustments in respect of shares and other variable-yield securities Held to maturity portfolio amortisation Effect of exchange rate changes Profit on rati activities Disbursements of loans and advances to credit institutions and customers Repayments of loans and advances to credit institutions and customers Change in deposits with central banks Change in treasury securities liquidity portfolios Change in venture capital operations included in shares and other variable-yield securities Change in shares and other variable-yield securities excluding venture capital operations Change in amounts owed to credit institutions and customers Change in prepayments and accrued income Change in other assets Change in short term treasury derivative valuations Change in accruals and deferred income Change in other liabilities Net cash used in operatin activities B. Cash flows from investing activities: Securities in Long Term Hedge Portfolio purchased during the year Securities from Long Term Hedge Portfolio matured during the year Purchase of loan substitutes included in the debt securities portfolios Redemption of loan substitutes included in the debt securities portfolios Purchase and disposal of tangible and intangible assets Net cash used in investin activities C. Cash flows from financing activities: Issuance of debts evidenced by certificates Redemption of debts evidenced by certificates Member States’ contribution Net change in cash related to acquisitions and disposals of share in subsidiary undertakings Dividend paid to minority interest Net cash from financin activities Summary statement of cash flows: Cash and cash equivalents at be inni financial ear Net cash from: Operating activities Investing activities Financing activities Effect of exchange rate changes on cash held Cash and cash equivalents at end of financial ear Cash and cash equivalents are composed of: Cash in hand, balances with central banks and post office banks, excluding deposits with Central Bank of Luxembourg to cover minimum reserve requirement (Note B.1) Bills maturing within three months of issue (Note B.2: A1 portfolio) Loans and advances to credit institutions: Repayable on demand Other loans and advances (Note C)

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

2014 Financial Report

85

European Investment Bank Group

Notes to the consolidated financial statements as at 31 December 2014 The European Investment Bank (the ‘Bank’ or ‘EIB’) was created by the Treaty of Rome in 1958 as the long term lending bank of the European Union (‘EU’). The task of the Bank is to contribute towards the integration, balanced development and economic and social cohesion of the EU Member States. The EIB raises substantial volumes of funds on the capital markets and lends these funds on favourable terms to projects furthering EU policy objectives. The EIB continuously adapts its activities to developments in EU policies. The Bank has its registered office at 98-100, boulevard Konrad Adenauer, Luxembourg. The European Investment Fund (the ‘Fund’ or ‘EIF’) was incorporated on 14 June 1994, in Luxembourg, as an international financial institution. The address of its registered office is 37 B, avenue J.F. Kennedy, L-2968 Luxembourg. The primary task of the Fund, while providing adequate return on equity, is to contribute to the pursuit of European Union objectives through: • the provision of guarantees to financial institutions that cover credits to small and medium sized entities (‘SME’); • the acquisition, holding, managing and disposal of equity participations; • the administration of special resources entrusted by third parties; and • related activities. The Bank holds 63.69% (2013: 62.10%) of the subscribed capital of the EIF. The Bank and the Fund together are defined as the ‘Group’.

Note A – Significant accounting policies A.1.

Accounting standards

The consolidated financial statements (the ‘Financial Statements’) of the European Investment Bank have been prepared in accordance with the general principles of the Directive 86/635/EEC of the Council of the European Communities of 8 December 1986 on the annual accounts and consolidated accounts of banks and other financial institutions, as amended by Directive 2001/65/EC of 27 September 2001, by Directive 2003/51/EC of 18 June 2003 and by Directive 2006/46/EC of 14 June 2006 on the annual and consolidated accounts of certain types of companies, banks and other financial institutions (the ‘Directives’). However, the Financial Statements do not include any management report. The Group prepares an Activity Report which is presented separately from the Financial Statements and its consistency with the Financial Statements is not audited. On a proposal from the Management Committee, the Board of Directors adopted the Financial Statements on 12 March 2015 and authorised their submission to the Board of Governors for approval by 28 April 2015. In preparing the Financial Statements, the Management Committee is required to make estimates and assumptions that affect reported income, expenses, assets, liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. Use of available information and application of judgement are inherent in the formation of estimates. Actual results in the future could differ from such estimates and the resulting differences may be material to the Financial Statements. The Group also publishes consolidated financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), as endorsed by the European Union.

A.2.

Foreign currency translation

The Group uses the euro (EUR) as the unit of measure for the capital accounts of Member States and for presenting its Financial Statements. The Group conducts its operations in the currencies of its Member States, in euro and in non-EU currencies. Its resources are derived from its capital, borrowings and accumulated earnings in various currencies. Foreign currency transactions are translated at the exchange rate prevailing on the date of the transaction. The Group's monetary assets and liabilities denominated in currencies other than euro are translated into euro at closing exchange rates prevailing at the balance sheet date. The gain or loss arising from such translation is recorded in the profit and loss account.

A.3.

Basis of consolidation

The Financial Statements comprise those of the European Investment Bank (the “Bank” or the “EIB”) and those of its subsidiary, the European Investment Fund (the “Fund” or the “EIF”). The financial statements of the Fund are prepared for the same reporting year as the Bank, using consistent accounting policies. The Bank consolidates the financial statements of the EIF.

86

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

After aggregation of the balance sheets and the profit and loss accounts, all intra-group balances, transactions, income and expenses resulting from intra-group transactions are eliminated. Minority interest represents the portion of profit or loss and net assets not owned, directly or indirectly, by the Bank. Assets held in an agency or fiduciary capacity are not assets of the Group and are reported in Note Z.

A.4.

Derivatives

The Group uses derivative instruments, mainly currency and interest rate swaps, as part of its asset and liability management (‘ALM’) activities to manage exposures to interest rate and foreign currency risks, including exposures arising from forecast transactions. All derivatives transactions are booked at nominal as off-balance sheet items at the date of the transaction. The majority of the Group’s swaps are concluded with a view to hedging specific bond issues. The Group enters into currency swaps, whereby the proceeds of a borrowing are initially converted into a different currency and on maturity the Group will obtain the amounts needed to service the borrowing in the original currency. The Group also enters into currency, interest rate and overnight index swaps as part of its hedging operations on loans or for the global ALM position. The corresponding interest is accounted for on a pro rata temporis basis. The Group also uses derivative instruments as part of its treasury operations.

A.4.1. Trading portfolio derivatives Trading portfolio derivatives are recorded at market value in the balance sheet as Other assets when their market value is positive or Other liabilities when their market value is negative. Changes in the market value are included in Net result on financial operations. Market values are obtained from quoted market prices, discounted cash flow models and option pricing models, which consider current market and contractual prices for the underlying instrument, as well as time value of money, yield curve and volatility of the underlying. Interest on derivative instruments is accrued pro rata temporis under Prepayments and accrued income or Accruals and deferred income. Currency swaps Currency swap contracts are entered into in order to adjust currency positions. The revaluation of the spot leg of a currency swap is neutralised in Accruals and deferred income or Prepayments and accrued income. The premium/discount between the spot and forward settlement amounts is amortised pro rata temporis through the profit and loss account in Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. The market value is recorded under Other assets when their market value is positive or Other liabilities when their market value is negative. Changes in the market value are included in Net result on financial operations. Interest rate swaps The interest received and paid under interest rate swaps is accrued pro rata temporis and reported in the profit and loss account under Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. The market value is recorded under Other assets when their market value is positive or Other liabilities when their market value is negative. Changes in the market value are included in Net result on financial operations. A.4.2

All other derivatives

Currency swaps Currency swap contracts are entered into in order to adjust currency positions. The revaluation of the spot leg of a currency swap is neutralised in Accruals and deferred income or Prepayments and accrued income. The forward leg of the currency swap is recorded off-balance sheet at settlement amount and is not revalued. The premium/discount between the spot and forward settlement amounts is amortised pro rata temporis through the profit and loss account in Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. Interest rate swaps The hedging interest rate swaps are not revalued. The interest received and paid under interest rate swaps is accrued pro rata temporis and reported in the profit and loss account under Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. Currency forwards Currency forwards are entered into in order to adjust future currency positions. The forward leg is recorded off-balance sheet at settlement amount and is not revalued. The difference between the spot amounts and the forward settlement amounts is amortised pro rata temporis through the profit and loss account in Interest receivable and similar income or Interest payable and similar charges. Interest on derivative instruments is accrued pro rata temporis under Prepayments and accrued income or Accruals and deferred income. A.5.

Financial assets

Financial assets are accounted for using the settlement date basis.

2014 Financial Report

87

A.6.

Cash and cash equivalents

The Group defines cash and cash equivalents as short term, highly liquid securities and interest-earning deposits with maturities of 90 days or less.

A.7. Treasury bills and other bills eligible for refinancing with central banks and debt securities including fixed-income securities The Bank changed its debt securities portfolio structure during 2014, in order to reduce the portfolio complexity and optimise allocation of liquid assets. As a result, three new portfolios were created (Securities liquidity portfolios P1 and P2, classified as held for trading, and long term hedge portfolio, classified as held to maturity) and five former portfolios are phased out (Operational bond portfolio A2, B1, B3 and B4 and the investment portfolio).

A.7.1. Group long term hedge portfolio (formerly Group investment portfolio) The Group long term hedge portfolio contains securities of the Bank’s long term hedge portfolio and the EIF investment portfolio, and consists of securities purchased with the intention of holding them to maturity. These securities are issued or guaranteed by: • Governments of the European Union Member States, G10 countries and their agencies; • Supranational public institutions, including multinational development banks. These securities are initially recorded at purchase price or more exceptionally at transfer price. Value adjustments are accounted for, if these are other than temporary. The difference between entry price and redemption value is accounted for pro rata temporis over the life of the securities. All the securities remaining in the former Investment portfolio were transferred into the newly created Long term hedge portfolio, where they will continue to be held until final maturity.

A.7.2. Operational portfolios A.7.2.1 Current operational portfolio structure • Operational money market portfolio A1 and Unitary Fund (UF) In order to maintain an adequate level of liquidity, the Bank purchases money market products with a maximum maturity of 3 months, in particular Treasury bills and negotiable debt securities issued by public bodies and credit institutions. The securities in the A1 portfolio are held until their final maturity and presented in the Financial Statements at amortised cost. Value adjustments are accounted for, if these are other than temporary. The UF portfolio includes securities with maturities of up to 12 months which are available for sale. Bonds are initially recorded at acquisition cost and presented in the Financial Statements at market value. Changes in market value are recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. • Securities liquidity portfolios P1 and P2 and Operational portfolio EIF The P1 ‘fixed rate’ and P2 ‘floating rate’ portfolios comprise bonds issued or guaranteed by national governments, supranational institutions, financial institutions and corporations. Securities in these portfolios are initially recorded at acquisition cost and presented in the Financial Statements at market value. Changes in market value are recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. The Operational portfolio EIF comprises listed securities with a maximum residual maturity of 10 years. These securities are classified in the available for sale category and are presented in the Financial Statements at market value. Changes in market value are recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. The market value of treasury portfolios is based on published price quotations in an active market as the first source. For instruments without available published price quotations, the market values are determined by obtaining quotes from market participants and/or by using valuation techniques or models, based whenever possible on observable market data prevailing at the balance sheet date. A.7.2.2 Former operational portfolio structure • Operational bond portfolios A2, B1, B3 and B4 The A2 portfolio included securities with maturities of up to 18 months which were available for sale. Bonds were initially recorded at acquisition cost and presented in the Financial Statements at market value. Changes in market value were recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. The difference between the acquisition cost and redemption amount was amortised pro rata temporis as Interest receivable and similar income. The B1 ‘Credit Spread’ portfolio comprised floating-rate and fixed-rate bonds issued or guaranteed by national governments, supranational institutions, financial institutions and corporations. These securities were available for sale. Bonds were initially recorded at acquisition cost and presented in the Financial Statements at market value. Changes in market value were recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. The difference between the acquisition cost and redemption amount was amortised pro rata temporis as Interest receivable and similar income.

88

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

The B3 ‘Global Fixed Income’ portfolio comprised listed securities with a maximum residual maturity of 10 years, issued and/or guaranteed by sovereigns, their agencies or by financial institutions. Securities held in this portfolio were marked to market value in the balance sheet; the corresponding changes in market value were recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. The B4 ‘Inflation Linked Investment’ portfolio comprised listed securities with a maximum residual maturity of 30 years, issued by EU Governments. Securities held in this portfolio were marked to market value in the balance sheet; the corresponding changes in market value were recorded under Net result on financial operations in the profit and loss account. No change has occurred in the treatment of A1 portfolio and Operational portfolio EIF. A.7.3. Loan substitutes This portfolio mainly consists of obligations in the form of bonds, notes or certificates issued by Special Purpose Vehicles (SPV), trust vehicles or financial institutions. These securities are classified as held to maturity and initially recorded at purchase price and valued at amortised cost. The difference between purchase price and redemption value is accounted for pro rata temporis over the life of the securities. Value adjustments are accounted for, if these are other than temporary.

A.8.

Loans and advances to credit institutions and customers

A.8.1. Loans and advances Loans and advances are included in the assets of the Group at their net disbursed amounts. Value adjustments have been made for loans and advances outstanding at the end of the financial year and presenting risks of non-recovery of all or part of their amounts. Such value adjustments are held in the same currency as the assets to which they relate. Value adjustments are accounted for in the profit and loss account as ‘Value adjustments in respect of loans and advances’ and are deducted from the appropriate asset items on the balance sheet. A.8.2. Interest on loans Interest on loans are recorded in the profit and loss account on an accruals basis, i.e. over the life of the loans. On the balance sheet, accrued interest is included in ‘Prepayments and accrued income’ under assets. Value adjustments to interest amounts on these loans are determined on a case-by-case basis by the Group’s Management and deducted from the appropriate asset item on the balance sheet.

A.8.3. Reverse repurchase operations (reverse repos) Under a tripartite reverse repo, a custodian/clearing agency arranges for custody, clearing and settlement of the transactions between the Bank and a third party. The custodians/clearing agencies operate under standardised global master purchase agreements and provide for delivery against payment systems, substitution of securities, automatic marking to market, reporting and daily transaction administration. Reverse repos are carried at the amounts of cash advanced and are entered on the balance sheet under Loans and advances to credit institutions – b) other loans and advances. Interest on reverse repos is accrued pro rata temporis. A.8.4. Interest subsidies Interest subsidies received in advance (see Note I) are deferred and recognised in the profit and loss account over the period from disbursement to repayment of the subsidised loan.

A.9.

Shares and other variable-yield securities

The Group acquires shares and other variable-yield securities when it enters into venture capital operations, infrastructure funds or investment funds. Shares and other variable-yield securities are initially recorded at acquisition cost. Their carrying value is adjusted to the lower of cost or market value at subsequent measurement at the balance sheet date. Investments in venture capital enterprises, infrastructure funds and investment funds represent shares and other variable-yield securities acquired for the longer term in the normal course of the Group’s activities. They are initially recorded at their original purchase cost. Based on the reports received from fund managers, the portfolios of investments are valued on a line-by-line basis at the lower of cost or attributable net asset value (‘NAV’), thus excluding any attributable unrealised gain that may be prevailing in the portfolio. The attributable NAV is determined through applying either the Group’s percentage ownership in the underlying vehicle to the NAV reflected in the most recent report or, to the extent available, the value per share at the same date, submitted by the respective Fund Manager. The attributable NAV is adjusted for events having occurred between the date of the latest available NAV and the balance sheet date to the extent that such adjustment is considered to be material. Unrealised losses due solely to administrative expenses and management fees of venture capital, infrastructure funds and investment funds in existence for less than two years at the balance sheet date are not taken into consideration in determining the attributable NAV.

A.10.

Tangible assets

Tangible assets include land, Group-occupied properties, other machines and equipment.

2014 Financial Report

89

Land is stated at acquisition cost and buildings are stated at acquisition cost less accumulated depreciation. The value of the Group's headquarters building in Luxembourg-Kirchberg and its building in Luxembourg-Weimershof are depreciated on a straight-line basis as set out below. Permanent equipment, fixtures and fittings, furniture, office equipment and vehicles have been recorded in the balance sheet at their acquisition cost, less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the estimated life of each item purchased, as set out below: • • • •

Buildings in Kirchberg and Weimershof: 30 years Permanent equipment, fixtures and fittings: 10 years Furniture: 5 years Office equipment and vehicles: 3 years

A.11.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets comprise internally developed computer software. Software development costs are capitalised if they meet certain criteria relating to identifiability, to the probability that future economic benefits will flow to the enterprise and to the reliability of cost measurement. Internally developed software meeting these criteria is carried at cost less accumulated amortisation calculated on a straight-line basis over three years from completion.

A.12.

Pension plans and health insurance scheme

A.12.1. Pension plans for staff The Group operates defined benefit pension plans to provide retirement benefits to substantially its entire staff. The Bank’s main pension scheme is a defined benefit pension scheme funded by contributions from staff and from the Bank which covers all employees. All contributions of the Bank and its staff are invested in the assets of the Bank. Commitments for retirement benefits are valued at least every year using the projected unit credit method, in order to ensure that the provision entered in the accounts is adequate. The latest valuation was carried out as at 30 September 2014 and was updated as at 31 December 2014 with an extrapolation (roll forward method) for the last three months of 2014. The main assumptions used by the actuary are set out in Note L. The main pension scheme of the EIF is a defined benefit scheme funded by contributions from staff and from the EIF which covers all employees. The scheme entered into force in March 2003, replacing the previous defined contribution scheme. Cumulative prior year actuarial deficits and surpluses in excess of 10% of the commitments for retirement benefits are recognised over the expected average remaining service lives of the plan’s participants on a straight line basis.

A.12.2. Health insurance scheme The Group has set up its own health insurance scheme for the benefit of staff, financed by contributions from the Group and its employees. The health insurance scheme is managed and accounted for under the same principles as the pension plan for staff described in Note A.12.1. The latest valuation was carried out as at 30 September 2014 and was updated as at 31 December 2014 with an extrapolation (roll forward method) for the last three months of 2014.

A.12.3. The Management Committee pension plan The Management Committee pension plan is a defined benefit pension scheme funded by contributions from the Group only which covers all Management Committee members. All contributions of the Group are invested in the assets of the Group. The Management Committee pension plan is managed and accounted for under the same principles as the pension plan for staff described in Note A.12.1.

Optional Supplementary provident scheme

A.12.4.

The optional supplementary provident scheme is a defined contribution pension scheme, funded by voluntary staff’s contributions and employer’s contributions. The corresponding liability is recorded in Other liabilities. A.13.

Amounts owed to credit institutions and customers

Amounts owed to credit institutions and customers are presented in the financial statements at their redemption amounts. Interest on amounts owed to credit institutions and customers is recorded in the profit and loss account on an accruals basis as Interest payable and similar charges. Accrued interest is included in Accruals and deferred income under liabilities.

90

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

A.14.

Debts evidenced by certificates

Debts evidenced by certificates are presented at their redemption amounts, except for zero coupon bonds which are presented at their amortised cost. Transaction costs and premiums/ discounts are amortised in the profit and loss account on a straight line basis over the life of the debt through Accruals and deferred income or Prepayments and accrued income. Interest expense on debt instruments is included in Interest payable and similar charges in the consolidated profit and loss account. A.15.

Provision for guarantees issued and for commitment on investment funds

A.15.1. Provision for guarantees issued This provision is intended to cover risks inherent in the Group’s activity of issuing guarantees in favour of financial intermediaries or issued in respect of loans granted by third parties. A provision for guarantees issued is established if there is objective evidence that the Group will have to incur a loss in respect of a given guarantee granted.

A.15.2. Provision for commitment on investment funds This provision is intended to cover risks inherent in the Group’s commitment on investment funds signed but not yet disbursed.

A.16.

Reserves

A.16.1. Reserve fund As foreseen by Article 22.1 of the Statute, “a reserve fund of up to 10% of the subscribed capital shall be built up progressively” from the retained profit of the Bank.

A.16.3. Special activities reserve As foreseen by Article 16.5 of the Statute, “the special activities of the Bank […] will have a specific allocation of reserve”. The reserve is based on the capital allocation of each operation.

A.16.4. General loan reserve In 2009 a “general loan reserve” was introduced for the expected loss of the Bank’s loan and guarantee portfolio, modelled upon the Group’s policy guidelines.

A.17.

Prepayments and accrued income

Expenditure incurred during the financial year but relating to a subsequent financial year, together with any income for which payment is not due until the expiry of the underlying instrument.

A.18.

Accruals and deferred income

Income received before the balance sheet date but relating to a subsequent financial year, together with any charges which, though relating to the financial year in question, will be paid only in the course of a subsequent financial year.

A.19.

Interest receivable and similar income

Revenues on loans are mainly composed of interest revenue, commitment fees, front-end fees and prepayment indemnities. Prepayment indemnities are recognised in the profit and loss when received, as the revenue is earned. From 1 January 2014, commitment fees are classified under “Interest receivable and similar income” while those fees were previously classified under “Commission receivable”. See note A.21. The Group changed the accounting policy applied on front-end fees from 1 January 2014. Those front-end fees are now deferred and recognised under “Interest receivable and similar income” in the profit and loss account over the life of the underlying loan. Front-end fees were previously recognised in the P&L under “Commission receivable” when received. See note A.21.

2014 Financial Report

91

In addition to revenue on loans, the ‘Interest receivable and similar income’ includes also interest revenue from the securities portfolio and derivatives.

A.20.

Dividend income

Dividends are recognised in the profit and loss account when the entity’s right to receive payment is established.

A.21.

Reclassification of prior year figures

Certain prior year figures have been reclassified to conform with the current year’s presentation. The reclassifications principally relate to:

Loan instalments receivable: - From: Other assets EUR‘000 129,713 - To: Loans and advances to credit institutions c) loans EUR’000 2,691 / Loans and advances to customers b) loans EUR‘000 127,022 Taxation The Protocol on the privileges and Immunities of the European Union appended to the treaty on European Union and the treaty on the functioning of the European Union, stipulates that the assets, revenues, and other property of the Institutions of the Union are exempt from all direct taxes.

The cash in hand and balances with central banks and post office banks equal to EUR ’000 114,283 at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 106,382). EIB is an eligible counterparty in the Eurosystem’s monetary policy operations, and therefore has been given access to the monetary policy operations of the European Central Bank. The Bank conducts the operations via the Central Bank of Luxembourg, where the Bank maintains a deposit to cover the minimum reserve requirement. The balance of this deposit amounts to EUR ‘000 113,873 as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 106,258).

B.2.

Debt securities portfolio

The Group changed its debt securities portfolio structure during 2014. The debt securities portfolio is now composed of the Group long term hedge portfolio, the operational money market portfolios A1 and UF, the securities liquidity portfolios P1 and P2, the operational EIF portfolio and the loan substitutes portfolio. Previously, the Group’s debt securities portfolio was composed of the Group investment portfolio, the operational money market portfolios A1 and A2, the operational bond portfolios B1 ‘Credit Spread’, B3 ‘Global Fixed Income’, B4 ‘Inflation Linked Investment’, the Operational EIF portfolio and the loan substitutes portfolio. The details of these portfolios and their classification as at 31 December 2014 and 2013 are as follows:

Treasury bills and other bills eligible for refinancing with central banks Debt securities including fixed-income securities Total debt securities(*) (*)

of which EUR ‘000 12,217,269 unlisted in 2014 and EUR ‘000 6,005,052 in 2013.

Loan substitutes, which represent acquisitions of interests in pools of loans or receivables in connection with securitisation transactions are considered as part of the aggregate loans (Note D). Some of these transactions have been structured by adding credit or project related remedies, thus offering additional recourse. No value adjustment is required and has thus been accounted for as at 31 December 2014 and 2013. EU sovereign exposure in bond holdings The Group did not record value adjustments in 2013 and 2014 in respect of its held to maturity EU sovereign and sovereign guaranteed exposure as at the year end, in view of the Bank’s preferred creditor status as well as of the EIF and the protection given by the Bank’s Statute as well as on a detailed review of any value adjustment requirements.

2014 Financial Report

93

The following tables show the exposure to debt issued or guaranteed by EU sovereigns in the Group’s debt securities portfolios as at 31 December 2014 and 2013:

Note C – Loans and advances to credit institutions – other loans and advances (in EUR ‘000) The Group enters into collateralised reverse repurchase and repurchase agreement transactions that may result in credit exposure in the event that the counterparty to the transaction is unable to fulfil its contractual obligations. The Group controls credit risk associated with these activities by monitoring counterparty credit exposure and collateral values on a daily basis and requiring additional collateral to be deposited with the Group when deemed necessary.

94

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

31.12.2014 12,293,010 182,330 25,415,488 37,890,828 36,553,253

Term deposits Overnight deposits Tripartite reverse repos(*) Total other loans and advances to credit institutions of which cash and cash equivalents (*)

31.12.2013 5,839,462 413,273 39,318,249 45,570,984 44,030,984

These operations are carried out with a third-party custodian who undertakes, on the basis of a framework contract, to guarantee compliance with the contractual terms and conditions, notably with respect to: - delivery against payment; - verification of collateral; - the collateral margin required by the lender which must always be available and adequate, with the market value of the securities being verified daily by the said custodian; and - organisation of substitute collateral provided that this meets all the contractual requirements.

Provision at 1 January Release during the year Use during the year Allowance during the year Foreign exchange adjustment At 31 December

In 2013 the Bank has retroceded EUR ‘000 5,200 to the European Commission regarding a contribution previously made on an operation which has been fully repaid in 2013. Such retrocession was accounted for in the profit and loss account as Value adjustments in respect of loans and advances and provisions for contingent liabilities. Such retrocession did not occur in 2014.

2014 Financial Report

95

D.3.

Geographical breakdown of lending by country in which projects are located (in EUR ‘000)

D.3.1. Loans for projects within the European Union Countries and territories in which projects are located

A provision for guarantees issued has been established as there is objective evidence that the Group will have to incur a loss in respect of guarantees granted. This provision amounts to EUR ‘000 159,753 as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 190,987). The change in provision in respect of guarantees issued totalled EUR ‘000 24,311 in 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 19,261). In addition, a foreign exchange adjustment of EUR ‘000 6,923 was recognised for the year ended 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 3,267).

Venture capital EBRD shares(1) operations Cost: At 1 January 2014 Net additions At 31 December 2014 Value adjustments: At 1 January 2014 Net releases/additions At 31 December 2014 Net book value: At 31 December 2014 At 31 December 2013

The amount of EUR ‘000 157,500 (2013: EUR ‘000 157,500) corresponds to the capital paid in by the Group as at 31 December 2014 with respect to its subscription of EUR ‘000 900,440 to the capital of the EBRD (European Bank for Reconstruction and Development). As at 31 December 2014, the Group holds 3.04% of the subscribed capital of the EBRD. Based on the audited 2013 EBRD financial statements prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, the share of underlying net equity of the Group in EBRD amounted to EUR 450.7 million (2012: EUR 424.1 million).

In EUR million EBRD (31.12.2012)*restated EBRD (31.12.2013)

% held 3.04 3.03

Total own funds 13,950 14,876

Total net result 831 922

Total assets 51,142 48,958

Note F – Intangible and tangible assets (in EUR ‘000)

Cost: At 1 January 2014 Additions Disposals At 31 December 2014 Accumulated depreciation: At 1 January 2014 Depreciation Disposals At 31 December 2014 Net book value: At 31 December 2014 At 31 December 2013

Land

Luxembourg buildings

Furniture and equipment

Total tangible Total intangible assets assets

24,723 0 -4,248 20,475

379,659 3,081 -27,304 355,436

81,970 15,375 -14,820 82,525

486,352 18,456 -46,372 458,436

15,912 6,938 -8,668 14,182

0 0 0 0

-151,298 -9,953 10,770 -150,481

-42,706 -13,911 13,551 -43,066

-194,004 -23,864 24,321 -193,547

-7,075 -6,672 8,668 -5,079

20,475 24,723

204,955 228,361

39,459 39,264

264,889 292,348

9,103 8,837

On 1 January 2014 the Bank sold its Hamm building for EUR’000 24,280. The gain on sale of EUR’000 1,925 is recorded under Other operating income (refer to Note Q) in the consolidated profit and loss account.

100

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

Note G – Other assets and other liabilities (in EUR ‘000) Other assets Guarantee calls from Member States & Guarantee fund Guarantees disbursed (Venture Capital operations) Commission receivable on guarantees and venture capital operations Staff housing loans and advances(*) Fair value of derivatives Advances on salaries and allowances Other Total

31.12.2014 18,921 6,585 14,364 5,219 964 463 25,533 72,049

31.12.2013 22,151 9,780 11,177 7,098 602 416 31,141 82,365

(*)

The balance relates to staff housing loans disbursed previously to the employees by the Bank. Since 1999 these housing loans have been substituted by an arrangement with an external financial institution, whereby permanently employed staff members of the Group may be granted staff housing loans in accordance with the Group's staff regulations. The same interest rates, terms and conditions are applicable to all said employees. Other liabilities Optional Supplementary Provident Scheme (Note L) Payable on HIPC initiative Personnel costs payable Transitory account on loans Guarantee fees Financial guarantees payable Fair value of derivatives Western Balkans infrastructure fund Other Total

Note H – Subscribed capital, Group own funds and appropriation of profit H.1.

Consolidated own funds and appropriation of profit

Statement of movements in consolidated own funds (in EUR ‘000) Share capital: - Subscribed capital - Uncalled capital - Called capital - Capital called but not paid - Paid in capital Reserves and profit for the year: Reserve fund: - Balance at beginning of the year - Appropriation of prior year's profit(1) - Contribution of Croatia - Balance at end of the year - Receivable from Member States - Paid-in balance at end of the year Additional reserves: - Balance at beginning of the year - Appropriation of prior year's profit(2) - Changes in ownership interests (3) - Balance at end of the year Special activities reserve: - Balance at beginning of the year - Appropriation of prior year's profit(1) - Balance at end of the year General loan reserve: - Balance at beginning of the year - Appropriation of prior year's profit(1) - Balance at end of the year Profit for the financial year attributable to equity holders of the Bank Total consolidated own funds attributable to equity holders of the Bank

2014

2013

243,284,155 -221,585,020 21,699,135 -479,811 21,219,324

243,284,155 -221,585,020 21,699,135 -909,944 20,789,191

22,828,922 1,499,493 0 24,328,415 -96,286 24,232,129

21,596,628 1,103,914 128,380 22,828,922 -112,333 22,716,589

1,312,145 1,564,381 5,902 2,882,428

1,255,639 56,464 42 1,312,145

6,090,520 -59,798 6,030,722

5,140,386 950,134 6,090,520

3,663,165 -457,652 3,205,513 2,680,244 60,250,360

2,976,909 686,256 3,663,165 2,546,424 57,118,034

2014 413,571 149,057 -9,737 46,989 599,880

2013 400,514 2,008 -3,810 14,859 413,571

Equity attributable to minority interest (in EUR ‘000) - Balance at 1 January - Change in minority interest due to change in ownership(3) - Dividend paid - Appropriation of the result of the financial year Total equity attributable to minority interest at 31 December

(1) On 25 April 2014, the Board of Governors decided to appropriate the profit of the Bank for the year ended 31 December 2013, which amounted to EUR ‘000 2,514,801, to the Reserve Fund, the Additional reserves, the Special activities reserve and the General loan reserve. The fact that amounts are being released from the General loan reserve or the Special activities reserve is the consequence of the evolution of the risks of the underlying operations. (2) The difference between the statutory profit of the Bank and the consolidated profit of the Group amounting to EUR ‘000 31,623 was allocated to the Additional reserves attributable to the equity holders of the Bank. (3) This balance comprises EUR ‘000 5,902 resulting from purchases and sales of EIF shares and from the capital increase of the EIF.

On 1 July 2013, the subscribed capital increased from EUR 242,392,989,000 to EUR 243,284,154,500, by virtue of the contributions of Croatia, a new Member State that joined on 1 July 2013. The contributions of the new Member State to the Paid-in capital and to the Reserves amount to EUR 79.5 million and EUR 128.4 million respectively. The instalments up to and including 30 November 2014 were settled in full. H.2.

Subscribed capital and reserves, called but not paid

As a result of the decision by the Member States, the subscribed and called capital of the Bank increased by EUR 10 billion on 31 December 2012. The Member States were due to pay in their respective shares of this EUR 10 billion capital increase over no more than three instalments due on 31 March 2013, 31 March 2014 and 31 March 2015. All contributions due on 31 March 2013 and 31 March 2014 were settled in full and 95.8% of the 10 billion capital increase has been settled as at 31 December 2014. The amount of EUR ‘000 576,097 shown in the balance sheet under the caption Subscribed capital and reserves, called but not paid contains EUR ‘000 420,197 receivable from the Member States in 2015 in respect of their share of the capital increase and EUR ‘000 155,900 related to net receivable from the new Member State, Croatia. Statement of movements in own funds (in EUR ‘000) Subscribed capital receivable from Member States in respect of 2012 capital increase Subscribed capital called but not paid (Croatia) Reserves called but not paid (Croatia) Total

Redemption premiums on swaps receivable and payable represent end payments of the underlying swap agreements for those agreements which include such features.

(**)

Part of the amounts received from the European Commission has been made available as a long-term advance which is entered on the liabilities side under item Accruals and deferred income and comprises: • amounts in respect of interest subsidies for loans granted for projects outside the European Union, under Conventions signed with the ACP States and Protocols concluded with the Mediterranean Countries; and • interest subsidies, concerning certain lending operations put in place within the EU from the Bank's own resources, made available in conjunction with the EMS under Council Regulation (EEC) No 1736/79 of 3 August 1979 and in conjunction with the financial mechanism established by the EFTA Countries under the EFTA Agreement signed on 2 May 1992. (***) Refer to A.19.

Repayable on demand Short term deposits Cash deposited on swaps payable Total

J.2.

31.12.2014 6,915,224 51,110 358,290 7,324,624

31.12.2013 4,089,233 79,764 315,423 4,484,420

31.12.2014 112,844

31.12.2013 50,799

356,979 1,518,849 270,840 2,259,512

316,619 1,582,192 537,775 2,487,385

Amounts owed to customers

Overnight deposits European Union and Member States' accounts: - For Special Section operations and related unsettled amounts - Deposit accounts Short-term deposits Total

2014 Financial Report

103

Note K – Debts evidenced by certificates In its financing activity, one of the Group’s objectives is to align its funding strategy with the funds required for the loans granted, notably in terms of currencies. The caption ‘Debts evidenced by certificates’ includes ’Debt securities in issue’ (securities offered to the general investing public) and ‘Others’ (private placements). The table below discloses the details per currency of debts outstanding at 31 December 2014 and 2013, together with the average rates and due dates. Debts evidenced by certificates (in EUR '000) Outstanding at Average rate Due dates 31.12.2014 2014(*)

The principal and interest of certain structured borrowings are index linked to stock exchange indexes (historical value: nil in 2014 and EUR 288 million in 2013). All borrowings are fully hedged through structured swap operations. The table below provides the movements in 2014 and 2013 for debts evidenced by certificates (including the short term commercial papers): 2014 426,358 102,581 -89,235 -5,029 18,778 453,453

(In EUR million) Balance at 1 January Issuance during the year Contractual redemptions Early redemptions Exchange adjustments Balance at 31 December

104

Financial Report

2014

2013 424,674 84,934 -68,197 -1,303 -13,750 426,358

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

Note L – Provisions – pension plans and health insurance scheme (in EUR ’000) The Group’s main pension scheme is a defined benefit pension scheme funded by contributions from staff and from the Group covering all employees. All contributions of the Group and its staff are invested in the assets of the Group. The pension plans and health insurance scheme provisions are as follows (in EUR ‘000):

Staff pension plan: Provision at 1 January Payments made during the year Recognition of actuarial losses Annual contributions and interest Sub-total Management Committee Pension Plan Provision at 31 December Health insurance scheme: Provision at 1 January Payments made during the year Recognition of actuarial losses Annual contributions and interest Provision at 31 December Total provisions at 31 December

2014

2013

1,698,094 -66,470 11,739 195,988 1,839,351 35,854 1,875,205

1,560,570 -61,564 29,931 169,157 1,698,094 35,789 1,733,883

183,879 -15,593 1,901 32,357 202,544 2,077,749

167,121 -14,414 2,021 29,151 183,879 1,917,762

The above figures do not include the liability towards members of staff in respect of the Optional Supplementary Provident Scheme (a defined contribution pension scheme). The corresponding amount of EUR 375 million (2013: EUR 326 million) is classified under ‘Other liabilities’ (Note G). The provision in respect of future retirement and health insurance benefits was valued as at 30 September 2014 by an independent actuary using the projected unit credit method. The actuarial valuation was updated as at 31 December 2014 with an extrapolation (‘roll forward’ method) for the last 3 months of 2014, using the prevailing market rates of 31 December 2014 and the following assumptions (for the staff pension and medical plans): • a discount rate of 3.14% (2013: 5.10%) for determining the actuarial present value of benefits accrued in the pension and health insurance schemes, corresponding to 19.80 year duration (2013: 19.42 year duration); • in the light of past experience, the Bank estimates that the overall expected remuneration of post-employment reserves is set at a rate of 1.5% (2013: 1.5%) above the discount rate mentioned above; • a progressive retirement between the age of 55-65 (same as 2013); • a combined average impact of the increase in the cost of living and career progression of 4.5% (same as 2013); • probable resignation rate varies between 30% and 0% and decreases with age (same as 2013); • a rate of adjustment of pensions of 2% per annum (same as 2013); • use of the ISCLT longevity table 2013 (2013: ISCLT longevity table 2008); • a medical cost inflation rate of 4% per annum (same as 2013); and • a medical cost profile per age updated in 2014. The provisions for these schemes are adjusted when needed (Note A.12.1) according to the actuarial valuation, as per the tables above. Cumulative prior year actuarial deficits or surpluses in excess of 10% of the commitments for retirement benefits are recognised over the expected average remaining service lives of the participants on a straight line basis. In 2013, the actuarial valuation on the pension plans and the healthcare scheme displayed an unrecognised loss of EUR 433,564. EUR ’000 198,431 was reported in excess of the 10% corridor, and recognised over the expected average remaining service lives of the participants on a straight line basis from 1 January 2014. Thereby, the net loss recognised in 2014 is EUR ’000 13,672. In 2014, the actuarial valuation on the pension plans and the healthcare scheme displayed an unrecognised loss of EUR ‘000 1,503,683. EUR ‘000 1,145,589 was reported in excess of the 10% corridor, and the net loss which will be recognised in 2015 will be EUR ‘000 78,707.

Note M – Profit for the financial year The appropriation of the balance of the statutory profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 2014, amounting to EUR ‘000 2 625 851 will be submitted for approval by the Board of Governors by 28 April 2015.

2014 Financial Report

105

Note N – ‘Interest receivable and similar income’ and ‘Interest payable and similar charges’ N.1.

Net interest income (in EUR ‘000)

Interest receivable and similar income: Cash in hand, balance with central banks and post office banks Treasury bills and other bills eligible for refinancing with central banks and debt securities including fixed income securities Loans and advances to credit institutions and customers Derivatives Total Interest payable and similar charges: Amounts owed to credit institutions and customers Debts evidenced by certificates Derivatives Other Total Net interest income N.2.

Income not analysed per country: Revenue from Investment portfolio and loan substitutes portfolios Revenue from Operational bond portfolios Revenue from Operational money-market portfolios Revenue from money-market operations Income from derivatives

Unrealised result on securities liquidity portfolios / operational treasury portfolio Net amortisation on foreign exchange derivatives Value (re-)adjustment on venture capital operations Net result on unwind of swaps Net realised result on securities liquidity portfolios / operational treasury portfolio Net result on repurchase of debts evidenced by certificates Result on long-term futures Value (re-)adjustment on shares and other variable yield securities other than venture capital Net unrealised result on derivatives Net result on translation of balance sheet positions Realised result on sale of shares and other variable yield securities Other Total net result on financial operations

Note Q – Other operating income (in EUR ‘000)

Reversal of previous year’s unutilised accruals on general administrative expenses Rental income Sale of EIF Shares Other Total

On 1 January 2014 the Bank sold its Hamm building for EUR’000 24,280 (refer to Note F). The gain on sale of EUR’000 1,925 is recorded under ‘Other’ in the above table.

Salaries and allowances(*) Welfare contributions and other staff costs Staff costs Other general administrative expenses Total general administrative expenses

2013 -265,581 -196,014 -461,595 -137,528 -599,123

(*)

of which the amount for members of the Management Committee is EUR ‘000 3,168 at 31 December 2014 and EUR ‘000 3,200 at 31 December 2013.

The number of persons employed by the Group was 2,557 at 31 December 2014 (2,359 at 31 December 2013).

2014 Financial Report

107

Note S – Off-balance sheet special deposits for service of borrowings This item represents the amount of coupons and bonds due, paid by the Bank to the paying agents, but not yet presented for payment by the holders of bonds issued by the Bank.

Note U – Risk management This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to and its management and control of risks, in particular the primary risks associated with its use of financial instruments. These are: • Credit risk - the risk of loss resulting from client or counterparty default and arising on credit exposure in all forms, including settlement risk; • Interest rate risk - the risk that an investment's value will change due to a change in the absolute level of interest rates, in the shape of the yield curve or in any other interest rate relationship; • Liquidity and funding risk - the risk that the Group is unable to fund assets or meet obligations at a reasonable price or, in extreme situations, at any price; • Foreign exchange rate risk - the risk of an investment's value changing due to changes in currency exchange rates and • Operational risk - the potential loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events. Within the Group, the management and control of risks is handled separately by each entity. As a consequence, risk management information presented in this note will distinguish between the Bank and the Fund. The Bank has established a group risk function to strengthen the risk management of the overall Group and to provide oversight of all the risks which the Group is subject to. The high-level principles of the Bank’s risk management on a consolidated level are set out in the Group Risk Management Charter. The Group Risk Management Charter aims at ensuring a group-wide view of the Bank’s risks and integrated approach to risk management.

U.1.

Risk Management Organisation

U.1.1. Risk Management Organisation of the Bank The Bank aligns its risk management systems to changing economic conditions and evolving regulatory standards. It adapts them on an ongoing basis as best market practice develops. Systems are in place to control and report on the main risks inherent in its operations, i.e. credit, market and operational risks. The Bank analyses and manages risks so as to obtain protection for its assets, its financial result, and consequently its capital. While the Bank is not subject to full regulation, it aims to comply with the relevant EU banking directives and the recommendations of the banking supervisors of the EU Member States, EU legislation and the competent supranational bodies, such as the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS). The following sections disclose the credit, market and liquidity risks to which the Bank is exposed on its activities performed on own resources. The Risk Management Directorate (RM) independently identifies, assesses, monitors and reports credit, market and operational risks to which the Bank is exposed in a comprehensive and consistent way. Within a framework, whereby the segregation of duties is preserved, RM is independent of the Front Offices and provides second opinion on all proposals made which have risk implications. The Director General of RM reports, for credit, market and operational risks, to the Management Committee and meets regularly with the Audit Committee to discuss topics relating to credit, market and operational risks. He is also responsible for overseeing risk reporting to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors. Two risk-oriented committees support the implementation of the Bank’s risk policies. The Credit Risk Assessment Group (CRAG) is a high-level forum for discussing relevant credit risk issues arising in the course of the Bank’s activities and for advising the Management Committee on these. Its members are the Directors General of the Operations, Projects, RM, Transaction Monitoring & Restructuring (TMR), Finance and Legal Affairs Directorates. The CRAG is intended to complement, and does not replace, the existing case-by-case review of lending operations, which remains central to the loan approval process. An Asset / Liability Committee (ALCO), made up of the Directors General of the Operations, Finance and RM Directorates, the Head of Financial Control and the Chief Economist, provides a high-level forum for debating the Bank’s Asset / Liability Management (ALM) matters and for making proposals in this field to the Management Committee. It promotes and facilitates the dialogue among the Directorates represented in it, while providing a wider perspective on, and enhancing their understanding of, the main financial risks. The Bank continued to develop its capacity to manage loans post signature in line with the Bank’s overall higher lending volume and the economic environment. For significant parts of the portfolio this is the responsibility of TMR, a Directorate independent from RM . TMR is focusing on monitoring the higher risk counterparts and certain forms of security and it also manages transactions requiring particular attention. All of its proposals which have credit risk implications are subject to an independent second opinion by the RM. U.1.1.1. Risk measurement and reporting system Risks are assessed both under normal circumstances and possible stressed conditions, with the purpose to quantify their impact on the Bank’s solvency, liquidity and operations. Risk measurements combine metrics such as expected and unexpected loss estimations based on historical default probabilities together with scenario-based and sensitivity analyses. Worst case scenarios aim at capturing extreme, low probability events which could impact the Bank. Information on the risk measures described above are presented and explained to the Management Committee and to the Board of Directors on a monthly basis. The reports include aggregate credit exposures, credit concentration analyses and other key portfolio risk indicators, as well as Value at Risk (VaR), sensitivity analyses, liquidity indicators and cumulative funding gaps.

2014 Financial Report

109

The Bank maintains within its own funds two reserves for the expected and unexpected losses – the General Loan Reserve (GLR) and the Special Activities Reserve (SAR), respectively. The General Loan Reserve is a dedicated reserve for the expected loss of the Bank's loan portfolio. It is calculated monthly according to the evolution of the underlying assets and reported to the Bank's senior management. The Special Activities Reserve is a dedicated reserve for the capital allocation covering the unexpected loss of those activities which have a risk profile higher than what is generally accepted by the Bank, including venture capital activities undertaken by the EIF on the Bank’s behalf. It is calculated monthly according to the evolution of the underlying assets. U.1.1.2. The Bank’s financial risk tolerance As a public institution, the Bank does not aim to make profits from speculative exposures to financial risks, setting its financial risk tolerance to a minimum level as defined by approved limits, and applying a conservative financial framework. As a consequence, the Bank does not consider its treasury or funding activities as profit-maximising centres, even though performance objectives are attached to those activities. Investment activities are conducted within the primary objective of protection of the capital invested. With respect to exposures arising from the Bank’s lending and borrowing operations, the main principle of the Bank’s financial risk policy is therefore to ensure that all material financial risks are hedged. All new types of transactions introducing operational or financial risks must be authorised by the Management Committee, after the approval of the New Products Committee, and are managed within approved limits. U.1.1.3. Sustainability of revenue and self-financing capacity The Bank’s ALM policy forms an integral part of the Bank’s overall financial risk management. It reflects the expectations of the main stakeholders of the Bank in terms of stability of earnings, preservation of the economic value of own funds, and the self-financing of the Bank’s growth in the long term. To achieve these aims, the ALM policy employs medium to long term indexation for the investment of own funds to promote stability of revenues and enhance overall returns. This indexation policy implies an exposure to medium to long term yields and is not influenced by any short term views on trends in interest rates. This is accomplished by targeting a duration for the Bank’s own funds of between 4.5 and 5.5 years.

U.1.2. Risk Management Organisation of the Fund (EIF) Most of the Private Equity (PE), Venture Capital and Portfolio Guarantees, Securitisation & Microfinance (GSM) operations for both entities of the Group are managed by the Fund. The mandate of the Fund is to support small and mid-size enterprise (SME) finance for start-up, growth and development within European Union objectives for SME. The Fund aligns its risk management systems to changing economic conditions and evolving regulatory standards. It therefore adapts them on an on-going basis as best market practices develop. Credit, market and operational systems are in place to control and report on the main risks inherent to its operations. Risk management is embedded in the corporate culture of EIF, based on a three-lines-of-defence model permeating all areas of EIF’s business functions and processes: (i) front office, (ii) independent risk functions and (iii) audit and assurance. Investment and Risk Committees (IRCs) chaired by the Head of Risk and Portfolio Management advise the Chief Executive and the Deputy Chief Executive on each and every transaction. IRCs also oversee risk and investment-related aspects of the EIF portfolio, inter alia: approving transaction rating/grading, impairment and provisioning actions, relevant market risk events and potential stress testing. Finally, the IRCs oversee the Enterprise Risk arising from EIF’s role as a fund manager. Risk and Portfolio Management actions form part of the assurance process presided by the EIF Audit Board. Moreover, within the EIB Group context, the Fund’s Risk and Portfolio Management Department operates in close contact with the Bank’s Risk Management Directorate, particularly with regard to Group risk exposure relating to guarantee and securitisation operations, the PE operations under the Bank’s Risk Capital Resources mandate (RCR) and general EIF policy matters. The Fund’s treasury management has been outsourced to the Bank under a treasury management agreement signed by both parties and mandating the responsible EIB services to perform selection, execution, settlement and monitoring of transactions. Management follows treasury guidelines annexed to the agreement, which mirror closely the relevant sections of the EIB’s own treasury guidelines. U.1.2.1. Risk assessment private equity Under its private equity operations, the Fund has a fund-of-funds approach, taking minority equity participations in venture capital, private equity and mezzanine funds managed by mostly independent teams in order to leverage further commitments from a wide range of investors. The Fund’s PE operations include investments in funds focussed on seed- and early-stage capital, but also investment in well-established funds targeting mid-, later-stage and mezzanine investments, which, generally speaking, have a lower risk profile. Over the last years, the Fund has developed a tool-set to design, manage and monitor portfolios of PE funds tailored to the dynamics of this market place, going beyond investing in top quartile funds. This tool-set is based on an internal model, the Grading-based Economic Model (GEM), which allows the Fund to better assess and verify each funds’ but also each portfolio of funds’ valuations, risks and expected future cash flows and performances. Before committing to a PE fund, the Fund assigns a grading which is based on the outcome of an extensive due diligence performed by the Fund’s transaction team and reviewed by its risk management team. During the funds’ lifetimes, gradings are periodically reviewed with a frequency and intensity depending on the level of risk.

110

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

These efforts, supported by the development of a proprietary IT system and an integrated software (front to back), improve the investment decision-making process and the management of the portfolio’s financial risks and of liquidity, in particular enabling forward-looking and stresstest based decision making. U.1.2.2. Risk assessment guarantees The Fund extends portfolio guarantees to financial intermediaries involved in SME financing and provides credit enhancement to SME securitisation transactions. By taking on these risks, it facilitates access to funding, and, in turn, it helps to finance SMEs. For its guarantee & securitisation business, over the last years, the Fund has developed a tool-set to analyse portfolio guarantees and structured finance transactions in line with best market practices. Before the Fund enters legally into a guarantee transaction, an internal rating is assigned to each new own risk guarantee transaction in accordance with the Fund’s Credit Risk Policy and Model Review Guidelines. The rating is based on internal models, which analyse and summarise the transaction’s credit quality (expected loss concept), considering not only quantitative parameters but also qualitative aspects. Guarantee transactions are monitored regularly, at least quarterly; their statuses are regularly reviewed by EIF IRCs which, depending on their performances, may review their internal ratings. A four-eye principle applies throughout the process, with actions initiated by the front office and reviewed by Risk Management. The guarantees portfolio is valued according to a mark-to -model approach. The main impact on the valuation of the transactions in the portfolio stems from the assigned rating and the possible subsequent rating changes. The EIF’s monitoring follows potential negative rating migration and provides the basis for appropriate management of transactions.The Fund’s stress testing methodology is applied at the outset of a transaction and throughout the life of the portfolio, i.e. its scenario analysis with regard to portfolio downgrades and defaults in the portfolio and related impacts on capital allocation and expected losses, as well as on the profit and loss. As is the case for PE, stress tests on the guarantee portfolio are presented regularly to the EIF Board of Directors. Moreover, within the EIB Group context, the Fund’s Risk and Portfolio Management Department operates in close contact with the European Investment Bank’s Risk Management Directorate, particularly with regard to Group risk exposure relating to guarantee and securitisation operations, the PE operations under the Bank’s Risk Capital Resources mandate (RCR), the different windows under the Bank’s EIB Group Risk Enhancement Mandate (EREM) and general EIF policy matters.

U.2.

Credit risk

Credit risk concerns mainly the Group’s lending activities and, to a lesser extent, treasury instruments such as fixed-income securities held in the investment and operational portfolios, certificates of deposit and interbank term deposits as well as the derivative transactions of the Group and the Fund’s guarantee transactions funded by own resources. No credit risk is attached to the Group’s venture capital operations, which are performed entirely through equity participations and are, hence, only exposed to market risk. As regards lending, treasury and derivatives operations, credit risk is managed by an independent Risk Management Directorate under the direct responsibility of the Management Committee of the Bank. The Group has thus established an operationally independent structure for determining and monitoring credit risk. The credit risk associated with the use of derivatives is analysed in the ‘Derivatives’ section (Note V). The Group's policies on credit risk are approved by the respective governing bodies. They set out minimum credit quality levels for both borrowers and guarantors in lending operations and identify the types of security that are deemed acceptable. They also detail the minimum requirements which loan contracts must meet in terms of key legal clauses and other contractual stipulations to ensure that the Bank's position ranks at least equal to that of other senior lenders, with prompt access to security when required. In addition, via a counterparty and sector limit system, the credit policies ensure an acceptable degree of diversification in the Group's loan portfolio. The Group's limit system draws its inspiration from the traditional prudential regulations on concentration and large exposure management contained in the EU banking directives, though the Group generally adopts a more restrictive approach to risk-taking than commercial banks. They Group’s policies on credit risk also set out the minimum credit quality of counterparties of derivatives and treasury transactions as well as the contractual framework for each type of transaction. Following the capital increase in 2012, the Bank expanded its Credit Risk Policy Guidelines by a dedicated chapter on the remedy of noncompliance events with bank intermediaries, and a dedicated chapter for incremental new lending in connection with the additional capital. The Fund manages exposures and risks in the frame of conservative policies deriving from statutory provisions and Credit Risk Policy Guidelines approved by the Fund’s Board of Directors or guidelines as set out under mandates. Credit policies undergo periodic adaptations to incorporate evolving operational circumstances and respond to new mandates that the Group may receive from its shareholders. Management of credit risk is based, firstly, on the level of credit risk vis-à-vis counterparties and, secondly, on an analysis of the solvency of counterparties.

U.2.1.

Loans

In order to limit the credit risk on its loan portfolio, the Group lends only to counterparties with demonstrated long term creditworthiness and with sound guarantees. In order to measure and manage credit risk on loans, the Group has graded its lending operations according to generally accepted criteria, based on the quality of the borrower, the guarantee and, where appropriate, the guarantor.

2014 Financial Report

111

The structure of borrowers and guarantors relating to the loan portfolio as at 31 December 2014 is analysed below, including undisbursed portions. Loans outside the European Union (apart from those under the Facilities(*)) are, in the last resort, secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States (loans in the ACP Countries and the OCT). The agreements decided by the Council of the European Union on 14 April 1997 (Decision 97/256/EC) introduced the concept of risk sharing whereby certain Group loans are secured by third-party guarantees with respect to the commercial risk, the budgetary guarantee applying in the case of political risks solely arising from currency non-transferability, expropriation, war and civil disturbance. (*)

Loans granted under Article 16 (previously Article 18) of the Bank’s Statute and loans granted under the Pre Accession Facility, the Mediterranean Partnership Facility, the Energy Sustainability Facility and the EFTA Facility. These loans, granted under the Facilities, are not secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States. Therefore, lending under the Facilities is from the Group’s own resources and at the Group’s own risk. The table below shows (in EUR million) the loans for projects inside and outside the European Union granted under the Facilities and under the risk-sharing operations:

Guarantor Borrower States Public institutions Banks Corporates Total 2014(1)(2)(3)(4)(5) Total 2013(1)(2)(3)(4)(5) (1)

(2) (3) (4) (5)

States

Public institutions

Banks

Corporates

Not guaranteed (1)

0 26,565 33,529 21,961 82,055 73,023

0 16,186 33,115 9,503 58,804 61,457

0 617 35,330 26,838 62,785 64,883

0 2,655 28,088 42,740 73,483 76,600

46,299 68,497 23,326 79,212 217,334 196,870

Total 2014

Total 2013

46,299 114,520 153,388 180,254 494,461

43,971 106,188 149,445 173,229 472,833

These amounts include loans for which no formal guarantee independent from the borrower and the loan itself was required, the borrower’s level of solvency itself representing adequate security. In the event of certain occurrences, appropriate contractual clauses ensure the Bank’s right to access independent security. The loans in risk-sharing operations amount to EUR 7,209 million as of 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 6,817 million). This amount includes loans granted under Facilities. This amount does not include loan substitutes (2014: EUR 16,510 million; 2013: EUR 13,179 million). These amounts exclude loans to current European Union Member States but granted before their accession to the European Union and guaranteed by the European Union budget or the Member States.

The Group did not record value adjustments in 2013 and 2014 in respect of its EU sovereign and sovereign guaranteed exposure as at the year end as the preferred creditor status of the Bank as well as of the EIF and the protection given by the Bank’s Statute are deemed to guarantee a full recovery of the Group’s assets on maturity. The table below discloses information regarding the sovereign credit risk on loans granted inside and outside the European Union granted under the Facilities and under the risk-sharing operations:

The table below shows (in EUR million) the loans for projects outside the European Union (apart from Article 16 Facility and those falling under the Pre Accession Facility, the Mediterranean Partnership Facility, the Energy Sustainability Facility and the EFTA Facility):

Secured by: Member States European Union budget(1) Total(2) (1) (2)

31.12.2014 2,641 42,714 45,355

31.12.2013 2,486 39,800 42,286

of which EUR 7,209 million in risk-sharing operations as explained above (2013: EUR 6,817 million). including loans to current European Union Member States but granted before their accession to the European Union and guaranteed by the European Union budget or the Member States.

2014 Financial Report

113

LOANS FOR PROJECTS OUTSIDE THE EUROPEAN UNION (in EUR million) (including loans in the new Member States before accession) BREAKDOWN OF LOANS OUTSTANDING BY GUARANTEE AGREEMENT

Collateral on loans (in EUR million) Among other credit mitigant instruments, the Bank uses pledges of financial securities. These pledges are formalised through a Pledge Agreement, enforceable in the relevant jurisdiction. The portfolio of collateral received in pledge contracts amounts to EUR 33,755 million (2013: EUR 33,902 million), with the following composition:

As at 31 December 2014

Loan Financial Collateral (in EUR million)(1) Bonds

Moody's or equivalent rating

Government

Supranational

Agency

Secured Bonds (covered bonds)

Bank and Corporate Bonds

ABS

Equities & Funds

Cash

Total

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 Below A1 Non-Rated Total

366 1,402 355 15,023 0 17,146

105 30 0 0 0 135

0 190 0 944 0 1,134

7 29 764 1,417 0 2,217

1,556 1,483 428 7,124 0 10,591

0 0 0 113 0 113

0 0 0 0 358 358

0 0 0 0 2,061 2,061

2,034 3,134 1,547 24,621 2,419 33,755

As at 31 December 2013

Loan Financial Collateral (in EUR million)(1) Bonds

Moody's or equivalent rating

Government

Supranational

Agency

Secured Bonds (covered bonds)

Bank and Corporate Bonds

ABS

Equities & Funds

Cash

Total

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 Below A1 Non-Rated Total

560 1,429 415 10,836 0 13,240

113 136 0 0 0 249

7 32 0 837 0 876

547 635 0 2,892 0 4,074

1,262 1,424 524 8,831 0 12,041

0 91 0 84 0 175

0 0 0 0 654 654

0 0 0 0 2,593 2,593

2,489 3,747 939 23,480 3,247 33,902

(1)

Bonds, equities and funds are valued at their market value (including haircuts).

A breakdown of disbursed loans outstanding including loan substitutes (in EUR million) at 31 December according to the sectors in which borrowers are engaged is set out below:

A global loan is a line of credit to an intermediary financing institution or a bank which then on-lends the proceeds, at its own risk, to finance small and medium-sized projects being undertaken by private or public sector promoters.

Arrears on loans Amounts in arrears are identified, monitored and reported according to the procedures defined into the bank-wide “Financial Monitoring Guidelines and Procedures”. These procedures are adopted for all loans managed by the EIB. Loans not secured by global guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States: As of 31 December 2014, the arrears above 90 days on loans on own resources not secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States amount to EUR 87.3 million (2013: EUR 80.6 million). The outstanding principal amount related to these arrears is EUR 327.1 million as of 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 77.4 million). These arrears on loans are covered by a value adjustment of EUR 267.8 million (2013: EUR 78.2 million).

2014 Financial Report

115

Loans secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States: Loans for projects located outside the European Union and carried out on the basis of mandates are guaranteed by the European Union, the Member States or on a risk-sharing basis. For such loans, if an instalment remains unpaid, the primary guarantee is first called, where available, otherwise the guarantee of the Member States or of the European Union is officially invoked. According to the guarantee agreements, each unpaid instalment is called individually. As of 31 December 2014, these arrears above 90 days amount to EUR 10 million (2013: EUR 9.7 million). Loans called under guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States: During 2014 EUR 58.7 million have been called under the guarantee of the European Union budget and nothing under the Member States guarantee. Corresponding amounts in 2013 were EUR 63.3 million and EUR 0.7 million respectively. The table below gives an overview of the arrears above 90 days on loans:

Loans not secured by EU or Member State guarantees Amount in arrears (EUR'000) Related principal outstanding (EUR'000) Loans secured by EU or Member State guarantees (callable) Amount in arrears (EUR'000) Related principal outstanding (EUR'000) Loans called under the EU or Member State guarantees Amount called (during the year) (EUR'000) Cumulative amount called and not refunded as at year end (EUR'000) 1

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

87,253 327,081

80,6031 77,413

9,999 175,156

9,662 175,156

58,707 270,892

63,968 205,395

The amount in arrears is higher than the related principal outstanding since it includes accrued interest, penalties and fees.

Loan renegotiation and forbearance The Group considers loans to be forborne if in response to adverse changes in the financial position of a borrower the Group renegotiates the original terms of the contractual arrangements with this borrower affecting directly the future cash flows of the financial instrument, which may result in a loss to the Group. However, the financial impact of restructuring activities is in general limited to value adjustment losses, if any, as financial neutrality is generally applied by the Group and reflected in the renegotiated pricing conditions of the operations restructured. In the normal course of business, the Loan Grading (LG) of the loans in question would have deteriorated and the loan would have been included in the Watch List before renegotiation. Once renegotiated, the Group will continue to closely monitor these loans. If the renegotiated payment terms will not recover the original carrying amount of the asset, the Group will consider to account for value adjustments in the profit and loss account. The corresponding value adjustment will be calculated based on the forecasted cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate. The need for a value adjustment for all loans whose LG deteriorated to E- is assessed regularly; all loans with a LG of F require a value adjustment. Once the Loan Grading of a loan has improved sufficiently, it will be removed from the Watch List in line with the procedures of the Group. Forbearance measures and practices undertaken by the Group’s restructuring team during the reporting period includes extension of maturity, deferral of capital only, deferral of capital and interest and capitalisation of arrears. Such forbearance measures do not lead to the derecognition of the underlying operation. Exposures subject to changes in contractual terms which do not affect future cash flows, such as collateral or other security arrangements or the waiver of contractual rights under covenants, are not considered as forborne and hence those events are not considered as sufficient to indicate the requirement of a value adjustment on their own. Operations subject to forbearance measures are considered by the Group as forborne until their final maturity and are reported as such in the table below.

(in EUR million) Operations subject to forbearance practices Carrying values of which being subject to value adjustments Value adjustments recognised Interest income in respect of forborne operations Exposures written off (following the termination/sale of the operation)

Decreases are explained by repayments of capital occured during the year on operations already considered as forborne as of 31 December 2013 and by termination during the year.

U.2.2.

Treasury

The credit risk associated with treasury (securities, commercial paper, term accounts, etc.) is managed through selecting sound counterparties and issuers. Limits governing the structure of the securities portfolio and outstanding treasury instruments have been laid down by the Management. These limits are reviewed regularly by the Risk Management Directorate. The table below provides a percentage breakdown of the credit risk associated with the securities in the Treasury portfolios and the money markets products (deposits and repos) in terms of the credit rating of counterparties and issuers:

Collateral on Treasury transactions Collateral received The Treasury transactions include EUR 25,415 million (2013: EUR 39,318 million) of tripartite reverse repurchase agreements. These transactions are governed by Tripartite Agreements, for which the exposure is fully collateralised, with daily margin calls. The market value of the collateral portfolio at 31 December 2014 is EUR 26,289 million (2013: EUR 40,965 million), with the following classification:

Tripartite Agreements Collateral (in EUR million) Bonds

At 31 December 2014 Moody's or equivalent Government rating

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 Below A1 Total

792 662 527 9,576 11,557

Agency

Secured Bonds (covered bonds)

355 420 0 0 775

0 0 0 0 0

6,417 263 484 10 7,174

Bank and Corporate Bonds 851 1,215 1,301 3,215 6,582

ABS

201 0 0 0 201

Total

8,616 2,560 2,312 12,801 26,289

Tripartite Agreements Collateral (in EUR million) Bonds

At 31 December 2013 Moody's or equivalent Government rating

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 Below A1 Total

Supra-national

3,122 3,357 647 13,232 20,358

Supra-national

Agency

Secured Bonds (covered bonds)

665 1,103 0 0 1,768

0 0 0 0 0

7,524 210 176 41 7,951

Bank and Corporate Bonds 1,958 2,794 999 4,987 10,738

ABS

150 0 0 0 150

Total

13,419 7,464 1,822 18,260 40,965

Securities deposited In the context of the Eurosystem’s monetary policy operations, the EIB deposited securities with the Central Bank of Luxembourg with a market value of EUR 3.3 billion as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 3.3 billion).

U.2.3.

Guarantees granted by the Group in respect of loans granted by third parties

Credit risk arising from the Group’s guarantees and securitisations transactions funded by own resources is managed by risk management policies covered by the Statute and the Credit Risk Policy Guidelines. The Statute limits own-risk guarantees to approximately EUR 9.0 billion. The EUR 5.5 billion exposure at risk at the end of 2014 (2013: EUR 5.1 billion) was well below the statutory limit of EUR 9.0 billion.

2014 Financial Report

117

The Credit Risk Policy Guidelines ensure that the Group continues to develop a diversified guarantee portfolio in terms of product range, geographic coverage, counterparty exposure, obligor exposure, industry concentration and also set out the capital allocation rules based on the ratings of the exposures. Concentration risk is limited because of the granular nature of the Group’s transactions; typically the underlying portfolios are highly diversified in terms of single obligor concentration, sectors, and also with regard to regional diversification. To cover concentration risk, the Group has strict limits (based on capital allocation) for individual transactions and on originator level (maximum aggregate exposures for originators and originator groups). In the context of the Group’s own risk guarantee operations, the credit risk is tracked from the very beginning on a deal-by-deal basis whilst adopting a different model analysis approach depending on the granularity and homogeneity of the underlying portfolios. The industry sector exposures are analysed on a deal-by-deal basis through their impact on the ratings assigned by the Group to each transaction or tranche. For instance, dependent on the financial model to analyse the transaction, industry exposures can be reflected in implicit correlation or can be indirectly captured through the assumption on default rate volatility, as a key model input variable. Furthermore, concentration exposures are analysed in the context of each deal using qualitative measures such as current status and forecast for sectors with high concentrations in the portfolio. Exceptionally, some deals have a concentrated exposure in the same (broad) sector. This is typically captured through increased credit enhancement (e.g. subordination) to the benefit of the Group. Typically, deals with replenishing features have portfolio criteria, such as maximum single obligor, maximum top five obligors, and maximum industry concentration levels. Furthermore, the consideration of sector exposures is part of the Group’s overall portfolio analysis. Counterparty risk is mitigated by the quality of the Group’s counterparties which are usually major market players. The Group performs additional on-site monitoring visits to ensure compliance with procedures and processes during the transaction life. Stress-test scenarios for the portfolio of guarantees, including extreme case assumptions, are regularly carried out to determine the ability of the capital base to sustain adverse shocks.

Interest rate risk

U.3.

Interest rate risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Group’s positions due to adverse movements in market yields or the term structure of interest rates. Exposure to interest rate risk occurs when there are differences in repricing and maturity characteristics of the different asset, liability and hedge instruments. In measuring and managing interest rate risk, the Group refers to the relevant key principles of the Basel Committee for Banking Supervision (BCBS). The main sources of interest rate risk are: repricing risk, yield curve risk, basis risk and spread risk. An interest rate risk that is particularly relevant for the Group is spread risk. Spread risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Group’s positions due to movements in the funding or lending spread of the Group. The Group manages its global structural interest rate position on the basis of a notional reference portfolio. The majority of the financial risk indicators and controls in use by the Group apply to this portfolio. Financial indicators and controls for the rest of the activities outside this portfolio only relate to the risks, which are not transferred to it via the transfer pricing system, and which therefore remain with their respective activities, such as the equity risk in the venture capital activity or the interest rate or credit risks taken in those treasury portfolios predominantly managed for yield-enhancement purposes.

U.3.1. Value-at-Risk for the own funds of the Group The Group’s ALM strategy aims at maintaining a balanced and sustainable revenue profile as well as limiting the volatility of the economic value of the Group. A clear preference has been given to the revenue profile in light of the objective of self-financing of the Group’s growth. This overall objective is achieved by investing the Group's own funds according to a medium to long term investment profile, implying an own funds duration target of 4.5 – 5.5 years. Apart from the duration target for own funds, the Group’s balance sheet should be match-funded with respect to currency and interest rate characteristics. However, small deviations are authorised for operational reasons. The net residual positions that arise from outstanding operations are managed within pre-set limits to constrain market risk to minimum levels. The Risk Management department quantifies the Value at Risk (‘VaR’) of own funds for both interest rates and foreign exchange risk factors. It is measured on the Group’s positions using a 99% confidence level and a one-day time horizon. As at 31 December 2014, the VaR of the Group amounted to EUR 185 million (2013: EUR 204 million). The evolution of the VaR of own funds since 2013 reflects the effective decrease of the volatility of the risk factors and not a change in the risk profile of the Group’s positions. The computation is based on the so-called Riskmetrics methodology, which assumes a linear dependency between the changes in portfolio or position values and the underlying risk factors. Given the nature of the positions held, the Group deems this assumption appropriate to measure its exposure to interest rate risk. Volatility and correlation data are computed internally on the basis of historical market data. More generally, the VaR does not purport to measure the worst loss that could be experienced. For this reason, it is complemented by regular stress testing. As of 31 December 2014, the impact of a 200 basis point upward parallel shift of the interest rate curves would reduce the economic value of own funds by EUR 7.76 billion (2013: EUR 6.52 billion). Among the financial instruments in the Group’s portfolio, some deals (borrowings and associated swaps) present callability options and may be redeemed early, introducing uncertainty as to their final maturity.

118

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

At cash flows level all such borrowings are fully hedged by swaps so that they can be considered synthetic floating rate notes indexed to Euribor/Libor. Below is a summary of the features of the Group’s callable portfolio as of 31 December 2014 and 31 December 2013, where the total nominal amount, the average natural maturity and the average expected maturity (both weighted by the nominal amount of the concerned transactions) are shown per funding currency and per main risk factor involved: By funding currency (after swap): 31.12.2014 (in EUR million) EUR Pay Notional Average maturity date Average expected maturity

U.3.2. Interest rate risk management for the Group The sensitivity of the earnings quantifies the amount of net interest income that would change during the forthcoming 12 months if all interest rate curves rose by one percentage point or decreased by one percentage point. Such exposure stems from the mismatch between interest rate repricing periods, volumes and rates of assets and liabilities that the Group accepts within the approved limits. With the positions in place as of 31 December 2014, the earnings would increase by EUR 73.2 million (2013: EUR 152.5 million) if interest rates increased by 100 basis points and decrease by EUR 83.1 million (2013: EUR 129.3 million) if interest rates decreased by 100 basis points. The Group computes the sensitivity measure with dedicated software that simulates earnings on a deal by deal basis. The sensitivity of the earnings is measured on an accruals basis and is calculated under the ‘’ongoing’’ assumption that, over the time horizon analysed, the Group realises the new loan business forecast in the Corporate Operational Plan, maintains exposures within approved limits and executes monetary trades to refinance funding shortages or invest cash excesses. Earnings are simulated on monthly time steps, assuming that all the fixed rate items carry their contractual rate and that all floating rate items are subject to interest rate repricing according to the interest rate scenario applied in the simulation. The monetary trades to refinance funding shortages or invest cash excesses carry rates equal to the money market rates prevailing according to the interest rate scenario applied in the simulation. In line with the current practice of the Group, the model uses the hypothesis that simulated earnings are not distributed to the shareholders, but are used to refinance the Group’s business. The administrative costs are projected according to the forecasts of the Corporate Operational Plan. The sensitivity of the EIF is computed by taking into consideration the coupon repricing of all the positions present in the EIF treasury portfolio managed by the Group on a deal by deal basis. Each fixed rate asset is assumed to be reinvested at maturity in a new asset with the same residual life of the previous one as of end of year’s date. Positions in floating rate assets are assumed to have quarterly repricing.

U.4.

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk refers to the ability of the Group to fund increases in assets and meet obligations as they come due, without incurring unacceptable losses. It can be further split into funding liquidity risk and market liquidity risk. Funding liquidity risk is connected to the risk for the Group to be unable to refinance the asset side of its balance sheet and to meet payment obligations punctually and in full out of readily available liquid resources. Funding liquidity risk may have an impact on the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from Group’s positions, due to potentially increasing immediate risks to meet payment obligations and the consequent need to borrow at unattractive conditions.

2014 Financial Report

119

Market liquidity risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Group’s positions due to potential inability to execute a transaction to offset, eliminate or reduce outstanding positions at reasonable market prices. Such an inability may force early liquidation of assets at unattractive prices when it would be better to avoid such liquidation. This risk is tied to the size of the position compared to the liquidity of the instrument being transacted, as well as to potential deterioration of market availability and efficiency. Liquidity risk management of the Bank Liquidity risk is managed in order to ensure the regular functioning of the Bank’s core activities at reasonable cost. The main objective of liquidity policy is to ensure that the Bank can always meet its payment obligations punctually and in full. In contrast to commercial banks, the EIB does not have retail deposits but relies on its access to capital markets to raise the funds it on-lends to its clients. The Bank manages the calendar of its new issues so as to maintain a prudential liquidity buffer. Liquidity planning takes into account the Bank’s needs to service its debt, disbursements on loans and cash flows from the loan portfolio. It also takes into account the sizeable amount of signed but un-disbursed loans, whose disbursements typically take place at the borrowers’ request. The Bank further assures management of liquidity risk by maintaining a sufficient level of short term liquid assets, and by spreading the maturity dates of its placements according to the forecasts of liquidity needs. Liquidity risk policy also incorporates a floor on treasury levels. The Bank's total liquidity ratio (defined as a target percentage of annual projected net cash flows) must at all times exceed 25% of the average forecast net annual cash flows for the following year. The Bank has in place a Contingency Liquidity Plan (CLP), which specifies appropriate decision making procedures and corresponding responsibilities. The CLP has been benchmarked against the “Principles for Sound Liquidity Risk Management and Supervision” by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (September 2008). The CLP is subject to ad-hoc updates and is presented to the Management Committee annually for approval. Regular stress-testing analyses tailored to the specific business model of the EIB are executed as a part of the liquidity risk monitoring and drive the size of the Bank’s liquidity buffer. On 8 July 2009, the Bank became an eligible counterparty in the Eurosystem’s monetary policy operations, and therefore has been given access to the monetary policy operations of the European Central Bank. The Bank conducts the operations via the Central Bank of Luxembourg, where the Bank maintains deposits to cover the minimum reserve requirement. Liquidity risk management of the Fund Liquidity risk is managed in such a way as to protect the value of the paid–in capital, ensure an adequate level of liquidity to meet possible guarantee calls, private equity commitments and administrative expenditure and earn a reasonable return on assets invested with due regard to minimisation of risk. Liquidity risk measurement The table hereafter analyses the assets and liabilities of the Group by maturity on the basis of the period remaining between the balance sheet date and the contractual maturity date. Assets and liabilities for which there is no contractual maturity date are classified under "Maturity undefined".

Some of the borrowings and associated swaps include early termination triggers or call options granted to the investors or the hedging swap counterparties and the Bank as well has the right to call the related bonds before maturity. If the Group were to exercise all the call options on its bonds at their next contractual exercise date, cumulated early redemptions for the period 2015 - 2017 would amount to EUR 2.678 billion. Liquidity risk (in EUR million)

The FX risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Group’s positions due to adverse movements of FX rates. The Group is exposed to FX risk whenever there is a currency mismatch between its assets and liabilities. FX risk also comprises the effect of unexpected and unfavourable changes in the value of future cash flows caused by currency movements, such as the impact of FX rate changes on the Group’s future lending intermediation revenue. The sources of foreign exchange rate risk are to be found in the margins on operations and in general expenses incurred in non-euro currencies. The Group’s objective is to eliminate exchange risk by reducing net positions per currency through operations on the international foreign exchange markets. A foreign exchange hedging programme exists in order to protect the known loan margins in USD and in GBP for the next 3 years on a rolling basis. Foreign exchange position (in EUR million)

The management of operational risk is performed at all levels within the organisation and is a responsibility of all the various departments of the Group. The Risk Management Directorate is responsible for defining the operational risk framework and related policies while the responsibility for implementing the framework as well as day-to-day operational risk management lies with the Group’s operational departments. The Group employs an assessment methodology that takes into account all available information including loss history, results of risk selfassessment and the business and control environment through a set of Key Risk Indicators (KRIs) organised in an Operational Risk Scorecard. A statistical model and a Value at Risk calculation engine complete the operational risk environment. Information concerning operational risk events, losses and KRIs, and updates on the activities of the New Products Committee, are regularly forwarded to the Group’s senior management and to the Management Committee.

2014 Financial Report

123

Note V – Derivatives The Group uses derivative instruments mainly as part of its asset and liability management activities to manage exposures to interest rate and foreign currency risks, including exposures arising from forecast transactions. Derivatives are contractual financial instruments, the value of which fluctuates according to trends in the underlying assets, interest rates, exchange rates or indices. The majority of the Group’s swaps are concluded with a view to hedging specific bond issues, as part of its resource-raising operations (funding activity). The Group also enters into swaps as part of its hedging operations on loans, treasury, or for the global Assets and Liabilities Management (ALM) position (ALM hedging activity). The Group also enters into short-term currency swap contracts in order to adjust currency positions in its operational treasury in relation to its benchmark currency, the euro, and to cater for demand for currencies in conjunction with loan disbursements. Future contracts (futures) are used in the context of the treasury activities, to hedge the exposure deriving from some investments in government bonds. Futures are standardised derivatives, negotiated on regulated markets, and they do not fall within the general policy for counterparty risk measurement and control (see note V.2.).

V.1.

As part of funding and ALM hedging activity

The Group uses long term derivatives mainly as part of its funding strategy in order to bring the characteristics of the funds raised, in terms of currencies and interest rates, into line with those of loans granted and also to reduce funding costs. Long-term derivatives transactions are not used for trading, but only in connection with fund-raising and for the reduction of market risk exposure. All swaps linked to the borrowing portfolio have maturities matching the corresponding borrowings and are therefore of a long-term nature. The derivatives used in the context of funding and ALM hedging activities are: • Currency swaps; • Interest rate swaps; and • Structured swaps.

V.1.1.

Currency swaps

Currency swaps are contracts under which it is agreed to convert funds raised in one currency into another currency and, simultaneously, a forward exchange contract is concluded to re-exchange the two currencies in the future in order to be able to repay the funds raised on the due dates. The Group enters into currency swaps, in which, at inception, the proceeds of a borrowing are converted into a different currency, mainly as part of its resource-raising operations, and, thereafter, the Group will obtain the amounts needed to service the borrowing in the original currency. The following table shows the maturities of currency swaps (excluding short-term currency swaps – see Note V.2.), sub-divided according to their notional amount and fair value. The notional amounts are disclosed off balance sheet.

More than More than 5 years and 1 year or less 1 year and up to 5 years up to 10 years

29,824 230

103,690 7,098

86,573 -1,274

30,223 261

Including the fair value of macro-hedging currency swaps which stood at EUR 308 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 144 million).

Interest rate swaps

V.1.2.

Interest rate swaps are contracts under which, generally, it is agreed to exchange floating-rate interest for fixed-rate interest or vice versa. Interest rate swaps enable the Group to modify the interest rate structure of its borrowing portfolio and other portfolios in order to accommodate requests from its clients and also to reduce funding costs by exchanging its advantageous access conditions to certain capital markets with its counterparties.

124

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

The following table shows the maturities of interest rate swaps (including synthetic swaps, whereby interest computed in a foreign currency is synthetically converted to EUR), sub-divided according to their notional amount and fair value. The notional amounts are disclosed off balance sheet.

Interest rate swaps at 31 December 2014 (in EUR million)

Notional amount Fair value (i.e. net discounted value)(*)

More than More than 1 year or less 1 year and up 5 years and to 5 years up to 10 years

More than 10 years

Total 2014

113,106 8,067

136,244 5,012

472,520 17,862

More than More than 1 year or less 1 year and up 5 years and to 5 years up to 10 years

More than 10 years

Total 2013

134,339 2,458

444,567 11,081

57,723 662

Interest rate swaps at 31 December 2013 (in EUR million)

Notional amount Fair value (i.e. net discounted value)(*)

50,279 938

165,447 4,121

169,740 4,359

90,209 3,326

(*)

Including the fair value of macro-hedging interest rate swaps which stood at EUR -585 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR -362 million).

V.1.3.

Structured swaps

The Group does not generally enter into any options contracts in conjunction with its risk hedging policy. However, as part of its strategy of raising funds on the financial markets at a lesser cost, the Group enters into borrowing contracts and loans encompassing notably interest rate or stock exchange index options. Such structured borrowings and loans are entirely covered by swap contracts to hedge the corresponding market risk. The table below further details the number, value and notional amounts of structured swaps: Early termination embedded

The fair value of swap transactions is computed using the income approach, applying valuation techniques to convert future amounts to a single present amount (discounted). The estimate of fair value is based on the value indicated by marketplace expectations about those future amounts. Valuation techniques can range from simple discounted known cash flows to complex option models. The valuation models applied are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing financial instruments, and incorporate the factors that market participants consider when setting a price. For a portion of derivative transactions, internal estimates and assumptions might be used in the valuation techniques when the market inputs are not directly available. All option contracts embedded in, or linked with, borrowings are negotiated over the counter. The structured deals include a variety of transactions dependent on interest rates, FX rates, inflation rates, stock indexes and IR volatilities.

V.1.4.

Derivatives credit risk mitigation policy

The credit risk with respect to derivatives lies in the loss which the Group would incur where the counterparty would be unable to honour its contractual obligations. In view of the special nature and complexity of the derivatives transactions, a series of procedures has been put in place to safeguard the Group against losses arising from the use of such instruments. • Contractual framework: All of the Group’s derivative transactions are concluded in the contractual framework of ISDA Swap Agreements and Credit Support Annexes, which specify the conditions of exposure collateralisation. These are generally accepted and practised contract types. • Counterparty selection: The minimum rating at the outset is set at A3. The EIB has the right of early termination if the rating drops below a certain level.

2014 Financial Report

125

• Collateralisation: − Exposures (exceeding limited thresholds) are collateralised by cash and bonds. − Complex and illiquid transactions could require collateralisation over and above the current market value. − Both the derivatives portfolio with individual counterparties and the collateral received are regularly monitored and valued, with a subsequent call for additional collateral or release. The market value of collateral received for swaps amounts to EUR 36,051 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 17,651 million), with the following composition:

Swap collateral (in EUR million) Bonds Moody's or equivalent rating

Government

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 to A3 Baa1 to Baa3 Below Baa3 Non-Rated Total 2014

4,398 5,894 970 11,705 1,351 0 24,318

Agency, supranational, covered bonds 4,252 609 0 0 0 0 4,861

Cash

Total 2014

0 0 0 0 0 6,872 6,872

8,650 6,503 970 11,705 1,351 6,872 36,051

Cash

Total 2013

0 0 0 0 0 3,677 3,677

3,062 1,789 36 7,376 1,711 3,677 17,651

Swap collateral (in EUR million) Bonds Moody's or equivalent rating

Government

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 to A3 Baa1 to Baa3 Below Baa3 Non-Rated Total 2013

1,671 1,780 36 7,376 1,711 0 12,574

Agency, supranational, covered bonds 1,391 9 0 0 0 0 1,400

• Credit risk measurement for derivatives: The credit risk associated with derivatives varies according to a number of factors (such as interest and exchange rates) and generally corresponds to only a small portion of their notional value. The Bank measures the credit risk exposure related to swaps and derivatives transactions using the Current Unsecured Exposure and Total (Current and Potential) Unsecured Exposure for reporting and limit monitoring, and the Credit Risk Equivalent for capital allocation according to the recommendations of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) sponsored by the BIS. The Group computes the Current Unsecured Exposure, which is the larger of zero and the market value of the portfolio of transactions within the netting set with a counterparty, less the value of collateral received. It is the amount that would be lost upon the default of the counterparty, using the received collateral and assuming no recovery on the value of those transactions in bankruptcy as well as immediate replacement of the swap counterparty for all the transactions. As of 31 December 2014 the Current Unsecured Exposure stood at EUR 3,586 million (EUR 807 million as of 31 December 2013). In addition, the Group computes the Total Unsecured Exposure, which takes into account the possible increase in the netting set’s exposure over the margin period of risk, which ranges between 10 and 20 days, depending on the portfolio of transactions. The EIB computes the Total Unsecured Exposure at 90% confidence level using stressed market parameters to arrive at conservative estimates. This is in line with the recommendations issued by regulators in order to take into consideration the conditions that will prevail in case of default of an important market participant. As of 31 December 2014 the Total Unsecured Exposure stood at EUR 16,352 million (EUR 11,933 million as of 31 December 2013). • Limits: The limit system for banks covers both exposure, Current Unsecured Exposure and Total Unsecured Exposure. The Current Unsecured Exposure is limited by the Threshold applicable to the counterparty as defined in the Credit Support Annex and is dependent on the rating of the counterparty. For any exposure exceeding this Threshold, the EIB receives collateral posted by the counterparty. The Total Unsecured Exposure limit determines the maximum Total Unsecured Exposure accepted for each counterparty. The derivatives portfolio is valued and compared against limits on a daily basis.

126

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

The following table provides a breakdown of counterparties by rating. Grouped ratings Moody’s or equivalent rating Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 A2 to A3 Below A3 Non-rated Total

The Group also enters into short-term currency swap contracts in order to adjust currency positions in its operational treasury portfolios in relation to its benchmark currency, the euro, and to cater for demand for currencies in conjunction with loan disbursements. The notional amount of short-term currency swaps stood at EUR 42,902 million at 31 December 2014 against EUR 12,748 million at 31 December 2013. The notional amount of short term currency forwards was EUR 404 million at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 372 million). The fair value of these contracts was EUR 1,141 million at 31 December 2014 for currency swaps and EUR -38 million for currency forwards (2013: respectively EUR -77 million and EUR 4 million).

Note W – Conversion rates The following conversion rates were used for establishing the balance sheets at 31 December 2014 and 2013:

Note X – Related party transactions – Key Management Personnel The Group has identified members of the Board of Directors, the Audit Committee, the Management Committee, the Directors General heading the different EIB organisational directorates as key management personnel. Key management personnel compensation for the relevant reporting periods, included within General administrative expenses (Note R), is disclosed in the following table: 2014 7,881 660 600 9,141

(1) Short-term employee benefits comprise salaries and allowances, bonuses and social security contributions of the Management Committee, the Directors General and other Directors, and benefits paid to the members of the Board of Directors and the Audit Committee. (2) Post employment benefits comprise pensions and expenses for post employment health insurance paid to members of the Management Committee and Directors General and other Directors.

Open balances with key management personnel as at 31 December 2014 comprise the compulsory and optional supplementary pension plan and health insurance scheme liabilities, and payments outstanding as at the year end: (in EUR ’000) Pension plans and health insurance (Note L) Other liabilities (Note G)

31.12.2014 -29,810 -12,181

31.12.2013 -26,804 -12,217

Note Y – Post balance sheet events There have been no material events after the balance sheet date that would require adjustment of, or disclosure in, the Financial Statements as at 31 December 2014.

128

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

Note Z – Management of third party funds

Z.1.

Investment Facility – Cotonou

The Investment Facility, which is managed by the EIB, has been established within the framework of the Cotonou Agreement on cooperation and development of the African, Caribbean and Pacific Group of States and the European Union and its Member States on 23 June 2000 and subsequently revised. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Investment Facility.

Z.2.

Guarantee Fund

The Guarantee Fund for External Actions was set up in 1994 to cover defaults on loans and loan guarantees granted to non-Member States or for projects in non-Member States. The European Commission (‘EC’) entrusted financial management of the Guarantee Fund to the EIB under an agreement signed between the two parties in November 1994. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Guarantee Fund.

Z.3.

NER300

The EIB supports the EC as an agent in the implementation of the NER 300 initiative - a funding programme for carbon capture and storage demonstration projects and innovative renewable energy technologies. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for NER300.

Z.4.

JESSICA (Contribution and Holding Funds)

JESSICA (The Joint European Support for Sustainable Investment in City Area) is an initiative developed by the EC and the EIB, in collaboration with the Council of Europe Development Bank. Under new procedures, Managing Authorities are being given the option of using some of their EU grant funding to make repayable investments in projects forming part of an integrated plan for sustainable urban development. These investments are delivered to projects via Urban Development Funds or if required Holding Funds (JESSICA Holding Funds). JESSICA Holding Funds are used in the context of the JESSICA initiative. As Manager, EIB gathers the funding received from the Managing Authorities and invests it in Urban Development Funds, according to investment guidelines agreed with the donors. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for JESSICA.

Z.5.

Risk-Sharing Finance Facility (‘RSFF’)

The RSFF has been established within the framework of the Co-operation Agreement, entered into force on 5 June 2007 between the EC on behalf of the European Union and the EIB. The RSFF aims at fostering investment in research, technological development and demonstration, and innovation. As part of the RSFF, the EIF set up the Risk Sharing Instrument for Innovative and Research oriented SMEs and small MidCaps (‘RSI’). The RSI provides guarantees to banks and leasing companies for loans and financial leases to research-based small and mediumsized enterprises (SMEs) and small Mid-Caps. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the RSFF.

Z.6.

EU-Africa Infrastructure Trust Fund (the ‘Trust Fund’)

The Trust Fund has been created within the framework of the Trust Fund Agreement between the EC on behalf of the European Union as the Founding Donor and the EIB as Manager, also open to Member States of the European Union which subsequently accede to this agreement as Donors. On 9 February 2006, the EC and the EIB Group signed a Memorandum of Understanding to promote jointly the EU-Africa Infrastructure Partnership and, in particular, to establish a supporting EU-Africa Infrastructure Trust Fund. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Trust Fund.

Z.7.

Special Section

The Special Section was set up by the Board of Governors on 27 May 1963. Under a decision taken on 4 August 1977, its purpose was redefined as being that of recording financing operations carried out by the EIB for the account of and under mandate from third parties. It includes the FED, MED/FEMIP, IPA (Instrument for Pre-Accession) and Turkey mandates.

Z.8.

InnovFin (incl. InnovFin SME Guarantee)

The InnovFin or “InnovFin-EU Finance for Innovators” is a joint initiative between the EIB, the EIF and the European Commission under the new EU research programme for 2014-2020 “Horizon 2020”. On 11 December 2013, Regulation (EU) N 1291/2013 of the European Parliament and the Council establishing Horizon 2020 – the Framework Programme for Research and Innovation (2014-2020) and repealing Decision N 1982/2006/EC (“Horizon 2020 Regulation”) was adopted. On 12 June 2014 the European Commission, the EIB and the EIF signed a Delegation Agreement establishing the financial instrument InnovFin. InnovFin consists of a series of integrated and complementary financing tools and advisory services offered by the EIB Group, covering the entire value chain of research and innovation (R&I) in order to support investments from the smallest to the largest enterprise. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the InnovFin.

2014 Financial Report

129

Z.9.

JEREMIE

JEREMIE (The Joint European Resources for Micro to Medium Enterprises) is an initiative of the European Commission’s Directorate General for Regional Policy (DG Regio) and the EIB Group.

Z.10.

GF Greece

The Fund is a joint initiative between the Hellenic Republic, the EC and the EIB and was set up to support the lending to SMEs in Greece. Established by using unabsorbed Structural Funds for Greece, the Fund will guarantee EIB loans to SMEs via partner banks in Greece.

Z.11.

Loan Guarantee Instrument for Ten-T Projects (’LGTT’)

The LGTT has been established within the framework of the Co-operation Agreement, entered into force on 11 January 2008 between the EC on behalf of the European Union and the EIB. The LGTT aims at facilitating a greater private sector involvement in the financing of Trans-European transport networks infrastructure. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the LGTT.

Z.12.

European Neighbourhood and Partnership Instrument (‘ENPI’)

The Framework Agreement between the European Union and the EIB on the implementation of operations financed from the general budget of the European Union in the countries covered by the European Neighbourhood Policy is channelled through the ENPI. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for ENPI.

Z.13.

SMEG 2007

In the SMEG 2007 under the Competitiveness and Innovation Framework Programme (CIP/SMEG 2007), the EIF is empowered to issue guarantees in its own name but on behalf and at the risk of the Commission.

Z.14.

Project Bond Initiative (‘PBI’)

A Cooperation Agreement between the EC and the EIB in respect of the Project Bond Instrument: Pilot Phase was signed in November 2012. The PBI is designed to stimulate capital market financing for infrastructure delivered under ‘project finance’ structures, including Public Private Partnerships (PPPs). The initiative will seek to enhance the credit rating of bonds issued by project companies to a rating level that is attractive for investors and to lower the project’s overall financing costs.

Z.15.

AECID

This partnership agreement signed between the Kingdom of Spain (the Spanish Agency for International Development Cooperation (AECID) and the EIB was set up to invest in operations in the countries covered by the FEMIP together with Mauritania (the "Southern Mediterranean region"), targeting mainly risk capital activities for micro and small/medium enterprises as well as engaging in the wider development of the private sector in the region.

Z.16.

GIF 2007

In the GIF 2007 under the Competitiveness and Innovation Framework Programme and the Technology Transfer Pilot Project (CIP/GIF 2007), the EIF is empowered to acquire, manage and dispose of investments, in its own name but on behalf and at the risk of the Commission.

Z.17.

COSME LGF & EFG

The Programme of COSME EFG provides the establishment of the Equity Facility for Growth and the establishment of the Loan Guarantee Facility. The financial instruments aim to improve access to finance for small and medium-sized enterprises in the form of debt and equity exclusively. In that context, an Equity For Growth has been structured in the form of an equity financial instrument supporting Union enterprises growth and Research Innovation. The Programme of COSME LGF provides the establishment of the Loan Guarantee Facility. The financial instrument aim to improve access to finance for small and medium-sized enterprises in the form of debt and equity exclusively. The Loan Guarantee Facility has been structured in the form of a direct and indirect guarantee financial instrument. The objective of LGF is to contribute to the reduction of the structural shortcoming of the SME financing market and to support the creation of a more diversified SME finance market. Through direct and indirect guarantee, LGF aims to guarantee debt financing which addresses the particular difficulties that viable SMEs face in accessing finance. Furthermore, by guaranteeing the mezzanine tranche of eligible and transparent securitisation transactions, LGF aims to provide new avenues of financing for SMEs.

130

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

Z.18.

InnovFin SME Guarantee

In the context of the “Access to Risk Finance Programme” of Horizon 2020 and specific programme provides for the establishment of a financial instrument for debt and a financial instrument for equity. A Risk-Sharing facility called InnovFin SME Guarantee has been structured in the form of a guarantee, using the EU’s contribution for first defaulted amount taking and the risk-taking capacity of the EIF for second-Defaulted Amount taking. The objective of the Facility is to incentivise Intermediaries to extend loans or financial leases to small and medium sized enterprises and Small Mid-caps with significant activities in Research, Development and Innovation.

Z.19.

Neighbourhood Investment Facility (‘NIF’) Trust Fund

The NIF Trust Fund managed by the EIB was set up to achieve the strategic objective of the European Neighbourhood Partnership Instrument through targeted funding aimed at strengthening infrastructure interconnection between the EU and its neighbours in the areas of Transport and Energy, at addressing common environmental concerns and at supporting other relevant activities. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the NIF Trust Fund.

Z.20.

SME Guarantee Facility

The EIF is empowered to issue guarantees in its own name but on behalf and at the risk of the European Union according to the Fiduciary and Management Agreement concluded with the European Union.

Z.21.

Greater Anatolia Guarantee Facility (‘GAGF’)

Under the GAGF signed in May 2010, the EIF manages the Instrument for Pre-Accession Assistance (IPA) funds allocated for the Regional Competitiveness Operational Programme by the European Union and Turkey. The facility provides tailor-made financial help to SMEs and microenterprises in Turkey’s least developed provinces in partnership with major Turkish banks.

Z.22.

WB EDIF

The Western Balkan Enterprise Development & Innovation Facility (“WB EDIF”) is a joint initiative signed in December 2012 by the EC (DG ELARG), EIB Group and the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD). It aims at improving access to finance for SMEs in the Western Balkans and to foster economic development in the region through the deployment of the Instrument for Pre-Accession Assistance (IPA) funds. Within WB EDIF, EIF acts as platform coordinator, Trustee on behalf of the EC for the Enterprise Expansion Fund (ENEF), Trustee on behalf of the EC for the Enterprise Innovation Fund (ENIF), and manager of the Guarantee Facility.

Z.23.

MAP Equity

Under the Multi-Annual Programme (MAP) for enterprises and entrepreneurship, the EIF manages resources on behalf and at the risk of the EC.

Z.24.

Heavily Indebted Poor Countries (‘HIPC’) Initiative

The HIPC Initiative (the ’Initiative’) is an international debt relief mechanism that provides special assistance to the world's poorest countries. It was launched in 1996 following a proposal from the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund. The principal objective of the Initiative is to reduce the debt burden of poor countries to sustainable levels. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Initiative.

Z.25.

RSI

In the context of the Risk Sharing Finance Facility (RSFF), a joint initiative of the EC (DG Research & Innovation) and the EIB, EIF has been managing the Risk Sharing Instrument (RSI Facility) since December 2011. The aim of the RSI Facility is to create a pilot guarantee scheme for the benefit of innovative and research oriented SMEs and mid-caps.

Z.26.

FEMIP Trust Fund

The FEMIP (Facility for Euro-Mediterranean Investment and Partnership) Trust Fund, which is also managed by the EIB, was set up to enhance the existing activities of the EIB in the Mediterranean Partner Countries, with the support of a number of donor countries and with a view of directing resources to operations in certain priority sectors through the provision of technical assistance and risk capital. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the FEMIP Trust Fund.

Z.27.

MAP Guarantee

This resource is split equally between private equity and guarantee products. The equity segment known as ESU 1998 (G&E) and ESU 2001 (MAP) covers the ETF start-up investments. The guarantees segment known as SMEG 1998 (G&E) and SMEG 2001 (MAP), provides guarantees against the beneficiary’s undertaking.

2014 Financial Report

131

Z.28.

EPTA Trust Fund

EPTA (The Eastern Partnership Technical Assistance) Trust Fund is focused on increasing the quality and development impact of EIB Eastern Partnership operations by offering a multi-purpose, multi-sector funding facility for technical assistance. It will be complementary to the Neighbourhood Investment Facility. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for EPTA Trust Fund.

Z.29.

G43 Trust Fund

Under G43 Anatolian Venture Capital Fund, signed in August 2012, the EIF is entrusted with a mandate by Central Finance Unit of Turkey (CFCU). It is dedicated to make investments in SMEs in South-Eastern Anatolia region of Turkey.

Z.30.

European Progress Microfinance Facility (‘EPMF’)

The EPMF aims to increase access to finance for individuals who have difficulties entering the labour market and to promote the start-up and growth of micro-enterprises with a particular view to providing jobs for the unemployed or the disadvantaged.

Z.31.

European Technology Facility (‘ETF’)

Under the ETF Start-Up Facility, the EIF is empowered to acquire, manage and dispose of ETF start-up investments, in its own name but on behalf of and at the risk of the EC.

Z.32.

Private Finance for Energy Efficiency Instrument

The Private Finance for Energy Efficiency (PF4EE) instrument is a joint agreement between the EIB and the European Commission with aims to address the limited access to adequate and affordable commercial financing for energy efficiency investments. The instrument targets projects which support the implementation of National Energy Efficiency Action Plans or other energy efficiency programmes of EU Member States. In December 2014 the European Commission and the EIB signed a Delegation Agreement establishing the financial Instrument PF4EE.

Z.33.

RDI Advisory

RDI Advisory was set up in partnership with the European Commission under a 7 year framework agreement signed in June 2014, as part of the InnovFin programme under Horizon 2020. It has two main lines of activity: (i) upstream project related advisory and (ii) horizontal activities destined to improve the overall framework conditions for RDI investments as well as the financing tools under Horizon 2020.

Z.34.

Fi Compass Advisory Platform

The fi-compass advisory platform provides EU Member States and their managing authorities as well as microcredit providers with advisory support and learning opportunities for developing financial instruments, within the scope of European Structural Investment Funds (ESIF) and the Programme for Employment and Social Innovation (EaSI). It is implemented by the EIB and funded by the EC under a Framework Contract for the period 2014-2020.

Z.35.

BIF

The Baltic Innovation Fund (“BIF”), signed in September 2012, is a fund-of-funds, structured as a partnership, which invests in venture capital and private equity funds and focused on the Baltic region. It is funded jointly by the EIB Group and the following Baltic national agencies: Fund KredEx in Estonia, Latvijas Garantiju Agentiira in Latvia and lnvesticiju ir verslo garantijosin Lithuania.

Z.36.

PGFF

The Polish Growth Fund-of-Funds (“PGFF”), signed in April 2013, is a fund-of-funds, structured as a partnership, which invests in venture capital and private equity funds and focused on Poland. It is funded jointly by the EIB Group and the Bank Gospodarstwa Krajowego.

Z.37.

GEEREF (Fund and Technical Support Facility)

GEEREF (Global Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Fund) is a fund of funds set-up at the initiative of the EC. Its objective is to make investments in private equity funds that focus on the fields of renewable energy and energy efficiency in emerging markets (ACP, ALA and European Neighbour countries). The EIF also holds a technical assistance mandate for which related activities are implemented by the GEEREF front office.

132

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

Z.38.

Bundesministerium für Wirtschaft und Technologie

The EIF manages funds on behalf of the German Bundesministerium für Wirtschaft und Technologie (Federal Ministry of Economics and Technology) and the European Recovery Programme.

Z.39.

Technology Transfer Pilot Project (‘TTP’)

Under the TTP, financed by the EC and signed in November 2008, the EIF has supported a technology transfer structure through pre-seed funding and seed funding.

Z.40.

JASPERS

JASPERS (The Joint Assistance to Support Projects in European Regions) is a major joint policy initiative of the EIB, EC (Regional Policy Directorate-General - DG Regio) and the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development. It provides advice to the 12 Central and Eastern EU Member States and Croatia during project preparation to help improve the quality of the major projects to be submitted for grant financing under the Structural and Cohesion Funds.

Z.41.

European Parliament Preparatory Action (‘EPPA’)

In 2010, the EIF signed the EPPA with DG REGIO. The EIF is providing risk capital and financial support for capacity building purposes in order to help a select number of microfinance institutions to reach a meaningful size and improve their prospects for sustainability.

Z.42.

Mezzanine Dachfonds fur Deutschland (‘MDD’)

The MDD in an investment programme signed in June 2013 and funded by the German Federal Ministry of Economics and Technology (BMWi) and various institutions of the Federal states to subscribe into hybrid debt and equity funds investing in German MidCaps.

Z.43.

LfA-EIF Facility

LfA-EIF Facility, signed in 2009, is a joint EIF and LfA Förderbank Bayern venture providing investments to support technology-oriented early and expansion stage companies in the region of Bavaria, Germany.

Z.44.

GEEREF

Under the Global Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Fund (GEEREF), EIF has been acting since December 2007 as investment advisor. GEEREF is supported by the EC, the Federal Government of Germany and the Kingdom of Norway and its objective is to invest primarily in regional funds with assets in projects and companies involved in energy efficiency and renewable energy enhancing access to clean energy in developing countries and economies in transition. The GEEREF business development is formally delegated to the EIB under a sub-advisory agreement.

Z.45.

Green for Growth Fund (‘GGF’)

The Green for Growth Fund was set up by the EIF in December 2009 and focuses on energy efficiency financings in South East Europe including Turkey.

Z.46.

FP7 Guarantee Fund

The 7th Framework Programme (‘FP7’) is designed to support research, technological development and demonstration projects all over Europe. The rules and principles for the management of the FP7 are laid out in the Agreement between the EC on behalf of the European Atomic Energy Community and the EIB. The EC entrusted financial management of the FP7 Guarantee Fund to the EIB under an agreement signed between the two parties in December 2007. The EIB prepared separate financial statements for FP7 Guarantee Fund until 2013 and the FP7 Guarantee Fund was transferred back to the European Commission in 2014.

Z.47.

ECHA

On 1 April 2011 the EIB entered into an asset management agreement with the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA). Under this agreement the EIB manages the investment portfolio of ECHA in accordance with the pre-agreed Asset Management Guidelines.

2014 Financial Report

133

Statement of Special Section(1) as at 31 December 2014 and 2013 (in EUR ‘000) ASSETS Turkey From resources of Member States Disbursed loans outstanding Total(2) Instrument for Pre-Accession ('IPA') From resources of Member States Disbursed loans outstanding Total(3) Mediterranean Countries From resources of the European Union Disbursed loans outstanding Risk capital operations - amounts to be disbursed - amounts disbursed Total(4) African, Caribbean and Pacific State and Overseas Countries and Territories From resources of the European Union · Yaoundé Conventions Loans disbursed Contributions to the formation of risk capital - amounts disbursed Total(5) · Lomé Conventions Operations from risk capital resources - amounts to be disbursed - amounts disbursed Total(6) Total LIABILITIES Funds under trust management Under mandate from the European Union - Financial Protocols with the Mediterranean Countries - Financial Protocols with the instrument for Pre-Accession ('IPA') - Yaoundé Conventions - Lomé Conventions - Other resources under the Lomé Conventions Under mandate from Member States Total funds under trust management Funds to be disbursed On loans and risk capital operations in the Mediterranean countries On operations from risk capital resources under the Lomé Conventions Total funds to be disbursed Total

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

3,595 3,595

4,914 4,914

21,883 21,883

20,933 20,933

72,725

84,145

42,732 76,323 119,055 191,780

49,244 106,105 155,349 239,494

2,430

3,584

419 2,849

419 4,003

2,084 315,117 317,201 317,201 537,308

2,099 399,543 401,642 401,642 670,986

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

149,048 21,883 2,849 315,117 0 488,897 3,595 492,492

190,250 20,933 4,003 399,543 0 614,729 4,914 619,643

42,732 2,084 44,816 537,308

49,244 2,099 51,343 670,986

For information: Total amounts disbursed and not yet repaid on loans on special conditions made available by the Commission in respect of which the Bank has accepted an EU mandate for recovering principal and interest: a) Under the First, Second and Third Lomé Conventions as at 31 December 2014 EUR ‘000 369,925 (2013: EUR ‘000 393,482) b) Under Financial Protocols signed with the Mediterranean Countries as at 31 December 2014 EUR ‘000 72,908 (2013: EUR ‘000 79,121) In the context of the European Union – European Development Finance Institutions Private Sector Development Facility, the implementation agreement for the Guarantee Component was signed on 20 August 2014. Total amount of the EU guarantee to be issued is EUR ‘000 43,200 as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR nil). Note (1): The Special Section was set up by the Board of Governors on 27 May 1963. Under a decision taken on 4 August 1977, its purpose was redefined as being that of recording financing operations carried out by the European Investment Bank for the account of and under mandate from third parties. However, for the Investment Facility under the Cotonou Agreement, the EU-Africa Infrastructure Trust Fund, the Neighbourhood Investment Facility (NIF) Trust Fund and the FEMIP Trust Fund, separate financial statements are presented. In addition, since 2005, the EIB also prepares financial statements of different types for other mandates.

134

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU directives

The Statement of Special Section reflects amounts disbursed or to be disbursed, less cancellations and repayments, under mandate from the European Union and the Member States. Amounts disbursed and to be disbursed and funds received and to be received are carried at nominal value. No account is taken in the Statement of Special Section of provisions or value adjustments, which may be required to cover risks associated with such operations except for definite write-offs. Amounts in foreign currency are translated at exchange rates prevailing on 31 December. Note (2): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in Turkey under mandate, for the account and at the risk of Member States.

Initial amount: add: less:

exchange adjustments cancellations repayments

405,899 20,514 215 422,603 -422,818 3,595

Note (3): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects under the Instrument for Pre-Accession, for the account and at the risk of the European Union.

Initial amount: less:

29,640 exchange adjustments cancellations repayments

7,757 0 0 -7,757 21,883

Note (4): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in the Maghreb and Mashreq countries, Malta, Cyprus, Turkey and Greece (EUR 10 million lent prior to accession to the EC on 1 January 1981) under mandate, for the account and at the risk of the European Union.

Initial amount: less:

840,457 exchange adjustments cancellations repayments

51,048 130,445 467,184 -648,677 191,780

Note (5): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in the Associated African States, Madagascar and Mauritius and the Overseas Countries, Territories and Departments (AASMM-OCTD) under mandate, for the account and at the risk of the European Union.

Loans on special conditions Contributions to the formation of risk capital Initial amount: add:

139,483 2,503 141,986 capitalised interest exchange adjustments

1,178 9,823 11,001

less:

cancellations repayments

3,310 146,828 -150,138 2,849

Note (6): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in the African, Caribbean and Pacific States and the Overseas Countries and Territories (ACP-OCT) under mandate, for the account and at the risk of the European Union:

Independent Auditor’s Report To the Chairman of the Audit Committee of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK 98-100, Boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 LUXEMBOURG

REPORT OF THE REVISEUR D’ENTREPRISES AGREE We have audited the accompanying consolidated financial statements of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK, which comprise the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 December 2014, the consolidated profit and loss account and the consolidated cash flow statement for the year then ended, and a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information. Management’s responsibility for the consolidated financial statements The Management is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these consolidated financial statements in accordance with the general principles of the Directive 86/635/EEC of the Council of the European Communities of 8 December 1986 on the annual accounts and consolidated accounts of banks and other financial institutions, as amended by Directive 2001/65/EC of 27 September 2001, by Directive 2003/51/EC of 18 June 2003 and by Directive 2006/46/EC of 14 June 2006 (the ‘Directives’), and for such internal control as the Management determines is necessary to enable the preparation of consolidated financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

ble assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free from material misstatement. An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. The procedures selected depend on the judgement of the Réviseur d’Entreprises agréé, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the Réviseur d’Entreprises agréé considers internal control relevant to the entity’s preparation and fair presentation of the consolidated financial statements in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity’s internal control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the Management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.

Responsibility of the Réviseur d’Entreprises agréé Opinion Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing as adopted for Luxembourg by the Commission de Surveillance du Secteur Financier. Those standards require that we comply with ethical requirements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasona-

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements give a true and fair view of the consolidated financial position of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK as of 31 December 2014, and of the consolidated results of its operations and its consolidated cash flows for the year then ended in accordance with the general principles of the Directives.

KPMG Luxembourg, Société coopérative Cabinet de révision agréé

E. DOLLÉ

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under EU Directives

Statement by The Audit Committee The Audit Committee reports to the Board of Governors, the following statement being communicated to the Governors prior to their approval of the Annual Report and the financial statements for the past financial year.

-

met regularly the Head of Internal Audit and discussed the relevant internal audit reports, and studied the documents which it deemed necessary to examine in the discharge of its duties,

Statement by the Audit Committee on the EIB’s consolidated financial statements prepared in accordance with the general principles of the EU Directives

-

received assurance from the Management Committee concerning the effectiveness of the internal control structure and internal administration,

The Committee, instituted in pursuance of Article 12 of the Statute and Chapter V of the Rules of Procedure of the European Investment Bank for the purpose of verifying that the operations of the Bank are conducted and its books kept in a proper manner, having

and considering -

the consolidated financial statements for the financial year ended 31 December 2014 as drawn up by the Board of Directors at its meeting on 12 March 2015;

noted that the opinion of KPMG on the consolidated financial statements of the European Investment Bank, prepared in accordance with the general principles of the EU Directives, for the year ended 31 December 2014 is unqualified,

-

convened on a regular basis with the Heads of Directorates and relevant services including, •

the Financial Controller,

•

the Directors General of Risk Management and Transaction Monitoring and Restructuring,

to the best of its knowledge and judgement: confirms that the consolidated financial statements, comprising the consolidated balance sheet, the consolidated profit and loss account and the consolidated cash flow statement and a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information give a true and fair view of the consolidated financial position of the Bank as at 31 December 2014 in respect of its assets and liabilities, and of the consolidated results of its operations and its consolidated cash flows for the year then ended, in accordance with the general principles of the EU Directives.

Luxembourg, 12 March 2015 The Audit Committee

M. MATEJ

M. ÜÜRIKE

B. JAKOBSEN

J.N. SCHAUS

D. PITTA FERRAZ

J. SUTHERLAND

2014

Financial Report

137

138

Financial Report 2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS as at 31 December 2014

10. Profit for the financial year (Note K) Total equity Total liabilities and equity

21,699,135 22,828,922 14,309 1,148,190 6,090,520 3,663,165

36,137,031

33,745,106

675,413 58,511,579 608,799,344

2,917,704 58,361,945 546,900,644

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

2014 Financial Report

141

Consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 December 2014 (in EUR ‘000)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Interest and similar income (Note L) Interest expense and similar charges (Note L) Income from shares and other variable-yield securities Fee and commission income (Note O) Fee and commission expense Result on financial operations (Note M) Other operating income (Note N) Change in impairment on loans and advances and provisions for guarantees, net of reversals (Notes D.2, D.4) Change in impairment on shares and other variable-yield securities, net of reversals (Note B.3) General administrative expenses (Notes J, P) a) staff costs (Note J) b) other administrative costs

Profit for the financial year Attributable to: Equity holders of the Bank

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

142

Financial Report

2014

-610,047

-24,191 -161 -6,499 -30,536 675,413

-30,851 2,917,704

675,413

2,917,704

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2014 (in EUR ’000)

Profit for the financial year

2014

2013

675,413

2,917,704

-1,042,241

308,424

Other comprehensive income/loss Items that will never be reclassified to profit or loss: Remeasurements of the defined benefit liability Items that are or may be reclassified to profit or loss: Available for sale financial assets – fair value reserve 1. Net unrealised gains and losses on financial assets available for sale 2. Impairment charges transferred to the consolidated income statement Realised gains and losses transferred to the consolidated income 3. statement Total available for sale financial assets Total other comprehensive income/loss Total comprehensive income

516,376 9,020

200,919 14,511

-12,349

Attributable to: Equity holders of the Bank

4,818 513,047 -529,194 146,219

220,248 528,672 3,446,376

146,219

3,446,376

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

2014 Financial Report

143

144

Financial Report

2014 0 0 -221,585,020

0

0 243,284,155

0

0 24,328,415

0

1,499,493

0 0 0

3,415 911,144

3,415

1,935,661

0 -1,042,241 -1,042,241

-15 14,309

0 -15

-2,450,986

2,156,886 0 308,424 308,424

Additional reserves

0 0 6,030,722

0 1,661,237

-59,798

0 0 0

0 6,090,520

0 0

950,134

5,140,386 0 0 0

Special activities reserve

0

0

0 513,047 513,047

0 1,148,190

0 0

0

927,942 0 220,248 220,248

Fair value reserve

0 3,205,513

0

-457,652

0 0 0

0 3,663,165

0 0

686,256

2,976,909 0 0 0

General loan reserve

0 675,413

0

-2,917,704

675,413 0 675,413

0 2,917,704

0 0

-289,318

289,318 2,917,704 0 2,917,704

Profit for the year before appropriation

3,415 58,511,579

3,415

0

675,413 -529,194 146,219

207,851 58,361,945

207,866 -15

0

54,707,718 2,917,704 528,672 3,446,376

Total consolidated equity

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

(*) On 1 July 2013, the subscribed capital increased from EUR 242,392,989,000 to EUR 243,284,154,500 by virtue of the contributions of Croatia, a new Member State that joined on 1 July 2013. The contributions of the new Member State to the Paid-in capital and to the Reserves amount to EUR 79.5 million and EUR 128.4 million respectively. The total amount to be paid by the new Member State has been equally spread over 8 instalments due on 30 November 2013, 30 November 2014, 30 November 2015, 31 May 2016, 30 November 2016, 31 May 2017, 30 November 2017 and 31 May 2018. The instalments up to and including 30 November 2014 were settled in full (see Note W1).

Transactions with owners of the Group Other Total transactions with owners of the Group Balance at 31 December 2014

0

Appropriation of prior year’s profit

0 0 0

128,380 22,828,922

-811,680 -221,585,020

891,166 243,284,155 0 0 0

128,380 0

1,103,914

21,596,628 0 0 0

Reserve Fund

-811,680 0

0

-220,773,340 0 0 0

Callable capital

891,166 0

0

242,392,989 0 0 0

Profit Other comprehensive income Total comprehensive income

Transactions with owners of the Group Contribution of Croatia as of July 2013 (*) Other Total transactions with owners of the Group Balance at 31 December 2013

Appropriation of prior year’s profit

Balance at 1 January 2013 Profit Other comprehensive income Total comprehensive income

A. Cash flows from operating activities: Profit for the financial year Adjustments for: Changes in impairment on loans and advances, net of reversals Change in provisions for pension plans and health insurance scheme Unwinding of discount relating to capital and reserve called, but not paid in Change in provisions for commitment on investment funds and guarantees on venture capital operations Depreciation/amortisation on property, furniture and equipment, investment property and intangible assets Changes in impairment of shares and other variable-yield securities Held to maturity portfolio amortisation and accrued interest Change in fair value of available for sale and trading debt securities Change in fair value of put option Net results on loans under the fair value option and associated swaps Net results on borrowings under the fair value option and associated swaps Change in fair value of other derivatives Interest expense on non-controlling interest Effect of exchange rate changes Profit on operati activities Disbursements of loans and advances to credit institutions and customers Repayments of loans and advances to credit institutions and customers Change in deposits with central banks Net additions to treasury securities liquidity portfolios Net additions to available for sale venture capital operations Net additions to available for sale shares and other variable-yield securities Change in amounts owed to credit institutions and customers Change in interest accrued on cash and cash equivalents Change in prepayments Change in other assets Change in deferred income Change in other liabilities (excluding non-controlling interest) Net cash used in operatin activities B. Cash flows from investing activities: Securities in Long Term Hedge Portfolio purchased during the year Securities from Long Term Hedge Portfolio matured during the year Purchase of loan substitutes included in the debt securities portfolios Redemption of loan substitutes included in the debt securities portfolios Purchase and disposal of property, furniture and equipment, investment property and intangible assets Net cash used in investin activities C. Cash flows from financing activities: Issuance of debts evidenced by certificates Redemption of debts evidenced by certificates Member States contribution Net change in cash related to acquisitions and disposals of share in subsidiary undertakings Dividend paid to non-controlling interest Net cash from financin activities Summary statement of cash flows: Cash and cash equivalents at be inni financial ear Net cash from: Operating activities Investing activities Financing activities Effect of exchange rate changes on cash held Cash and cash equivalents at end of financial ear Cash and cash equivalents are composed of: Cash in hand, balances with central banks and post office banks, excluding deposits with Central Bank of Luxembourg to cover minimum reserve requirement (Note B.1) Treasury bills maturing within three months of issue (Note B.2: A1 portfolio excluding accrued interest) Loans and advances to credit institutions: Repayable on demand Other loans and advances (Note C)

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

2014 Financial Report

145

European Investment Bank Group

Notes to the consolidated financial statements as at 31 December 2014 The European Investment Bank (the ‘Bank’ or ‘EIB’) was created by the Treaty of Rome in 1958 as the long term lending bank of the European Union (‘EU’). The task of the Bank is to contribute towards the integration, balanced development and economic and social cohesion of the EU Member States. The EIB raises substantial volumes of funds on the capital markets and lends these funds on favourable terms to projects furthering EU policy objectives. The EIB continuously adapts its activities to developments in EU policies. The Bank has its registered office at 98-100, boulevard Konrad Adenauer, Luxembourg. The European Investment Fund (the ‘Fund’ or ‘EIF’) was incorporated on 14 June 1994, in Luxembourg, as an international financial institution. The address of its registered office is 37 B avenue J.F. Kennedy, L-2968, Luxembourg. The primary task of the Fund, while providing adequate return on equity, is to contribute to the pursuit of EU objectives through: • the provision of guarantees to financial institutions that cover credits to small and medium sized entities (‘SME’); • the acquisition, holding, managing and disposal of equity participations; • the administration of special resources entrusted by third parties; and • related activities. The Bank holds 63.69% (2013: 62.10%) of the subscribed capital of the EIF. The Bank and the Fund together are defined as the ‘Group’.

Note A – Significant accounting policies A.1.

Basis of preparation

A.1.1.

Statement of compliance

The European Investment Bank consolidated financial statements (the ’Financial Statements’) have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’), as adopted by the European Union. On a proposal from the Management Committee, the Board of Directors adopted the Financial Statements on 12 March 2015 and authorised their submission to the Board of Governors for approval by 28 April 2015.

A.1.2.

Basis of measurement

The Financial Statements have been prepared on an historical cost basis, except for derivative financial instruments, available-for-sale financial assets and assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss that have been measured at fair value. The liability for defined benefit obligation is recognised as the present value of the defined benefit obligation, plus any unrecognised actuarial gains, less any unrecognised past service cost or unrecognised actuarial losses. The Financial Statements are presented in euro rounded to the nearest thousand, unless otherwise indicated.

A.2.

Significant accounting judgements and estimates

In preparing the Financial Statements, the Management Committee is required to make estimates and assumptions that affect reported income, expenses, assets, liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. Use of available information and application of judgement are inherent in the formation of estimates. Actual results in the future could differ from such estimates and the differences may be material to the Financial Statements. The most significant use of judgements and estimates are as follows: Fair value of financial instruments Where the fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities recorded on the balance sheet cannot be derived from active markets, they are determined using a variety of valuation techniques that include the use of mathematical models. The input to these models is taken from observable markets where possible, but where this is not feasible, a degree of judgement is required in establishing fair values. The judgements include considerations of liquidity and model inputs such as correlation and volatility for longer dated derivatives. Impairment losses on loans and advances The Group reviews its loans and advances at each reporting date to assess whether an allowance for impairment should be recorded. In particular, judgement by management is required in the estimation of the amount and timing of future cash flows when determining the level of allowance required. Such estimates are based on assumptions about a number of factors and actual results may differ, resulting in future

146

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

changes to the allowance. In addition to specific allowance against individually significant loans and advances, the Group also makes a collective impairment test on exposures which, although not specifically identified as requiring a specific allowance, have a greater risk of default than when originally granted. Provisions on financial guarantees The Group recognizes a liability at the fair value of the obligation at the inception of a financial guarantee contract. The guarantee is subsequently measured at the higher of the best estimate of the obligation or the amount initially recognized. Financial guarantee provisions correspond to the cost of settling the obligation, which is the expected loss, estimated on the basis of all relevant factors and information existing at the statement of financial position date. Valuation of unquoted equity investments Valuation of unquoted equity investments is normally based on one of the following: • • • •

recent arm’s length market transactions; current fair value of another instrument that is substantially the same; the expected cash flows discounted at current rates applicable for items with similar terms and risk characteristics; or other valuation models.

The determination of the cash flows and discount factors for unquoted equity investments requires significant estimation. The Group calibrates the valuation techniques periodically and tests them for validity using either prices from observable current market transactions in the same instrument or from other available observable market data. Impairment of equity investments The Group treats available-for-sale equity investments as impaired when there has been a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value below its cost or where other objective evidence of impairment exists. The determination of what is “significant" or “prolonged" requires judgement. The Group treats “significant" generally as 30% or more and “prolonged" greater than 24 months. In addition, the Group evaluates other factors, including normal volatility in share price for quoted equities and the future cash flows and the discount factors for unquoted equities. Pension and other post-employment benefits The cost of defined benefit pension plans and other post-employment medical benefits is determined using actuarial valuations. The actuarial valuation involves making assumptions about discount rates, mortality rates and future salary and pension increases. Due to the long term nature of these plans, such estimates are subject to significant uncertainty. Consolidation of entities in which the Group holds interest The Group made significant judgements that none of the entities (except the EIF) in which it holds interest, are controlled by the Group. This is due to the fact that in all such entities, either the General Partner or the Fund Manager or the Management Board have the sole responsibility for the management and control of the activities and affairs of the partnership and have the power and authority to do all things necessary to carry out the purpose and objectives of the partnership complying with the investment and policy guidelines. A.3.

Changes in accounting policies

Except for the changes below, the Group has consistently applied the accounting policies set out in Note A.4. to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements. The Group has adopted the following new standards and amendments to standards.

Standards adopted The following standards, amendments to standards and interpretations were adopted in the preparation of these consolidated financial statements: IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements IFRS 10 replaces the part of IAS 27 ‘Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements’ that deals with consolidated financial statements and SIC 12 ‘Consolidation-Special Purpose Entities’. Under IFRS 10, there is a new definition of control, providing a single basis for consolidation for all entities. This basis is built on the concept of power over the investee, variability of returns from the involvement with the investee and their linkage, thus focusing on legal control or exposure to risks and rewards, depending on the nature of the entity. The adoption of IFRS 10 had no material impact on the consolidation of investments held by the Group nor on the Group’s consolidated financial statements. Therefore no restatements are necessary on application of IFRS 10. IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements IFRS 11 replaces IAS 31 ‘Interests in Joint Ventures’ and SIC-13 ‘Jointly Controlled Entities - Non – monetary Contributions by Ventures’ and establishes principles for financial reporting by entities that have an interest in arrangements that are controlled jointly. Under IFRS 11, there are only two types of joint arrangements, joint operations and joint ventures and their classification is based on the parties’ rights and obligations arising from the arrangement, rather than its legal form. The adoption of this standard had no impact on the Group’s consolidated financial statements. IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities IFRS 12 specifies the disclosures required in annual financial statements to enable users of financial statements to evaluate the nature of and risks associated with the reporting entity’s interests in subsidiaries, associates, joint arrangements and unconsolidated structured entities.

2014 Financial Report

147

The disclosure requirements of IFRS 12 do not require comparative information to be provided for periods prior to initial application. New disclosures are provided in Note B4. IFRS 10, 11 and 12 Amendments - Consolidated Financial Statements, Joint Arrangements and Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities: Transition Guidance The amendments clarify the transition guidance in IFRS 10 and provide additional transition relief in IFRS 10, 11 and 12, requiring adjusted comparative information to be limited only to the preceding comparative period. In addition, for disclosures related to unconsolidated structured entities, the requirement to present comparative information for periods before IFRS 12 is first applied, is removed. The adoption of the amendment had no impact on the Group’s consolidated financial statements. IAS 36, Amendment - Recoverable Amount Disclosures for Non-Financial Assets The amendments restrict the requirement to disclose the recoverable amount of an asset or cash generating unit only to periods in which an impairment loss has been recognized or reversed. They also include detailed disclosure requirements applicable when an asset or cash generating unit’s recoverable amount has been determined on the basis of fair value less costs of disposal and an impairment loss has been recognized or reversed during the period. The adoption of the amendment had no impact on the Group’s consolidated financial statements. IAS 32, Amendments - Offsetting Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities As a result of the amendments to IAS 32, the Group has changed its accounting policy for offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities. The amendments clarify when an entity currently has a legally enforceable right to set-off and when gross settlement is equivalent to net settlement. The adoption of the amendment had no impact on the Group’s consolidated financial statements.

Standards issued but not yet effective The following standards, amendments to standards and interpretations are effective for annual periods beginning after 1 January 2014. The Group has not applied the following new or amended standards in preparing these consolidated financial statements. IFRS 9 Financial instruments The last part of the standard was issued on 24 July 2014 and replaces the existing guidance in IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. IFRS 9 includes revised guidance on the classification and measurement of financial instruments, including a new expected credit loss model for calculating impairment on financial assets, and the new general hedge accounting requirements. It also carries forward the guidance on recognition and derecognition of financial instruments from IAS 39. IFRS 9 is effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018, with early adoption permitted. IFRS 9 has not yet been adopted by the EU. The Group does not plan to adopt this standard early and the impact analysis is currently in progress. IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers IFRS 15 establishes a comprehensive framework for determining whether, how much and when revenue is recognised. It replaces existing revenue recognition guidance, including IAS 18 Revenue, IAS 11 Construction Contracts and IFRIC 13 Customer Loyalty Programmes. IFRS 15 is effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2017, with early adoption permitted. IFRS 15 has not yet been adopted by the EU. The Group has not yet determined the extent of the impact of this standard.

A.4.

Summary of significant accounting policies

A.4.1.

Basis of consolidation

Subsidiaries Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity when it is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns though its power over the entity. The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date of which control commences until the date of which control ceases. The Financial Statements comprise those of the European Investment Bank and those of its subsidiary, the European Investment Fund. The financial statements of the Fund are prepared for the same reporting year as the Bank, using consistent accounting policies. The Bank holds 63.69% (2013: 62.10%) of the subscribed capital of the EIF and therefore has applied the principles pronounced by IFRS 10 in preparing consolidated financial statements. Hence, the Group consolidates the financial statements of the EIB and the EIF line by line by adding together like items of assets, liabilities, equity, income and expenses. After aggregation of the balance sheets and income statements, all intra-group balances, transactions, income and expenses resulting from intragroup transactions are eliminated. Commitment on EIF shares held by third party investors Under the terms of a replacement share purchase undertaking in respect of the 1,511 shares held by EIF’s non-controlling shareholders (2013: 1,137 shares), the EIB is offering to buy these on an annual basis. The exercise price is determined on the basis of the audited annual accounts of EIF and corresponds to the part of each share in the called capital of EIF, increased by the share premium account, the statutory reserves, the fair value reserve, the retained earnings and profit of the year, net of the dividend decided by the EIF’s General Meeting. The commitment to purchase is shown in the consolidated balance sheet as a debt item under “Other liabilities” (see also Note G).

148

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

IFRS 10 requires that the acquisition of non-controlling interest be accounted for as an equity transaction. The carrying amounts of the controlling and non-controlling interests are adjusted to reflect the change in their relative interests in EIF net assets. Any difference between the amount by which the non-controlling interest is adjusted and the fair value of the financial liability is recognised directly in equity under “Other” and attributed to owners of the parent. Any changes in fair value of the financial liability subsequent to the acquisition date are recognised in the income statement under “Interest expense and similar charges”. Interests in associates and joint ventures The Group’s interests in investees comprise interests in associates and joint ventures. Associates are those entities in which the Group has significant influence, but not control or joint control, over the financial and operating policies. A joint venture is an arrangement in which the Group has joint control, whereby the Group has rights to the net assets of the arrangement, rather than the rights to its assets and obligations for its liabilities. The accounting treatment for associates and joint ventures is further explained in Note A.4.7.3. Transactions eliminated on consolidation Intra-group balances and transactions, and any unrealised income and expenses arising from intra-group transactions are eliminated. Unrealised gains arising from transactions with equity-accounted investees are eliminated against the investment to the extent of the Group’s interest in the investee. Unrealised losses are eliminated in the same way as unrealised gains, but only to the extent that there is no evidence of impairment.

A.4.2.

Foreign currency translation

The Financial Statements are presented in euro (EUR), as the functional currency of the Bank and the unit of measure for the capital accounts of the Member States. The Group conducts its operations in euro, in other currencies of the Member States and in non-EU currencies. Its resources are derived from its capital, borrowings and accumulated earnings in various currencies. Foreign currency transactions are translated at the exchange rate prevailing on the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in currencies other than euro are translated into euro at the exchange rate prevailing at the balance sheet date. The gain or loss arising from such translation is recorded in the consolidated income statement. Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange rates at the dates of the initial transactions. Non-monetary items measured at fair value in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange rates at the date when the fair value was determined. Exchange differences on non-monetary financial assets are a component of the change in their fair value. Depending on the classification of a non-monetary financial asset, exchange differences are either recognised in the income statement or within the equity reserves. Exchange differences arising on the settlement of transactions at rates different from those at the date of the transaction and unrealised foreign exchange differences on unsettled foreign currency monetary assets and liabilities are recognised in the consolidated income statement.

A.4.3.

Derivatives

All derivative instruments of the Group are measured at fair value through profit or loss and are reported as derivative assets or liabilities. Fair values are obtained from quoted market prices, discounted cash flow models and option pricing models, which consider current market and contractual prices for the underlying instrument, as well as time value of money, yield curve and volatility of the underlying. The Group uses derivative instruments mainly for hedging market exposure on borrowings and lending transactions, and also as part of its asset and liability management activities to manage exposures to interest rate and foreign currency risk, including exposures arising from forecast transactions. The Group applies the amended Fair Value Option of IAS 39 when balance sheet items together with one or more derivative transactions meet the eligibility criteria of the amended Fair Value Option and a significant reduction of the accounting mismatch is thus obtained. The Group currently does not use any of the hedge accounting possibilities available under IAS 39. Derivatives are recorded at fair value and carried as assets when their fair value is positive and as liabilities when their fair value is negative. Changes in the fair value of derivatives are included in “Result on financial operations”. The majority of the Group’s swaps are concluded with a view to hedging specific bond issues. The Group enters into currency swaps, whereby the proceeds of a borrowing are initially converted into a different currency and on maturity the Bank will obtain the amounts needed to service the borrowing in the original currency. Macro-hedging swaps used as part of asset/liability management are marked to market (fair value) using internal valuation models. Realised and unrealised gains and losses are recognised in “Result on financial operations”. Accrued interest on derivatives is part of the fair value recorded. A derivative may be embedded in a “host contract”. Such combinations are known as hybrid instruments and arise predominantly from the issuance of certain structured debt instruments. If the host contract is not carried at fair value with changes in fair value reported in the consolidated income statement, the embedded derivative is separated from the host contract and accounted for as a stand-alone derivative instrument at fair value if, and only if, the economic characteristics and risks of the embedded derivative are not closely related to the economic characteristics and risks of the host contract and the embedded derivative actually meets the definition of a derivative.

2014 Financial Report

149

A.4.4.

Financial instruments

Derivative financial instruments are initially recognised using the trade date basis. Non-derivative financial instruments are initially recognised using the settlement date basis. Fair value of financial instruments Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date in the principal, or in its absence, the most advantageous market to which the Group has access at that date. The fair value of a liability reflects its non-performance risk. When applicable, the Group measures the fair value of an instrument using the quoted price in an active market for that instrument. A market is regarded as active if transactions for the asset or liability take place with sufficient frequency and volume to provide pricing information on an ongoing basis. Where the fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities recorded on the balance sheet cannot be derived from active markets, they are determined using a variety of valuation techniques that include the use of mathematical models. The input to these models is taken from observable markets where possible, but where this is not feasible, a degree of judgement is required in establishing fair values. The chosen valuation technique incorporates all the factors that market participants would take into account in pricing a transaction. Portfolios of financial assets or financial liabilities that are exposed to market or credit risk that are managed by the Group on the basis of the net exposure to either market or credit risk are measured on the basis of a price that would be received to sell a net long position or paid to transfer a net short position for a particular risk exposure. These portfolio level adjustments are allocated to the individual assets and liabilities on the basis of the relative risk adjustment of each of the individual instrument in the portfolio. The Group measures fair values using the following fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used in making the measurements: • •

•

Level 1: inputs that are unadjusted quoted market prices in active markets for identical instruments to which the Group has access Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices). This category includes instruments valued using quoted market prices in active markets for similar instruments, quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in markets that are considered less than active or other valuation techniques where all significant inputs are directly or indirectly observable from market data. Level 3: inputs that are not observable. This category includes all instruments where the valuation technique includes inputs not based on observable data and the unobservable inputs have a significant effect on the instrument’s valuation. This category includes instruments that are valued based on quoted prices for similar instruments where significant unobservable adjustments or assumptions are required to reflect differences between the instruments.

The Group recognises transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy as of the end of the reporting period during which the change has occurred.

Cash and cash equivalents

A.4.5.

The Group defines cash and cash equivalents as short term, highly liquid securities and interest-earning deposits with maturities of 90 days or less.

A.4.6.

Fee income

The Group earns fee income from a diverse range of services it provides to its customers. Fee income can be divided into two broad categories: • •

income earned from services that are provided over a certain period of time, for which customers are generally billed on an annual or semi-annual basis; and income earned from providing transaction-type services.

Fees earned from services that are provided over a certain period of time are recognised on an accruals basis over the service period. Fees earned from providing transaction-type services are recognised when the service has been completed. Fees or components of fees that are performance linked are recognised when the performance criteria are fulfilled.

Treasury bills and other bills eligible for refinancing with central banks and debt securities including fixed-income securities and shares and other variable-yield securities

A.4.7.

The Group changed its debt securities portfolio structure during 2014, in order to reduce the portfolio complexity and optimise allocation of liquid assets. As a result, three new portfolios were created: Securities liquidity portfolios P1 and P2, classified as held for trading (except for remaining securities of former A2 and B1 portfolio which remain classified as AFS), and Group long term hedge portfolio, classified as held to maturity. Four former portfolios are phased out (Operational bond portfolio A2, B1, B3 and B4 and the Group investment portfolio).

150

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

A.4.7.1.

Held for trading portfolio

The held for trading portfolio (Operational portfolios P1 and P2; formerly Operational portfolios B3 and B4 in Note B.2) comprises listed debt securities issued and guaranteed by financial institutions. The debt securities are owned by the Group. Securities held in this portfolio are marked to market in the consolidated balance sheet, any gain or loss arising from a change in fair value being included in the consolidated income statement in the period in which it arises. Gains and losses realised on disposal or redemption and unrealised gains and losses from changes in the fair value of trading portfolio assets are reported as Net trading income in the account “Result on financial operations”. Interest income on trading portfolio assets is included in “Interest and similar income”. The determination of fair values of trading portfolio assets is based on quoted market prices in active markets or dealer price quotations, pricing models (using assumptions based on market and economic conditions), or management estimates, as applicable.

A.4.7.2.

Held-to-maturity portfolio

The held-to-maturity portfolio comprises of the Group long term hedge portfolio (LTHP), the operational money market portfolio A1 and the Loan substitutes portfolio (see Note B.2). The Group long term hedge portfolio contains securities of the Bank’s LTHP portfolio and the EIF investment portfolio and consists of securities purchased with the intention of holding them to maturity. These securities are issued or guaranteed by: − Governments of the European Union Member States, G10 countries and their agencies; or − Supranational public institutions, including multinational development banks. These securities are initially recorded at fair value plus any directly attributable transaction costs. The difference between entry price and redemption value is amortised in accordance with the effective interest method over the remaining life of the securities. The Operational portfolio A1 of the Group is held for the purpose of maintaining an adequate level of liquidity in the Group and comprises money market products with a maximum maturity of three months, including treasury bills and negotiable debt securities issued by public bodies or credit institutions. The securities are held until their final maturity and presented in the Financial Statements at their amortised cost. The Loan substitutes portfolio mainly consists of obligations in the form of bonds, notes or certificates issued by Special Purpose Vehicles (SPV) or trust vehicles. These securities are classified as held-to-maturity and recorded at amortised cost. The Group assesses at each balance sheet date whether there is any objective evidence that a financial asset or a group of financial assets is impaired. A financial asset or a group of financial assets is deemed to be impaired if, and only if, there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of one or more events that has occurred after the initial recognition of the asset (an incurred “loss event") and that loss event (or events) has an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset or the group of financial assets that can be reliably estimated. Impairment loss is recognised in profit and loss and the amount of the loss is measured as the difference between the carrying value and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the instrument’s original effective interest rate. A.4.7.3.

Available-for-sale portfolio

The available-for-sale portfolio comprises of the remaining securities formerly held in the operational money market portfolio A2 and of the operational bond portfolio B1 (currently SLP portfolio, see Note B.2), of the Unitary Fund and operational portfolio of the Fund and of shares and other variable-yield securities (see Note B.3). Securities are classified as available-for-sale where they do not appropriately belong to one of the other categories of financial instruments recognised under IAS 39, i.e. "held for trading" or "held-to-maturity". The Management Committee determines the appropriate classification of its investments at the time of the constitution of a portfolio. Financial instruments within one portfolio always have the same classification. Available-for-sale financial investments may be sold in response to or in anticipation of needs for liquidity or changes in interest rates, credit quality, foreign exchange rates or equity prices. Available-for-sale financial investments are carried at fair value. They are initially recorded at fair value plus transaction costs. Unrealised gains or losses, excluding foreign currency translation gains and losses, are reported in comprehensive income and accumulated in the fair value reserve until such investment is sold, collected or otherwise disposed of, or until such investment is determined to be impaired. Foreign currency translation gains and losses are reported in the consolidated income statement. If an available-for-sale investment is determined to be impaired, the cumulative unrealised gain or loss previously recognised in the fair value reserve is included in consolidated income statement for the period. A financial investment is considered impaired if its carrying value exceeds the recoverable amount. Quoted financial investments are considered impaired if the decline in market price below cost is of such a magnitude that recovery of the cost value cannot be reasonably expected within the foreseeable future. For non-quoted equity investments, the recoverable amount is determined by applying recognised valuation techniques. Financial assets are derecognised when the right to receive cash flows from the financial assets has expired or where the Group has transferred substantially all risks and rewards of ownership. On disposal of an available-for-sale investment, the accumulated unrealised gain or loss included in the fair value reserve is transferred to consolidated income statement for the period. Gains and losses on disposal are determined using the weighted average cost method. Interest and dividend income on available-for-sale financial investments are included in “Interest and similar income” and “Income from shares and other variable-yield securities”. Interest on available-for-sale debt securities and other fixed income securities is recognised in the income statement using the effective interest method. Dividends on equity investments are recognised in the income statement when the Group’s right to receive payment is established. The determination of fair values of available-for-sale financial investments is based on quoted market rates in active markets, dealer price quotations, discounted expected cash flows using market rates that are commensurate with the credit quality and maturity of the investment or based upon review of the investee’s financial results, condition and prospects including comparisons to similar companies for which quoted market prices are available.

2014 Financial Report

151

Venture capital operations and investment funds held represent medium and long term investments. They are measured at fair value, which is determined by applying the aggregated Net Asset Value (NAV) method. This valuation method implicitly assumes that if the NAVs of underlying funds can be considered as equivalent to the fair value as determined under IAS 39, then the aggregation of the NAVs of all funds will itself be equivalent to the fair value as determined under IAS 39. For specific investments where NAV cannot readily be determined, other guidelines (for example the international private equity and venture capital valuation guidelines, IPEV Guidelines, as published by the EVCA) might be used and more detailed monitoring and review will be required. In accordance with this method, the venture capital funds are internally classified into three categories: • • •

Category I – funds that have adopted the fair value requirements of IAS 39 or IPEV Guidelines for which a specific review is performed to ensure that the NAV is a reliable estimate of fair value. Category II – funds that have adopted other valuation guidelines (such as the former 2001 EVCA) or standards that can be considered as in line with IAS 39, for which a specific review is performed to ensure that the NAV is a reliable estimate of fair value. Category III – funds that have not adopted the fair value requirements of IAS 39 or any other valuation guidelines in line with IAS 39.

The Group assesses at each balance sheet date whether there is any objective evidence that a financial asset or a group of financial assets is impaired. A financial asset or a group of financial assets is deemed to be impaired if, and only if, there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of one or more events that have occurred after the initial recognition of the asset (an incurred “loss event") and that loss event (or events) has an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset or the group of financial assets that can be reliably estimated. In the case of equity investments classified as available-for-sale, this would include a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of the investments below its cost. Where there is evidence of impairment, the cumulative loss measured as the difference between the acquisition cost and the current fair value, less any impairment loss on that financial asset previously recognised in the consolidated income statement, is removed from equity and recognised in the income statement. Impairment losses on equity investments are not reversed through the consolidated income statement; increases in their fair value after impairment are recognised directly in equity. In contrast, if in a subsequent period, the fair value of a debt instrument classified as available-for-sale increases and the increase can be objectively related to an event occurring after the impairment loss was recognised, the impairment loss is reversed through the income statement. The Group complies with conditions to use the private equity and similar entities exemption in IAS 28 and IFRS 11 and does not use equity accounting on, or proportionately consolidate investments in joint ventures, if any. Upon initial recognition, any holdings in joint ventures or associates are designated at fair value through profit or loss, and measured subsequently at fair value in accordance with IAS 39, with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss during the period of the change. Joint ventures are contractual agreements whereby the Group and other parties undertake an economic activity that is subject to joint control. A joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control over an economic activity, and exists only when the strategic financial and operating decisions relating to the activity require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing the control (the venturers). The participations acquired by the Group for its own account or on behalf of its mandate providers typically represent investments in private equity or venture capital funds. According to industry practice, such investments are generally investments jointly subscribed by a number of investors, none of whom is in a position to individually influence the daily operations and the investment activity of such fund. As a consequence, any membership by an investor in a governing body of such fund does not in principle entitle such investor to influence the day-to-day operations of the fund. In addition, individual investors in a private equity or a venture capital fund do not determine policies of a fund such as distribution policies on dividends or other distributions. Such decisions are typically taken by the management of a fund on the basis of the shareholders agreement governing the rights and obligations of the management and all shareholders of the fund. The shareholders’ agreement also generally prevents individual investors from bilaterally executing material transactions with the fund, interchanging managerial personnel or obtaining privileged access to essential technical information. The Group’s investments, made for its own account or on behalf of its mandate providers, are executed in line with the above stated industry practice, ensuring that the Group neither controls nor exercises any form of significant influence within the meaning of IFRS 10, IFRS 11 and IAS 28 over any of these investments, including those investments in which the Group holds over 20 % of the voting rights either on its own account or on behalf of any of its mandates.

A.4.8.

Loans and advances to credit institutions and customers

Loans and advances to credit institutions and customers (or “Loans and receivables”) include loans where money is provided directly to the borrower. Loans and receivables are recognised when cash is advanced to borrowers. They are initially recorded at cost (their net disbursed amounts), which is the fair value of the cash given to originate the loan, including any transaction costs, and are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. Undisbursed parts of loans are recorded in the memorandum items at their nominal value. Where loans meet the eligibility criteria of the amended Fair Value Option and have been designated on initial recognition as at fair value through profit or loss, they are measured at their fair value. The fair value measurement technique used is based on a discounted cash flow technique. Loans designated at fair value are recorded at fair value in the balance sheet. Changes in fair value are recorded in “Result on financial operations”. A.4.8.1.

Interest on loans

Interest on loans originated by the Group is recorded in the consolidated income statement under “Interest and similar income” using the effective interest rate method and on the consolidated balance sheet under “Loans and advances”. From 1 January 2014, commitment fees are classified under “Interest and similar income” while those fees were previously classified under “Fees and commission income”. See note A.4.21.

152

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

A.4.8.2.

Reverse repurchase operations (reverse repos)

A reverse repurchase operation is one under which the Group lends liquid funds to a credit institution which provides collateral in the form of securities. The two parties enter into an irrevocable commitment to complete the operation on a date and at a price fixed at the outset. The operation is based on the principle of delivery against payment: the borrower of the liquid funds transfers the securities to the Group’s custodian in exchange for settlement at the agreed price, which generates a return for the Group linked to the money market. This type of operation is considered for the purposes of the Group to be a loan at a guaranteed rate of interest. Generally treated as collateralised financing transactions, they are carried at the amounts of cash advanced or received, plus accrued interest. Reverse repos are entered on the assets side of the consolidated balance sheet under “Loans and advances to credit institutions - b) other loans and advances”. Securities received under reverse repurchase agreements are not recognised in the consolidated balance sheet, unless control of the contractual rights comprised in these securities is assumed. The Group monitors the market value of the securities received on a daily basis and requests additional collateral in accordance with the underlying agreements. Interest earned on reverse repurchase agreements is recognised as interest income over the life of each agreement. A.4.8.3.

Fees on loans

Front-end fees on loans are deferred, together with the related direct costs of originating and maintaining the commitment, and are recognised as an adjustment to the effective yield, being recorded in the consolidated income statement over the period from disbursement to repayment of the related loan. If the commitment expires without the loan being drawn down, the fee is recognised as income on expiry. The front-end fees are deferred and recognised under “Interest and similar income” in the income statement over the life of the underlying loan. Those front-end fees were previously recognised in the income statement under “Fee and commission income” when received. See note A.4.21. A.4.8.4.

Interest subsidies

Interest subsidies received in advance (see Note F) are deferred in accordance with IAS 18, and are recognised as an adjustment to the effective yield, being recorded in the consolidated income statement over the period from disbursement to repayment of the subsidised loan.

A.4.9.

Impairment on loans and advances and provisions on guarantees

Impairment on loans and advances or provisions on commitments are recorded if there is objective evidence that the Group will be unable to collect all amounts due on a claim according to the original contractual terms or an equivalent value. A “claim” means a loan, a commitment such as a letter of credit, a guarantee, a commitment to extend credit, or other credit product. Impairment is reported as a reduction of the carrying amount of a claim on the consolidated balance sheet, whereas for an off-balance sheet item such as a commitment a provision for credit loss is reported in “Provisions”. Additional impairment or provisions for credit losses are made through “Change in impairment on loans and advances and provisions on guarantees, net of reversals”. A.4.9.1.

Impairment allowances related to individual loans and advances

Impairment losses have been made for individual loans and advances outstanding at the end of the financial year where objective evidence exists of risks of non-recovery of all or part of the amounts outstanding according to the original contractual terms or the equivalent value. Changes to these provisions are recorded in the consolidated income statement as "Change in impairment on loans and advances and provisions on guarantees, net of reversals". Allowances and provisions for credit losses are evaluated on the following counterparty-specific principles. A claim is considered impaired when the Bank determines that it is probable that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original contractual terms or an equivalent value. Individual credit exposures are evaluated based upon the borrower’s character, overall financial condition, resources and payment record, the prospects for support from any financially responsible guarantors and, where applicable, the realisable value of any collateral. The estimated recoverable amount is the present value of expected future cash flows, which may result from restructuring or liquidation. Impairment is measured and allowances for credit losses are established for the difference between the carrying amount and the estimated recoverable amount of any claim considered as impaired. The amount of the loss is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the financial instrument’s original effective interest rate. All impaired claims are reviewed and analysed at least semi-annually. Any subsequent changes to the amounts and timing of the expected future cash flows compared to the prior estimates will result in a change in the provision for credit losses and be charged or credited to credit loss expense. An allowance for impairment is reversed only when the credit quality has improved such that there is reasonable assurance of timely collection of principal and interest in accordance with the original contractual terms of the claim agreement. A write-off is made when all or part of a claim is deemed uncollectible or forgiven. Write-offs are charged against previously established provisions for credit losses or directly to credit loss expense and reduce the principal amount of a claim. Recoveries in part or in full of amounts previously written off are credited to credit loss expense. For non-performing loans, upon impairment the accrual of interest income based on the original terms of the claim is discontinued. A.4.9.2.

Guarantees

In the normal course of business, the Group issues various forms of guarantees.

2014 Financial Report

153

Under the existing rules, these guarantees do not meet the definition of an insurance contract (IFRS 4 Insurance Contracts) and are accounted for under IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, either as “Derivatives” or as “Financial Guarantees”, depending on their features and characteristics as defined by IAS 39. The accounting policy for Derivatives is disclosed under Note A.4.3. When a guarantee operation measured under IAS 39 is derecognised and treated under IAS 37, its value previously recorded under Financial guarantees is transferred to the caption “Provisions for guarantees” on the balance sheet. Financial guarantees are initially recognised at fair value, being the premium received, in the consolidated balance sheet under “Other liabilities”. Subsequent to initial recognition, the Group’s liabilities under each financial guarantee are measured at the higher of 1) the amount initially recognised less, when appropriate, cumulative amortisation recognised in accordance with IAS 18 and 2) the best estimate of expenditure required to settle any present financial obligation arising as a result of the guarantee in accordance with IAS 37. Any increase in the liability relating to financial guarantee is taken to the consolidated income statement in “Change in impairment on loans and advances and provisions for guarantees, net of reversals”. The premium received is recognised in the consolidated income statement in “Fee and commission income” on the basis of an amortisation schedule in accordance with IAS 18 over the life of the financial guarantee. A.4.10.

Property, furniture and equipment

Property, furniture and equipment include land, Group-occupied properties and other machines and equipment. Property, furniture and equipment are reviewed periodically for impairment. Land is stated at acquisition cost and buildings are stated at acquisition cost less accumulated depreciation. The value of the Group's headquarters building in Luxembourg-Kirchberg and its building in Luxembourg-Weimershof are depreciated on a straight-line basis as set out below. Permanent equipment, fixtures and fittings, furniture, office equipment and vehicles are recorded in the consolidated balance sheet at their acquisition cost, less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the estimated life of each item purchased, as set out below: • • • •

A.4.11.

Buildings in Kirchberg and Weimershof: 30 years Permanent equipment, fixtures and fittings: 10 years Furniture: 5 years Office equipment and vehicles: 3 years

Investment property

Investment property is property held to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both. Investment property is stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses and is reviewed for signs of impairment at the balance sheet date. Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis using the same estimated useful lives as property, furniture and equipment.

A.4.12.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets comprise internally developed computer software. Software development costs are capitalised if they meet certain criteria relating to identifiability, to the probability that future economic benefits will flow to the enterprise, and to the reliability of cost measurement. Intangible assets are recognised as assets and are amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful economic lives. At each consolidated balance sheet date, intangible assets are reviewed for indications of impairment or changes in estimated future benefits. If such indications exist, an analysis is performed to assess whether the carrying amounts are fully recoverable. A write-down is made if the carrying amount exceeds the recoverable amount. Internally developed software meeting these criteria is carried at cost less accumulated amortisation calculated on a straight-line basis over three years from completion.

A.4.13.

Pension plans and health insurance scheme

The Group operates defined benefit pension plans to provide retirement benefits to its entire staff. The Group also provides certain additional post-employment healthcare benefits to former employees of the EIB. These benefits are unfunded, as defined by IAS 19. The cost of providing benefits under the plans is determined separately for each plan using the projected unit credit actuarial valuation method. The charge to the consolidated income statement in respect of the defined benefit pension plan is based on the current service cost and interest cost as determined by qualified external actuaries.

154

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

A.4.13.1. Pension plan for staff The Bank’s main pension plan is a defined benefit pension plan funded by contributions from staff and from the Bank, covering all Bank employees. Commitments for retirement benefits are valued at least every year using the projected unit credit method, in order to ensure that the liability entered in the accounts is adequate. The latest valuation was performed as at 30 September 2014, with an extrapolation to 31 December 2014. The main actuarial assumptions used by the actuary are set out in Note J. Cumulative actuarial surpluses and deficits are recognised in full in Other comprehensive income. Net interest cost is recognised in the income statement under “Interest expense and similar charges”. The main pension plan of the EIF is a defined benefit plan funded by contributions from staff and from the EIF, covering all EIF employees. The scheme entered into force in March 2003, replacing the previous defined contribution scheme. A.4.13.2. Health insurance plan The Bank has set up its own health insurance plan for the benefit of staff, financed by contributions from the Bank and its employees. The plan is an unfunded plan treated as a defined benefit plan. A specific provision is set aside on the liability side of the consolidated balance sheet for staff at retirement age. The Fund has subscribed to a health insurance scheme with an insurance company for the benefit of staff at retirement age, financed by contribution from the Fund and its employees. The entitlement to these benefits is based on the employees remaining in service up to retirement age and the completion of a minimum service period. The expected costs of these benefits are accrued over the period of employment, using a methodology similar to that for defined benefit pension plans. The health insurance liabilities are determined based on actuarial calculations as per the same dates as the pension plans. A.4.13.3. Pension plan for members of the Management Committee The related provision shown on the liability side of the Group’s balance sheet is determined, as for all plans, in conformity with IAS 19. Benefits are based on years of service and a percentage of final gross base salary as defined under the plan. The Pension plan for members of the Management Committee is managed and accounted for under the same principles as the pension plan for staff (Note A.4.13.1). A.4.13.4. Optional Supplementary provident scheme The optional supplementary provident scheme is a defined contribution pension scheme, funded by voluntary staff contributions and employer contributions. It is accounted for on the basis of the contributions from staff and employer and the corresponding liability is recorded in “Other liabilities”. A.4.14. Amounts owed to credit institutions and customers Amounts owed to credit institutions and customers are initially recorded at cost and are presented in the financial statements at amortised cost. Interest on amounts owed to credit institutions and customers is recorded in the income statement as Interest expense and similar charges using the effective interest method.

A.4.15.

Debts evidenced by certificates

Debts evidenced by certificates are initially measured at cost, which is the fair value of the consideration received. Transaction costs and net premiums (discounts) are included in the initial measurement. Subsequent measurement is at amortised cost, and any difference between net proceeds and the redemption value is recognised in the consolidated income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method. Where borrowings meet the eligibility criteria of the amended Fair Value Option and have been designated on initial recognition as at fair value through profit or loss, they are measured at their fair value and are recorded in the balance sheet at fair value. Changes in fair value are recorded in “Result on financial operations”. The fair value measurement technique used, in the case of absence of liquid market prices, is a discounted cash flow technique, using current yield curves. Combined debt instruments that are related to foreign exchange rates or indices are considered structured instruments. For all the debt instruments including embedded derivatives, the Group has concluded a swap agreement to fully hedge the exposure. It is the Group policy to hedge the fixed interest rate risk on debt issues and to apply the amended Fair Value Option when this results in a significant reduction of an accounting mismatch. The effect is such that the carrying value of the thus elected debt instruments is adjusted for changes in fair value rather than carried and accrued at cost (see Note Q – Derivative financial instruments). Interest expense on debt instruments is included in the account “Interest expense and similar charges” in the consolidated income statement and in the liabilities caption including the underlying debt instruments in the consolidated balance sheet. Issuance fees and redemption premiums or discounts are amortised over the period to maturity of the related borrowings, unless those borrowings are measured at fair value, in which case the recognition in the consolidated income statement is immediate.

2014 Financial Report

155

A.4.16.

Prepayments – Deferred income

These accounts comprise: • •

A.4.17.

Prepayments: expenditure incurred during the financial year but relating to a subsequent financial year. Deferred income: income received before the balance sheet date but relating to a subsequent financial year.

Reserves

A.4.17.1. Reserve fund As foreseen by Article 22.1 of the Statute, “a reserve fund of up to 10% of the subscribed capital shall be built up progressively” from the retained profit of the Bank. A.4.17.2. Additional reserves Additional reserves contain the remaining retained earnings of the Group. A.4.17.3. Fair value reserve The fair value reserve includes the change in fair value of available for sale financial assets (other than impairments). A.4.17.4. Special activities reserve As foreseen by Article 16.5 of the Statute, “the special activities of the Bank […] will have a specific allocation of reserve”. The reserve will be based on the capital allocation of each operation. A.4.17.5.

General loan reserve

In 2009 a “general loan reserve” was introduced for the expected loss of the Bank’s loan and guarantees portfolio, modelled upon the Group’s policy guidelines.

A.4.18.

Taxation

The Protocol on the privileges and Immunities of the European Union appended to the treaty on European Union and the treaty on the functioning of the European Union, stipulates that the assets, revenues, and other property of the Institutions of the Union are exempt from all direct taxes.

A.4.19.

Interest income and expense

Interest income and interest expense are recognised in the income statement for all interest bearing instruments on an accruals basis using the effective interest method based on the actual purchase price including direct transaction costs. This is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial asset and allocating the interest income over the relevant period. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash receipts through the expected life of the financial instrument to the net carrying amount of the financial asset. In addition to interest and commission on loans, deposits and other revenue from the securities portfolio, this heading includes the indemnities received by the Group in respect of early loan reimbursement payments made by its borrowers. In accordance with the provisions of IAS 39 – Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement - the Group records the indemnities received for early repayment of loans immediately in the consolidated income statement at the time of derecognition of the related loans. In accordance with IAS 32 – Financial Instruments: Presentation, as a result of the replacement share purchase undertaking (Note A.4.1), noncontrolling interests are presented under “Interest expense and similar charges”, in conformity with the anticipated acquisition method. A.4.20.

Dividend income

Dividends are recognised in the income statement when the entity’s right to receive payment is established.

A.4.21.

Reclassification of prior year figures

Certain prior year figures have been reclassified to conform with the current year’s presentation. The reclassifications principally relate to: •

Commitment fees and front-end fees on loans: - From: Fee and commission income EUR‘000 119,634 - To: Interest and similar income EUR‘000 119,634

The cash in hand and balances with central banks and post office banks equal to EUR ’000 114,283 at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 106,382). EIB is an eligible counterparty in the Eurosystem’s monetary policy operations, and therefore has been given access to the monetary policy operations of the European Central Bank. The Bank conducts the operations via the Central Bank of Luxembourg, where the Bank maintains a deposit to cover the minimum reserve requirement. The balance of this deposit amounts to EUR ‘000 113,873 as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 106,258).

B.2.

Debt securities portfolio

The Group changed its debt securities portfolio structure during 2014. The debt securities portfolio is now composed of the Group long term hedge portfolio, the operational money market portfolios A1 and A2, the securities liquidity portfolios P1 and P2, the operational EIF portfolio and the loan substitutes portfolio. Previously, the Group’s debt securities portfolio was composed of the Group investment portfolio, the operational money market portfolios A1 and A2, the operational bond portfolios B1 ‘Credit Spread’, B3 ‘Global Fixed Income’, B4 ‘Inflation Linked Investment’, the operational EIF portfolio and the loan substitutes. The detail of each portfolio as at 31 December 2014 and 2013 is as follows: 31.12.2014 31,243,131 13,759,663 45,002,794

31.12.2013 26,621,637 6,979,480 33,601,117

Classification Held-to-maturity

Book value 2,302,399

Fair value(1) 2,461,371

Held-to-maturity Available for sale

18,244,113 91,083(2)

18,238,907 91,083

Available for sale Trading Available for sale Trading Available for sale Held-to-maturity Loans and receivable

Including unrealised gain of EUR ’000 4,276 Including unrealised gain of EUR ’000 18,361 Loan substitutes, which represent acquisitions of interests in pools of loans or receivables in connection with securitisation transactions, are considered as part of the aggregate loans (Note D). Some of these transactions have been structured by adding credit or project related remedies, thus offering additional recourse. No impairment has occurred on any asset in this portfolio and hence no impairment has been accounted for as at 31 December 2014 and 2013. (4)

EU sovereign exposure The Group did not record impairment in 2013 and 2014 in respect of its held to maturity and available for sale EU sovereign and sovereign guaranteed exposure as at the year end, in view of the Bank’s preferred creditor status, as well as, of the EIF and the protection given by the Bank’s Statute as well as on a detailed review of any fair value adjustment requirements. The following tables show the exposure to debt issued or guaranteed by EU sovereigns in the Group’s debt securities portfolios as at 31 December 2014 and 2013:

B.3. Shares and other variable-yield securities The balance comprises:

Venture capital operations

EBRD shares

Investment funds

Total

At 1 January 2014 Net additions At 31 December 2014 Unrealised gains/losses

2,665,364 345,173 3,010,537

157,500 0 157,500(1)

576,908 12,412 589,320

3,399,772 357,585 3,757,357

At 1 January 2014 Unrealised gains Unrealised losses At 31 December 2014 Impairment At 1 January 2014 Net additions At 31 December 2014 Net book value: At 31 December 2014 At 31 December 2013

816,749 427,369 -9,734 1,234,384

266,639 26,603 0 293,242

71,787 66,795 -16,095 122,487

1,155,175 520,767 -25,829 1,650,113

-973,661 -23,064 -996,725

0 0 0

-18,571 -21,935 -40,506

-992,232 -44,999 -1,037,231

3,248,196 2,508,452

450,742 424,139

671,301 630,124

4,370,239 3,562,715

Cost:

(1) The amount of EUR ‘000 157,500 (2013: EUR ‘000 157,500) corresponds to the capital paid in by the Group as at 31 December 2014 with respect to its subscription of EUR ‘000 900,440 to the capital of the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (‘EBRD’). As at 31 December 2014, the Group holds 3.04 % of the subscribed capital of the EBRD (2013: 3.03%).

B.4. Interest in other entities

B.4.1 Composition of the Group The Bank holds 63.69% (2013: 62.10%) of the subscribed capital of the EIF amounting to EUR 4.2 billion (2013: EUR 3.00 billion). EIF is the only subsidiary of the Bank. The primary task of the EIF, while providing adequate return on equity, is to contribute to the pursuit of EU objectives through: • • • •

the provision of guarantees to financial institutions that cover credits to small and medium sized entities (‘SME’); the acquisition, holding, managing and disposal of equity participations; the administration of special resources entrusted by third parties; and related activities.

The EIF has share capital consisting solely of ordinary shares, which are held directly by the Bank and the proportion of ownership interests held equals to the voting rights held by Bank. The country of incorporation or registration is also its principal place of business.

B.4.2 Involvement with unconsolidated structured entities Definition of a structured entity A structured entity is one that has been designed so that voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding, who controls the entity. IFRS 12 observes that a structured entity often has some or all of the following features: • Restricted activities; • A narrow and well-defined objective, such as to effect a tax-efficient lease, carry out research and development activities, provide a source of capital or funding to an entity or provide investment opportunities for investors by passing on risks and rewards associated with the assets of the structured entity to investors; • Insufficient equity to permit the structured entity to finance its activities without subordinated financial support; • Financing in the form of multiple contractually linked instruments to investors that create concentrations of credit or other risks (tranches). Unconsolidated structured entities The term 'unconsolidated structured entities' refers to all structured entities that are not controlled by the Group and includes interests in structured entities that are not consolidated.

2014 Financial Report

159

Definition of Interests in structured entities: IFRS 12 defines "interests" broadly to include any contractual or non-contractual involvement that exposes the reporting entity to variability in returns from the performance of the entity. Examples of such interests include the holding of equity interests and other forms of involvement such as the provision of funding, liquidity support, credit enhancements, commitments and guarantees to the other entity. IFRS 12 states that a reporting entity does not necessarily have an interest in another entity solely because of a typical customer supplier relationship. Type of structured entity

Nature and purpose

Interest held by the Group

Project Finance - lending to Project Finance Transactions (PF Operations) are transactions where the Group Special Purposes Vehicles relies for the servicing of its debt on a borrower whose sole or main source of (“SPV”) revenue is generated by a single or limited number of assets being financed by such debt or other pre-existing assets contractually linked to the project. PF operations are often financed through SPV.

Net disbursed amounts

Venture capital and Investment funds

Investments in units/shares issued by venture capital and investment funds

The Group finances venture capital and investment funds. Venture capital and investment funds pool and manage money from investors seeking private equity stakes in small and medium-size enterprises with strong growth potential as well as financing infrastructure projects.

Assets Backed Securities issued by SPV

Interest income

Dividends received as dividend income Investing in notes issued by SPV is a Group’s alternative mean of providing funds Investments in notes issued by to a project promoter or intermediary. Asset Backed Securities are issued by a the SPV segregated SPV and are backed by a pool of assets originated by a financial or Interest income another institution. It should be noted that the Group does not act as sponsor/promoter of such SPV.

The Group enters into guarantees and unfunded securities transactions that can Guaranteed exposures Guarantees granted in Guarantee fees respect of loans granted by be granted to financial institutions, public entities or SPV. third parties SPV The Group manages mandates on behalf of third parties and is entrusted with the Management fees for servicing management of external funds and provides related back-offices and accounting Mandates management* services.

The table below shows the carrying amounts of unconsolidated structured entities in which the Group has an interest at the reporting date, as well as the Group’s maximum exposure to loss in relation to those entities. The maximum exposure to loss includes the carrying amounts and the related un-disbursed commitments.

*The Group is exposed to management fees in respect of mandates under management (refer to Note O). The assets held on behalf of mandates amounted to EUR 13,393 million. Such mandates are further disclosed in Note V.

160

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

Note C – Loans and advances to credit institutions – other loans and advances (in EUR ‘000) The Group enters into collateralised reverse repurchase and repurchase agreement transactions that may result in credit exposure in the event that the counterparty to the transaction is unable to fulfil its contractual obligations. The Group controls credit risk associated with these activities by monitoring counterparty credit exposure and collateral values on a daily basis and requiring additional collateral to be deposited with the Group when deemed necessary. 31.12.2014 12,296,613 182,330 25,417,878 37,896,821 36,553,253

These operations are carried out with a third-party custodian who undertakes, on the basis of a framework contract, to guarantee compliance with the contractual terms and conditions, notably with respect to: - delivery against payment; - verification of collateral; - the collateral margin required by the lender which must always be available and adequate, with the market value of the securities being verified daily by the said custodian; and - organisation of substitute collateral provided that this meets all the contractual requirements.

Specific impairment is created when there is an objective evidence of impairment. The amount of such provisioning reflects the difference between the loan’s nominal value and the present value of all the expected future cash flows generated by the impaired asset. Movements in the specific impairment are detailed below:

Provision at 1 January Release during the year Use during the year Allowance during the year Foreign exchange adjustment At 31 December

2014 361,442 -43,900 0 97,593 1,739 416,874

2013 341,549 -74,640 -55,950 151,016 -533 361,442

In 2013 the Bank has retroceded EUR ‘000 5,200 to the European Commission regarding a contribution previously made on an operation which was fully repaid in 2013. Such retrocession has been accounted for in the income statement as Change in impairment on loans and advances and provisions for guarantees, net of reversals. Such retrocession did not occur in 2014. The accrued interest on impaired loans as at 31 December 2014 amounts to EUR ‘000 8,822 (2013: EUR ‘000 6,176). The financial collateral held for impaired loans is disclosed in Note S.2.3.4.

2014 Financial Report

161

D.3.

Geographical breakdown of lending by country in which projects are located

Loans for projects within the European Union: Countries and territories in which projects are located

A provision for guarantees issued has been established as there is objective evidence that the Group will have to incur a loss in respect of guarantees granted. This provision amounts to EUR ‘000 159,753 as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 190,987). The change in provision in respect of guarantees issued totalled EUR ‘000 24,311 in 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 19,261). In addition, a foreign exchange adjustment of EUR ‘000 6,923 was recognised for the year ended 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR ‘000 3,267).

Cost: At 1 January 2014 Additions Disposals At 31 December 2014 Accumulated depreciation: At 1 January 2014 Depreciation Disposals At 31 December 2014 Net book value: At 31 December 2014 At 31 December 2013

Total property, Total intangible furniture and assets equipment

Land

Luxembourg buildings

Furniture and equipment

24,393 0 -4,248 20,145

374,827 3,081 -27,304 350,604

81,970 15,375 -14,820 82,525

481,190 18,456 -46,372 453,274

15,912 6,938 -8,668 14,182

0 0 0 0

-148,679 -9,792 10,770 -147,701

-42,704 -13,911 13,551 -43,064

-191,383 -23,703 24,321 -190,765

-7,075 -6,672 8,668 -5,079

20,145 24,393

202,903 226,148

39,461 39,266

262,509 289,807

9,103 8,837

All land and buildings are used by the Group for its own activities. For subsequent measurement purposes the Group uses the “cost model” under IAS 16. On 1 January 2014 the Bank sold its Hamm building for EUR'000 24,280. The gain on sale of EUR'000 1,925 is recorded under Other operating income (refer to Note N) in the consolidated income statement.

E.2.

Investment property

Cost: At 1 January 2014 Additions Disposals At 31 December 2014 Accumulated depreciation: At 1 January 2014 Depreciation Disposals At 31 December 2014 Net book value: At 31 December 2014 At 31 December 2013

Land

Building

Total investment property

330 0 0 330

4,832 0 0 4,832

5,162 0 0 5,162

0 0 0 0

-2,621 -161 0 -2,782

-2,621 -161 0 -2,782

330 330

2,050 2,211

2,380 2,541

There were no indications of impairment of equipment or investment property in either 2014 or 2013. The fair value of the investment property is EUR 8.1 million as measured by an external expert in its report dated 5 October 2012. Income from leased office space included in Other operating income is nil at 31 December 2014 (2013: nil).

Deferred income on loans Interest subsidies received in advance(1) Prepaid management fees Other

(1)

31.12.2013 0 121,609 13,691 0 135,300

Part of the amounts received from the European Commission has been made available as a long term advance which is entered on the liabilities side under item deferred income, and comprises: • amounts in respect of interest subsidies for loans granted for projects outside the Union, under Conventions signed with the ACP States and Protocols concluded with the Mediterranean Countries; and • interest subsidies, concerning certain lending operations put in place within the Union from the Group's own resources, made available in conjunction with the EMS under Council Regulation (EEC) No 1736/79 of 3 August 1979 and in conjunction with the financial mechanism established by the EFTA Countries under the EFTA Agreement signed on 2 May 1992.

The balance above relates to staff housing loans disbursed previously to the employees by the Bank. Since 1999 these housing loans have been substituted by an arrangement with an external financial institution, whereby permanently employed staff members of the Group may be granted staff housing loans in accordance with the Group’s staff regulations. The same interest rates, terms and conditions are applicable to all said employees.

As at 31 December 2014, the portion of non-controlling interest on the balance sheet amounts to EUR 610 million (2013: EUR 441 million) and on the consolidated result (Note L) amounts to EUR -27 million (2013: EUR -18 million).

Repayable on demand Short term deposits Cash deposited on swaps payable Total

H.2.

31.12.2014 6,915,130 51,137 358,290 7,324,557

31.12.2013 4,089,820 79,867 315,423 4,485,110

31.12.2014 112,844

31.12.2013 50,799

356,979 1,518,849 270,840 2,259,512

316,619 1,582,192 537,776 2,487,386

Amounts owed to customers

Overnight deposits European Union and Member States' accounts: - For Special Section operations and related unsettled amounts - Deposit accounts Short-term deposits Total

Note I – Debts evidenced by certificates (in EUR ‘000) In its financing activity, one of the Group’s objectives is to align its funding strategy with the funds required for the loans granted. The caption ‘Debts evidenced by certificates’ includes ’Debt securities in issue’ (securities offered to the general investing public) and ‘Others’ (private placements). The table below discloses the details per currency of debts outstanding at 31 December 2014 and 2013, together with the average rates and due dates.

Weighted average interest rates at the balance sheet date. The notional value of debts evidenced by certificates held at fair value through profit or loss as at 31 December 2014 amounts to EUR 393 billion (2013: EUR 383 billion). The notional value of debts evidenced by certificates held at amortised cost as at 31 December 2014 amounts to EUR 61 billion (2013: EUR 43 billion). Refer to Note A.4.15 for the definition of Fair value on borrowings.

(2)

2014 Financial Report

165

Note J – Pension plans and health insurance scheme (in EUR’000) The Group operates 3 defined benefit pension plans. The Group also provides certain post-employment healthcare benefits to former employees of EIB. These benefits are unfunded as defined by IAS19 and the plan is not regulated. The cost of providing benefits under the plans is determined separately for each plan using the projected unit credit actuarial valuation method. Actuarial valuation took place at 30 September 2014 and was rolled forward to 31 December 2014. The plans typically expose the Group to actuarial risks such as interest risk, longevity risk and salary risk. An additional risk is associated with the payment to the dependants of plan members (widow and orphan benefits). The present value of the defined benefit liability is calculated using a discount rate determined by reference to high quality corporate bond yields. A decrease in the bond interest rate will increase the pension liability. The present value of the defined benefit plan liability is calculated by reference to the best estimate of the mortality of the plan participants both during and after their employment. An increase in the life expectancy of the plan participants will increase the plan’s liability. The present value of the defined benefit plan liability is calculated by reference to the future salaries of plan participants. An increase in the salary of the plan participants will increase the plan’s liability.

Interest risk

Longevity risk

Salary risk

An additional plan is not included in the figures below: the Optional Supplementary Provident Scheme (a defined contribution pension scheme). The corresponding amount of EUR 375 million (2013: EUR 326 million) is classified under “Other liabilities” (Note G). The principal assumptions used in determining pension and post-employment benefit obligations for the Group’s plans are shown below: in % Discount rate for pension plans Discount rate for health insurance plan Future salary increase (including inflation) Future pension increases Healthcare cost increase rate Average longevity at 60 of current pensioners (years) Average longevity at 60 of current employees (years) Actuarial tables

2014 3.14 3.14 4.50 2.00 4.00 24.80 26.60 ISCLT

2013 5.10 5.10 4.50 2.00 4.00 25.20 27.40 ISCLT

Sensitivity analysis: Significant actuarial assumptions for the determination of the defined obligation are discount rate, expected salary increase and mortality. The sensitivity analyses below have been determined based on reasonably possible changes of the respective assumptions occurring at the end of the reporting period, while keeping all other assumptions constant. EIB Pension: • • • •

If the discount rate is 100 basis points higher (lower), the defined benefit obligation would decrease by 17% (increase by 23%). If the expected salary growth increases (decreases) by 1%, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 17% (decrease by 13%). If the life expectancy increases (decreases) by 1 year for men and women, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 4% (decrease by 4%). If the expected future pension increases (decreases) by 1% due to inflation, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 22% (decrease by 17%).

EIF Pension: • • • •

If the discount rate is 100 basis points higher (lower), the defined benefit obligation would decrease by 25% (increase by 35%). If the expected salary growth increases (decreases) by 1%, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 33% (decrease by 24%). If the life expectancy increases (decreases) by 1 year for men and women, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 3% (decrease by 3%). If the expected future pension increases (decreases) by 1% due to inflation, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 34% (decrease by 25%).

Management Committee Pension: • • • •

166

If the discount rate is 100 basis points higher (lower), the defined benefit obligation would decrease by 11% (increase by 14%). If the expected salary growth increases (decreases) by 1%, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 3% (decrease by 3%). If the life expectancy increases (decreases) by 1 year for men and women, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 4% (decrease by 4%). If the expected future pension increases (decreases) by 1% due to inflation, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 14% (decrease by 11%).

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

Health Insurance for EIB • • •

If the discount rate is 100 basis points higher (lower), the defined benefit obligation would decrease by 21% (increase by 29%). If the life expectancy increases (decreases) by 1 year for men and women, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 5% (decrease by 5%). If the expected future healthcare cost increases (decreases) by 1% due to inflation, the defined benefit obligation would increase by 31% (decrease by 23%).

The sensitivity analysis presented above may not be representative of the actual change in the defined obligation as it is unlikely that the change in assumptions would occur in isolation of one another as some of the assumptions may be correlated. Furthermore, in presenting the above sensitivity analysis, the present value of the defined benefit obligation has been calculated using the projected unit credit method at the end of the reporting period, which is the same as that applied in calculating the defined benefit obligation liability recognised in the balance sheet. There was no change in the method and assumptions used in preparing the sensitivity analysis from prior years.

The table below shows the actuarial experience (gain)/loss for the different Plans and the total defined benefit obligation:

EIB Pension

Management Committee Pension

EIF Pension

Health Insurance

Total

Total defined benefit obligation

-1,343 38,414 30,216 11,255

-2,628 100 -176 -199

1,690 4,417 -769 4,997

881 -1,218 814 1,025

-1,400 41,713 30,085 17,078

3,580,970 2,351,325 2,499,310 1,777,733

2014 2013 2012 2011

The tables below show the evolution of the Defined Benefit Obligation during 2013 and 2014:

Obligation at the beginning of the year a) Current service cost b) Interest cost Total profit or loss a) Experience (gain)/loss b) Change in demographic assumptions c) Change in financial assumptions Total OCI (*) a) Employee contributions b) Benefit payments c) Other restructuring events Total Other Benefit obligation as at 31 December 2013

(*) Attributable to the Equity holders of the Bank (EUR'000 -308,424) and to non-controlling Interest (EUR'000 -5,324).

EIB Pension

Management Committee Pension

EIF Pension

Health Insurance

Total 2014

Obligation at the beginning of the year a) Current service cost b) Interest cost Total profit or loss a) Experience (gain)/loss b) Change in demographic assumptions c) Change in financial assumptions Total OCI (*) a) Employee contributions b) Benefit payments c) Other restructuring events Total Other

(*) Attributable to the Equity holders of the Bank (EUR'000 1,042,243) and to non-controlling Interest (EUR'000 26,352).

2014 Financial Report

167

EIB employees pay a fixed contribution of 10.9% of their pensionable salary. The residual contribution (including back service payments) is paid by the Group. All contributions of the Group and its staff are invested in the assets of the Group. The funding requirements are based on the local actuarial measurement framework. In this framework the discount rate is set on a risk free rate. Furthermore, premiums are determined on a current salary base. The Group is liable for all pension payments stemming from the defined benefit plan. The average duration of the benefit obligation at 31 December 2014 is split as follows: EIB Pension: • • •

The amount that the Group expects to recognise in the profit or loss relating to the defined benefit plans during the next financial year is EUR ‘000 262,740. (*) Staff members who have left the Group before retirement age and have a right to a deferred pension.

Note K – Result for the financial year The appropriation of the profit of the stand-alone financial statements of the Bank for the year ended 31 December 2014, prepared under EU Accounting Directives, which amounts to EUR’000 2,625,851 will be submitted for approval by the Board of Governors by 28 April 2015.

168

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

Note L – Interest and similar income and Interest expense and similar charges (in EUR ‘000) L.1.

Net interest income

Interest and similar income: Derivatives Loans and advances to credit institutions and customers Treasury bills and other bills eligible for refinancing with central banks and debt securities including fixedincome securities Interest subsidy from the EU Cash in hand, balances with central banks and post office banks Other Total Interest expense and similar charges: Debts evidenced by certificates Derivatives Interest cost on benefit obligation (Note J) Commitment to purchase non-controlling interest (Note G.2) Interest on third party mandates Amounts owed to credit institutions and to customers Other Total Net interest income

The table below sets out the net interest income relating to each class of financial assets and liabilities:

Interest and similar income: Derivatives Loans and receivables(1) Designated at fair value through profit and loss Held-to-maturity Available-for-sale Trading debt securities Other Total Interest expense and similar charges: Designated at fair value through profit and loss Derivatives Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost Non-financial liabilities Total Net interest income

(1) Included in this class of financial assets is accrued interest on impaired loans as at 31 December 2014 amounting to EUR '000 8,822 (2013: EUR '000 6,176).

Income not analysed per country: 1. Revenue from Long Term Hedge portfolio / Investment portfolio and loan substitutes portfolios 2. Revenue from Securities Liquidity portfolios / Operational bond portfolios 3. Revenue from Operational money-market portfolios 4. Revenue from money-market operations 5. Income from derivatives 6. Unwinding of interest income from the present value adjustment of paid-in capital and reserve receivable

170

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

Note M – Result on financial operations (in EUR ‘000) M.1. Per nature of result

Net result on derivatives(1) Net result on loans under the fair value option and associated swaps(2) Net result on borrowings under the fair value option and associated swaps(3) Foreign exchange gain and loss Fair value gains and losses on securities liquidity portfolios / operational treasury portfolios Gain and loss on unwind of ALM swaps Realised gains and losses on on securities liquidity portfolios / operational treasury portfolios Gain and loss on buy back of debts evidenced by certificates Realised gain/loss on sale of shares Other

The net result on derivatives includes for the majority the fair value of Macro-hedging swaps and Treasury Asset swaps. On 31 December 2014 these swaps evidence a negative impact of EUR ‘000 376,701 compared to a positive impact of EUR ‘000 400,361 in 2013.

(2)

The Fair Value Option is applied on loans hedged by derivatives. As at 31 December 2014, the carrying value of loans designated at fair value stands at EUR 151 billion (2013: EUR 128 billion). The use of Fair Value Option on loans generates an increase of EUR '000 590,720 on the income statement at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR' 000 254,355). The positive variation in the combined fair value of the EIB loans under the Fair Value Option and their associated swaps is essentially due to a decrease of the lending spreads. (3)

The Fair Value Option is applied on borrowings hedged by derivatives. The majority of the borrowings are systematically hedged, and the carrying value of borrowings designated at fair value amounts to EUR 444 billion as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 412 billion). The net impact on the income statement at 31 December 2014 on borrowings and associated swaps is a loss for the year by EUR '000 2,272,707 (2013: loss of EUR ’000 217,771). The changes in Fair Value of the EIB borrowings tend to be only partially compensated by those of the related hedging swaps as the value of market driven bond quotations is also affected by credit considerations not affecting the hedging swaps valuations.

M.2. Per category of assets and liabilities

Financial assets available-for-sale Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss Financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss Financial instruments held for trading Derivatives held for risk management Other

Salaries and allowances(1) Welfare contributions and other staff costs Staff costs Other general administrative expenses Total general administrative expenses

(1) of which the amount for members of the Management Committee is EUR ‘000 3,168 at 31 December 2014 and EUR ‘000 3,200 at 31 December 2013. The number of persons employed by the Group was 2,557 at 31 December 2014 (2,359 at 31 December 2013).

Note Q – Derivative financial instruments Q.1. Usage of derivative financial instruments In the funding activity of the Group The Group uses derivatives mainly as part of its funding strategy in order to bring the characteristics, in terms of currencies and interest rates, of the funds raised in line with those of loans granted and also to reduce funding costs. It uses also long term swaps to hedge certain treasury transactions and for ALM purposes. Long term derivatives transactions are not used for trading, but only in connection with fund-raising, hedging loans and treasury transactions, and for the reduction of market risk exposure. All interest rate and currency swaps linked to the borrowing portfolio have maturities matching the corresponding borrowings and are therefore of a long term nature. The derivatives most commonly used are: Currency swaps Currency swaps are contracts under which it is agreed to convert funds in one currency into another currency and, simultaneously, a forward exchange contract is concluded to re-exchange the two currencies in the future in order to be able to repay the funds raised on the due dates. Interest rate swaps Interest rate swaps are contracts under which, generally, it is agreed to exchange floating-rate interest for fixed-rate interest or vice versa. Interest rate and currency swaps allow the Group to modify the interest rates and currencies of its borrowing portfolio and other portfolios in order to accommodate requests from its clients and also to reduce funding costs by exchanging its advantageous access conditions to certain capital markets with its swap counterparties.

172

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

In the liquidity management of the Group The Group enters into short term currency swap contracts in order to adjust currency positions in its operational treasury in relation to its benchmark currency, the euro, and to cater for demand for currencies in conjunction with loan disbursements. The notional amount of short term currency swaps stood at EUR 42,902 million at 31 December 2014 against EUR 12,748 million at 31 December 2013. The notional amount of short term currency forwards was EUR 404 million at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 372 million). The fair value of these contracts was EUR 1,141 million at 31 December 2014 for currency swaps and EUR -38 million for currency forwards (2013: respectively EUR -77 million and EUR 4 million).

In the Asset Liability Management (ALM) of the Group The Group’s ALM policy aims to maintain a high and stable level of income as well as to limit the volatility of the economic value of the Group. Accordingly, the Group: • has adopted an own funds investment profile ensuring a stable and high flow of income; and • manages residual interest rate risks in relation to this investment profile. With a view of managing residual interest rate risks, the Group operates natural hedges in respect of loans and borrowings or concludes global hedging operations (interest rate swaps). Macro hedging swaps used as part of asset/liability management are fair valued in accordance with IAS 39.

Level 2 – Valuation techniques with inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices).

•

Level 3 – Valuation techniques which use inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs). Internal valuation models are used to determine the fair values of these instruments.

Valuation techniques include net present value and discounted cash flow models, Hull-White and Libor Market Model interest rate models and Black-Scholes option model. Assumptions and inputs used in valuation techniques include risk-free interest rates, basis swap spreads and currency basis swaps spreads, foreign currency exchange rates and forward exchange rates, equity and equity index prices and expected price volatilities and correlations, Consumer Price Indices values and expected volatilities and correlations. The objective of valuation techniques is to arrive at a fair value determination that reflects the price of the financial instrument at the reporting date that would have been determined by market participants acting at arm’s length. The valuation models applied are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing financial instruments and incorporate the factors that market participants consider when setting a price. For a portion of derivative transactions, internal estimates and assumptions might be used in the valuation techniques when the market inputs are not directly available, typically in the estimation of correlations in some interest rate and cross currency models and in the estimation of volatilities for some long dated equity linked and inflation linked transactions. The table below shows the net fair value of derivative financial instruments, recorded as assets or liabilities (between those whose fair value is based on quoted market prices, those whose valuation technique where all the model inputs are observable in the market and those where the valuation techniques involve the use of non-market observable inputs) together with their nominal amounts. The nominal amounts indicate the volume of transactions outstanding at the year end and are indicative of neither the market risk nor the credit risk.

Quoted prices for the majority of the Bank’s derivative transactions are not available in the market. For such instruments the fair values are estimated using valuation techniques or models, based whenever possible on observable market data prevailing at the balance sheet date. The fair value of swap transactions is computed using the income approach, applying valuation techniques to convert future amounts to a single present amount (discounted). The estimate of fair value is based on the value indicated by marketplace expectations about those future amounts. Valuation techniques can range from simple discounted known cash flows to complex option models. The valuation models applied are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing financial instruments, and incorporate the factors that market participants consider when setting a price. For a portion of derivative transactions, internal estimates and assumptions might be used in the valuation techniques when the market inputs are not directly available.

174

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

The table below sets out information about significant unobservable inputs used at year end in measuring derivatives financial instruments categorised as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy (EUR’000):

Type of financial instrument

Fair values of level 3 swaps at 31 December 2014

Fair value at 31 December 2014

Valuation technique

Significant unobservable input

Range of estimates for unobservable inputs

OTC interest rate swaps

18,295

-870

Stochastic IR models

From 1 to 3 factors. Number of factors for the Correlations of adjacent curves and correlation rates between 65% and between forward rates 100%

OTC Cross currency swaps

13,365

566

Stochastic CC models

Correlations between yield curves and FX rates

Correlations between 30% and 50%.

Valuation technique

Significant unobservable input

Range of estimates for unobservable inputs

Type of financial instrument

OTC interest rate swaps

OTC Cross currency swaps

Fair values of level 3 swaps at 31 December 2013

Fair value at 31 December 2013

11,604

-809

Stochastic IR models

From 1 to 3 factors. Number of factors for the Correlations of adjacent curves and correlation rates between 65% and between forward rates 100%

674

416

Stochastic CC models

Correlations between yield curves and FX rates

Correlations between 30% and 50%.

Significant unobservable inputs are developed as follows: • Correlations and volatilities are derived through extrapolation of observable volatilities, recent transaction prices, quotes from other market participants, data from consensus pricing services and historical data adjusted for current conditions. • Risk adjusted spreads are derived from the CDS market, when available, and from historical default and prepayment trends adjusted for current conditions.

Note R – Fair value of financial assets and liabilities (in EUR million) The tables below set out a comparison of the fair values, by the level of the fair value hierarchy, and the carrying amounts of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities that are carried in the financial statements. The tables do not include the fair values of non-financial assets and non-financial liabilities. 31 December 2014 Assets carried at fair value: Available-for-sale financial assets Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss Financial assets held for trading Derivative assets held for risk management Total Assets carried at amortised cost: Held-to-maturity investments Loans and receivables Total Total financial assets Liabilities carried at fair value: Derivative liabilities held for risk management Financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss Total Liabilities carried at amortised cost: Liabilities measured at amortised cost Total Total financial liabilities

Level 1

Level 3

Total

Carrying amount

1,963

45

4,462

6,470

6,470

0

119,490

31,713

151,203

151,203

5,379 0 7,342

453 59,478 179,466

0 2,931 39,106

5,832 62,409 225,914

5,832 62,409 225,914

8,503 317 8,820 16,162

22,732 373,953 396,685 576,151

0 0 0 39,106

31,235 374,270 405,505 631,419

30,453 351,456 381,909 607,823

0

26,845

3,234

30,079

30,079

429,063

7,582

7,634

444,279

444,279

429,063

34,427

10,868

474,358

474,358

45,834 45,834 474,897

26,756 26,756 61,183

794 794 11,662

73,384 73,384 547,742

70,757 70,757 545,115

Level 3

Total

Carrying amount

31 December 2013 Assets carried at fair value: Available-for-sale financial assets Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss Financial assets held for trading Derivative assets held for risk management Total Assets carried at amortised cost: Held-to-maturity investments Loans and receivables Total Total financial assets Liabilities carried at fair value: Derivative liabilities held for risk management Financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss Total Liabilities carried at amortised cost: Liabilities measured at amortised cost Total Total financial liabilities

Fair value Level 2

Level 1

Fair value Level 2

2,415

453

3,902

6,770

6,770

0

81,726

45,870

127,596

127,596

910 0 3,325

6 31,881 114,066

0 1,973 51,745

916 33,854 169,136

916 33,854 169,136

14,807 272 15,079 18,404

10,245 343,599 353,844 467,910

2,668 988 3,656 55,401

27,720 344,859 372,579 541,715

27,447 349,750 377,197 546,333

0

19,869

2,366

22,235

22,235

396,491

6,677

8,654

411,822

411,822

396,491

26,546

11,020

434,057

434,057

38,882 38,882 435,373

12,010 12,010 38,556

1,028 1,028 12,048

51,920 51,920 485,977

50,745 50,745 484,802

The following describes the methodologies and assumptions used to determine the fair value of the financial assets and the financial liabilities. Assets for which carrying value approximates fair value For financial assets and financial liabilities that are liquid or having a short term maturity (less than three months), it is assumed that the carrying amounts approximate their fair value. Assets and liabilities recorded at fair value Published price quotations in an active market are the first source for determining the fair value of a financial instrument. For instruments without available market price, fair values are estimated using valuation techniques or models based whenever possible on observable market data prevailing at the balance sheet date. Fair value of such instruments is determined by using valuation techniques to convert future amounts to a single discounted present amount. The estimate of fair value is based on the value indicated by marketplace expectations about those future amounts. Valuation techniques can range from simple discounted known cash flows to complex option models. The valuation models applied are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing financial instruments, and incorporate the factors that market participants consider when setting a price. Internal estimates and assumptions might be used in the valuation techniques when the market inputs are not directly available.

176

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

With the application of IFRS 13, own credit adjustments (OCA), reflecting own credit risk on unquoted or illiquid borrowings hedged by swaps, amount EUR 1,030 million at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR + 396 million). In 2014, the Group made transfers from level 1 to 2 of the fair value hierarchy: - Financial assets available for sale of EUR 25 million (2013: EUR nil million) - Financial assets held for trading of EUR 0 million (2013: EUR nil million) - Financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss of EUR 0.2 million (2013: EUR 1 million) During the current year, due to changes in market conditions for certain securities, quoted prices in active markets were no longer available for these securities. However, there was sufficient information available to measure fair values of these securities based on observable market inputs, hence the transfers from level 1 to 2. The Group made also the following transfer from level 2 to 1 of the fair value hierarchy: - Financial assets available for sale of EUR 0 million (2013: EUR 49 million) - Financial assets held for trading of EUR 0 million (2013: EUR 143 million) - Financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss of EUR 0.7 million (2013: EUR 23,018 million). During the current year, quoted prices in active markets were available for these securities, hence the transfers from level 2 to 1. The following table presents the changes in Level 3 instruments for the year ended 31 December 2014 (in EUR million): Financial Financial assets Financial Financial assets Available for sale liabilities designated at fair liabilities held for held for trading(*) financial assets designated at fair value through P/L trading(*) value through P/L

Balance at 1 January 2014 Total gains or losses: - in profit or loss - in other comprehensive income Purchases Issues Settlement Aggregate transfers into Level 3 Aggregate transfers out of Level 3 Balance at 31 December 2014 (*)

1,973

45,870

3,902

-2,366

-8,654

798 0 39 0 129 -14 6 2,931

1,712 0 3,369 0 -537 7,692 -26,393 31,713

495 -45 514 0 -404 0 0 4,462

-803 0 -77 0 7 3 2 -3,234

-1,071 0 0 -524 1,615 -123 1,123 -7,634

Derivative balances are included within Financial assets or liabilities held for trading.

The following table presents the changes in Level 3 instruments for the year ended 31 December 2013 (in EUR million): Financial Financial assets Financial Financial assets Available for sale liabilities liabilities held for (*) designated at fair held for trading financial assets designated at fair value through P/L trading(*) value through P/L

Balance at 1 January 2013 - in profit or loss - in other comprehensive income Purchases Issues Settlement Aggregate transfers into Level 3 Aggregate transfers out of Level 3 Balance at 31 December 2013 (*)

1,252 -339 0 45 0 -314 1,371 -42 1,973

50,548 -2,755 0 5,374 0 -1,299 448 -6,446 45,870

3,477 -49 235 512 0 -257 0 -16 3,902

-161 15 0 -111 0 -16 -2,113 20 -2,366

-6,973 373 0 0 -513 1,854 -5,317 1,922 -8,654

Derivative balances are included within Financial assets or liabilities held for trading.

2014 Financial Report

177

Total gains or losses on Level 3 instruments in the table below are presented in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2014 as follows (in EUR million):

Financial Financial assets Financial Financial assets Available for sale liabilities liabilities held for (*) designated at fair designated at fair held for trading financial assets value through P/L trading(*) value through P/L Total gains or losses included in profit or loss for the year: - Result on financial operations Total gains or losses recognised in other comprehensive income - available for sale financial assets

798

1,712

495

-803

-1,071

0

0

-45

0

0

495

-803

-1,071

-495

0

0

Total gains or losses for the year included in profit or loss attributable to changes in unrealised gains and losses on assets and liabilities held as at 31 December 2014

- Result on financial operations 798 1,712 - Change in impairment on shares and other variable yield securities, net of reversals 0 0 (*) Derivative balances are included within Financial assets or liabilities held for trading.

Total gains or losses on Level 3 instruments in the table below are presented in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2013 as follows (in EUR million):

Financial Financial assets Financial Financial assets Available for sale liabilities liabilities held for (*) designated at fair designated at fair held for trading financial assets value through P/L trading(*) value through P/L Total gains or losses included in profit or loss for the year: - Result on financial operations Total gains or losses recognised in other comprehensive income - available for sale financial assets

-339

-2,755

-49

15

373

0

0

235

0

0

-49

15

373

49

0

0

Total gains or losses for the year included in profit or loss attributable to changes in unrealised gains and losses on assets and liabilities held as at 31 December 2013

- Result on financial operations -339 -2,755 - Change in impairment on shares and other variable yield securities, net of reversals 0 0 (*) Derivative balances are included within Financial assets or liabilities held for trading.

Change in fair value of financial instruments designated at fair value through profit or loss using a valuation technique based on nonmarket observable input, due to alternative assumptions Although the Group believes that its estimates of fair value are appropriate, the use of different methodologies or assumptions could lead to different measurements of fair value. The potential effect of using reasonable possible alternative non market observable assumptions as input to valuation techniques from which the fair values of financial instruments designated at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) are determined has been quantified as a reduction of approximately EUR 19.7 million using less favourable assumptions and an increase of approximately EUR 32.2 million using more favourable assumptions for 31 December 2014 and a reduction of approximately EUR 34.1 million using less favourable assumptions and an increase of approximately EUR 50.4 million using more favourable assumptions for 31 December 2013.

178

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

The alternative assumptions are used to calculate the fair value of derivatives, borrowings and loans belonging to the level 3 valuation category. Fair value of borrowings and loans in Level 3 is derived from the value of derivatives which hedge these borrowings and loans. Hence the alternative assumptions are first applied to valuation of Level 3 derivatives and then the impact is applied to Level 3 borrowings and loans. Level 3 derivatives can be grouped in four swap types according to underlying asset and valuation model: a. b. c. d.

For single currency, multiple rate swaps, alternative assumptions are applied to forward rate correlations used in calibration of BGM models. For cross currency and FX-linked swaps alternative assumptions are applied to correlations between interest and FX rates used in the calibration of hybrid Black Scholes / Hull & White models. For inflation-linked swaps alternative assumptions are applied to inflation index and real rate volatilities used in the calibration of hybrid Black Scholes / Hull & White models. For equity-linked swaps alternative assumptions are applied to equity or index volatilities and dividend yields (forwards) used in the calibration of hybrid Black Scholes / Hull & White models.

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss Included in financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss is a portfolio of loans hedged by Interest Rates Swaps and Currency Swaps. The maximum credit exposure of the disbursed loans and advances to customers and to credit institutions designated at fair value through profit or loss amounts to EUR 132,259 million (2013: EUR 116,998 million). The cumulative change in fair value of the loans attributable to change in credit risk of Group’s counterparts amounts to a loss of EUR 715.5 million (2013: loss of EUR 402 million). The changes in fair value of financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss attributable to changes in credit risk have been calculated by determining the change in the Expected Credit Loss on these loans. No credit derivatives have been concluded to hedge the credit risk of the financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss.

Financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss The financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss comprise debts evidenced by certificates issued by the Group and hedged by Interest Rate Swaps and Currency Swaps. The cumulative change in fair value of the financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss attributable to change in credit risk of the Group amounts to a profit of EUR - 1,444 million (2013: EUR 503 million). The amount that the Group would contractually be requested to pay at maturity of financial instruments designated at fair value through profit or loss is EUR 42,798 million (2013: EUR 20,340 million) less than the carrying amount as at 31 December 2014.

Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities The disclosures set out in the tables below include financial assets and financial liabilities that: • are offset in the Group's balance sheet; or • are subject to an enforceable master netting arrangement or similar agreement that covers similar financial instruments, irrespective of whether they are offset in the statement of financial position. The similar agreements include global master repurchase agreements. Similar financial instruments include repurchase agreements and reverse repurchase agreements. Financial instruments such as loans and deposits are not disclosed in the tables below unless they are offset in the balance sheet. The Group's derivative transactions that are not transacted on an exchange are entered into under International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) Master Agreements. In general, under such agreements the amounts payable by each party on any day in respect of the same transaction and in the same currency are aggregated into a single net amount being payable by one party to the other. In certain circumstances, for example when an event of default occurs, all outstanding transactions under the agreement are terminated, the termination value is assessed and only a single net amount is payable in settlement of all transactions. The Group's repurchase and reverse repurchase transactions are covered by master agreements with netting terms similar to those of ISDA Master Agreements. The above ISDA and similar master netting arrangements do not meet the criteria for offsetting in the balance sheet. This is because they create a right of set-off of recognised amounts that is enforceable only after termination of outstanding transactions following an event of default, including insolvency or bankruptcy, of either party. The Group receives and accepts collateral in the form of cash and marketable securities in respect of the following transactions: • derivatives; and • repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements.

2014 Financial Report

179

Collateral received in respect of derivatives is subject to the standard industry terms of the ISDA Credit Support Annex. This means that securities received as collateral can be pledged or sold during the term of the transaction but must be returned on maturity of the transaction. The terms also give the Group the right to terminate the related transactions upon the counterparty’s failure to post collateral.

The gross amounts of financial assets and financial liabilities and their net amounts as presented in the balance sheet that are disclosed in the above tables are measured in the balance sheet on the following bases: • derivative assets and liabilities - fair value; • assets and liabilities resulting from sale and repurchase agreements, reverse sale and repurchase agreements and securities lending and borrowing - amortised cost; • loans and advances to customers - amortised cost or fair value; and • amounts owed to customers - amortised cost. The amounts in the above tables that are offset in the balance sheet are measured on the same basis. The tables below reconcile the 'Net amounts of financial assets and financial liabilities presented in the balance sheet', as set out above, to the line items presented in the balance sheet.

Note S – Risk management This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to and its management and control of risks, in particular the primary risks associated with its use of financial instruments. These are: • Credit risk - the risk of loss resulting from client or counterparty default and arising on credit exposure in all forms, including settlement risk; • Market risk - exposure to observable market variables such as interest rates, exchange rates and equity market prices; • Liquidity and funding risk - the risk that the Group is unable to fund assets or meet obligations at a reasonable price or, in extreme situations, at any price; and • Operational risk - the potential loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events. Within the Group, the management and control of risks are handled separately by each entity. As a consequence, risk management information presented in this note distinguishes between the Bank and the Fund. The Bank has established a group risk function to strengthen the risk management of the overall Group and to provide oversight of all the risks which the Group is subject to. The high-level principles of the Bank’s risk management on a consolidated level are set out in the Group Risk Management Charter. The Group Risk Management Charter aims at ensuring a group-wide view of the Bank’s risks and integrated approach to risk management.

S.1. Risk Management Organisation S.1.1. Risk Management Organisation of the Bank The Bank aligns its risk management systems to changing economic conditions and evolving regulatory standards. It adapts them on an ongoing basis as best market practice develops. Systems are in place to control and report on the main risks inherent in its operations, i.e. credit, market and operational risks. The Bank’s objective is to analyse and manage risks so as to obtain the strongest protection for its assets, its financial result, and consequently its capital. While the Bank is not subject to full regulation, it aims to comply with the relevant EU banking directives and the recommendations of the banking supervisors of the EU Member States, EU legislation and the competent supranational bodies, such as the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS). The following sections disclose the credit, market and liquidity risks to which the Bank is exposed on its activities performed on own resources. The Risk Management Directorate (RM) independently identifies, assesses, monitors and reports credit, market and operational risks to which the Bank is exposed in a comprehensive and consistent way and under a consistent approach. Within a commonly defined framework, whereby the segregation of duties is preserved, RM is independent of the Front Offices and provides second opinion on all proposals made which have risk implications. The Director General of RM reports, for credit, market and operational risks, to the Management Committee and meets regularly with the Audit Committee to discuss topics relating to credit, market and operational risks. He is also responsible for overseeing risk reporting to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors. Two risk-oriented committees support the implementation of the Bank’s risk policies. The Credit Risk Assessment Group (CRAG) is a high-level forum for discussing relevant credit risk issues arising in the course of the Bank’s activities and for advising the Management Committee on these. Its members are the Directors General of the Operations, Projects, RM, Transaction Monitoring & Restructuring (TMR), Finance and Legal Affairs Directorates. The CRAG is intended to complement, and does not replace, the existing case-by-case review of lending operations, which remains central to the loan approval process. An Asset / Liability Committee (ALCO), made up of the Directors General of the Operations, Finance and RM Directorates, the Head of Financial Control and the Chief Economist, provides a high-level forum for debating the Bank’s Asset / Liability Management (ALM) matters and for making proposals in this field to the Management Committee. It promotes and facilitates the dialogue among the Directorates represented in it, while providing a wider perspective on, and enhancing their understanding of, the main financial risks. The Bank continues to develop its capacity to manage loans post signature. For significant parts of the portfolio this is the responsibility of TMR, a Directorate independent from RM. TMR is focusing on monitoring higher risk counterparts and certain forms of security and it also manages transactions requiring particular attention. All of its proposals which have credit risk implications are subject to an independent second opinion by RM. S.1.1.1

Risk measurement and reporting system

Risks are assessed both under normal circumstances and possible stressed conditions, with the purpose to quantify their impact on the Bank’s solvency, liquidity and operations. Risk measurements combine metrics such as expected and unexpected loss estimations based on historical default probabilities together with scenario-based and sensitivity analyses. Worst case scenarios aim at capturing extreme, low probability events which could impact the Bank. Information on the risk measures described above are presented and explained to the Management Committee and to the Board of Directors on a monthly basis. The reports include aggregate credit exposures, credit concentration analyses and other key portfolio risk indicators, as well as Value at Risk (VaR), sensitivity analyses, liquidity indicators and cumulative funding gaps.

182

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

The Bank maintains two reserves for the expected and unexpected losses – the General Loan Reserve (GLR) and the Special Activities Reserve (SAR), respectively. The General Loan Reserve is a dedicated reserve for the expected loss of the Bank's loan portfolio. It is calculated monthly according to the evolution of the underlying assets and reported to the Bank's senior management. The Special Activities Reserve is a dedicated reserve for the capital allocation covering the unexpected loss of those activities which have a risk profile higher than what is generally accepted by the Bank, including venture capital activities undertaken by the EIF on the Bank’s behalf. It is calculated monthly according to the evolution of the underlying assets. S.1.1.2.

The Bank’s financial risk tolerance

As a public institution, the Bank does not aim to make profits from speculative exposures to financial risks, setting its financial risk tolerance to a minimum level as defined by approved limits, and applying a conservative financial framework. As a consequence, the Bank does not consider its treasury or funding activities as profit- maximising centres, even though performance objectives are attached to these activities. Investment activities are conducted within the primary objective of protection of the capital invested. With respect to exposures arising from the Bank’s lending and borrowing operations, the main principle of the Bank’s financial risk policy is therefore to ensure that all material financial risks are hedged. All new types of transactions introducing operational or financial risks must be authorised by the Management Committee, after the approval of the New Products Committee, and are managed within approved limits. S.1.1.3.

Sustainability of revenue and self-financing capacity

The Bank’s ALM policy forms an integral part of the Bank’s overall financial risk management. It reflects the expectations of the main stakeholders of the Bank in terms of stability of earnings, preservation of the economic value of own funds, and the self-financing of the Bank’s growth in the long term. To achieve these aims, the ALM policy employs medium to long term indexation for the investment of own funds to promote stability of revenues and enhance overall returns. This indexation policy implies an exposure to medium to long term yields and is not influenced by any short term views on trends in interest rates. This is accomplished by targeting a duration for the Bank’s own funds of between 4.5 and 5.5 years.

S.1.2. Risk Management Organisation of the Fund (EIF) Most of the Private Equity (PE), Venture Capital and Portfolio Guarantees, Securitisation & Microfinance (GSM) operations for both entities of the Group are managed by the Fund. The mandate of the Fund is to support small and mid-size enterprise (SME) finance for start-up, growth and development within European Union objectives for SME. The Fund aligns its risk management systems to changing economic conditions and evolving regulatory standards. It therefore adapts them on an on-going basis. Credit, market and operational systems are in place to control and report on the main risks inherent to its operations. Risk management is embedded in the corporate culture of EIF, based on a three-lines-of-defence model permeating all areas of EIF’s business functions and processes: (i) front office, (ii) independent risk functions and (iii) audit and assurance. Investment and Risk Committees (IRCs) chaired by the Head of Risk and Portfolio Management advice the Chief Executive and the Deputy Chief Executive on each and every transaction. IRCs also oversee risk and investment-related aspects of the EIF portfolio, inter alia: approving transaction rating/grading, impairment and provisioning actions, relevant market risk events and potential stress testing. Finally, the IRCs oversee the Enterprise Risk arising from EIF’s role as a fund manager. Risk and Portfolio Management actions form part of the assurance process presided by the EIF Audit Board. Moreover, within the EIB Group context, the Fund’s Risk and Portfolio Management Department operates in close contact with the European Investment Bank’s Risk Management Directorate, particularly with regard to Group risk exposure relating to guarantee operations, the PE operations under the Bank’s Risk Capital Resources mandate (RCR) and general EIF policy matters. The Fund’s treasury management has been fully outsourced to the Bank under a treasury management agreement signed by both parties and mandating the responsible EIB services to perform selection, execution, settlement and monitoring of transactions. Management follows treasury guidelines annexed to the agreement, which mirror closely the relevant sections of the EIB’s own treasury guidelines. S.1.2.1.

Risk assessment private equity

Under its private equity operations, the Fund has a fund-of-funds approach, taking minority equity participations in venture capital, private equity and mezzanine funds managed by mostly independent teams in order to leverage further commitments from a wide range of investors. The Fund’s PE operations include investments in funds focussed on seed- and early-stage capital, but also investments in well-established funds targeting mid- and later-stage or mezzanine investments, which, generally speaking, have a lower risk profile. Over the last years, the Fund has developed a tool-set to design, manage and monitor portfolios of PE funds tailored to the dynamics of this market place, going beyond investing in top quartile funds. This tool-set is based on an internal model, the Grading-based Economic Model (GEM), which allows the Fund to better assess and verify each funds’ but also each portfolio of funds’ valuations, risks and expected future cash flows and performances. Before committing to a PE fund, the Fund assigns a grading which is based on the outcome of an extensive due diligence performed by the Fund’s transaction team and reviewed by its risk management team. During the funds’ lifetimes, gradings are periodically reviewed with a frequency and intensity depending on the level of risk.

2014 Financial Report

183

These efforts, supported by the development of a proprietary IT system and an integrated software (front to back), improve the investment decision-making process and the management of the portfolio’s financial risks and of liquidity, in particular enabling forward-looking and stresstest based decision making. S.1.2.2.

Risk assessment guarantees

The Fund extends portfolio guarantees to financial intermediaries involved in SME financing and provides credit enhancement to SME securitisation transactions. By taking on these risks, it facilitates access to funding, and, in turn, it helps to finance SMEs. For its guarantee & securitisation business, over the last years, the Fund has developed a tool-set to analyse portfolio guarantees and structured finance transactions in line with best market practices. Before the Fund enters legally into a guarantee transaction, an internal rating is assigned to each new own risk guarantee transaction in accordance with the Fund’s Credit Risk Policy and Model Review Guidelines. The rating is based on internal models, which analyse and summarise the transaction’s credit quality (expected loss concept), considering not only quantitative parameters but also qualitative aspects. Guarantee transactions are monitored regularly, at least quarterly; their statuses are regularly reviewed by EIF IRCs which, depending on their performances, may review their internal ratings. A four-eye principle applies throughout the process, with actions initiated by the front office and reviewed by Risk Management. The guarantees portfolio is valued according to a mark-to model approach under the IFRS principles. The main impact on the valuation of the transactions in the portfolio stems from the assigned ratings (internal and external as the case may be) and the possible subsequent rating changes. The EIF’s monitoring follows potential negative rating migrations and provides the basis for appropriate management of transactions. The Fund’s stress testing methodology is applied at the outset of a transaction and throughout the life of the portfolio, i.e. its scenario analysis with regard to downgrades and defaults in the portfolio and related impacts on capital allocation, expected losses, as well as on the profit and loss. As is the case for PE, stress tests on the guarantee portfolio are presented regularly to the EIF Board of Directors. Moreover, within the EIB Group context, the Fund’s Risk and Portfolio Management Department operates in close contact with the European Investment Bank’s Risk Management Directorate, particularly with regard to Group risk exposure relating to guarantee and securitisation operations, the PE operations under the Bank’s Risk Capital Resources mandate (RCR), the different windows under the Bank’s EIB Group Risk Enhancement Mandate (EREM) and general EIF policy matters.

S.2. Credit risk S.2.1. Credit risk policies Credit risk concerns mainly the Group’s lending activities and, to a lesser extent, treasury instruments such as fixed-income securities held in the investment and operational portfolios, certificates of deposit and interbank term deposits as well as the derivative transactions of the Group and the Fund’s guarantee transactions funded by own resources. No credit risk is attached to the Group’s venture capital operations, which are performed entirely through equity participations and are, hence, only exposed to market risk. As regards lending, treasury and derivatives operations, credit risk is managed by an independent Risk Management Directorate under the direct responsibility of the Management Committee of the Bank. The Group has thus established an operationally independent structure for determining and monitoring credit risk. The Group's policies on credit risk are approved by the respective governing bodies. They set out minimum credit quality levels for both borrowers and guarantors in lending operations and identify the types of security that are deemed acceptable. They also detail the minimum requirements which loan contracts must meet in terms of key legal clauses and other contractual stipulations to ensure that the Bank's position ranks at least equal to that of other senior lenders, with prompt access to security when required. In addition, via a counterparty and sector limit system, the credit policies ensure an acceptable degree of diversification in the Group's loan portfolio. The Group's limit system draws its inspiration from the traditional prudential regulations on concentration and large exposure management contained in the EU banking directives, though the Group generally adopts a more restrictive approach to risk-taking than commercial banks. The Group’s policies on credit risk also set out the minimum credit quality of counterparties of derivatives and treasury transactions as well as the contractual framework for each type of transaction. As regards lending, treasury and derivatives operations, credit risk is managed by the independent Risk Management Directorate (RM) under the direct responsibility of the Management Committee of the Bank. The Bank has thus established an operationally independent structure for determining and monitoring credit risk. Following the capital increase in 2012, the Bank expanded its Credit Risk Policy Guidelines by a dedicated chapter on the remedy of noncompliance events with bank intermediaries, and a dedicated chapter for incremental new lending in connection with the additional capital. The Fund manages exposures and risks in the frame of conservative policies deriving from statutory provisions and Credit Risk Policy Guidelines approved by the Fund’s Board of Directors or guidelines as set out under mandates. Credit policies undergo periodic adaptations to incorporate evolving operational circumstances and respond to new mandates that the Group may receive from its shareholders. Management of credit risk is based, firstly, on the level of credit risk vis-à-vis counterparties and, secondly, on an analysis of the solvency of counterparties.

184

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

S.2.2. Maximum exposure to credit risk without taking into account any collateral and other credit enhancements The table below shows the maximum exposure to credit risk for the components of the balance sheet, including derivatives. The maximum exposure is shown gross, before the effect of mitigation through the use of collateral agreements (Note S.2.3.4).

Credit risk measurement for loans and advances to customers and credit institutions

An internal loan grading system (based on the expected loss methodology) is implemented for lending operations. This is an important part of the loan appraisal process and of credit risk monitoring, as well as providing a reference point for pricing credit risk when appropriate. The loan grading (LG) system comprises the methodologies, processes, databases and IT systems supporting the assessment of credit risk in lending operations and the quantification of expected loss estimates. It summarises a large amount of information with the purpose of offering a relative ranking of loans’ credit risks. LG reflect the present value of the estimated level of the lifetime “expected loss”, this being the product of the probability of default, the exposure at risk and the loss severity in the case of default. LG are used for the following purposes: • as an aid to a finer and more quantitative assessment of lending risks; • as help in distributing monitoring efforts; • as a description of the loan’s portfolio quality at a given date; • as a benchmark for calculating the annual additions to the General loan reserve; and • as an input in risk-pricing decisions. The following factors are used to determine an LG: i) The borrower’s creditworthiness: RM independently reviews borrowers and assesses their creditworthiness based on internal methodologies and external data. In line with the Basel II Internal Ratings Based Approach chosen, the Bank has developed an internal rating methodology (IRM) to determine the internal ratings of borrowers and guarantors. This is based on a set of scoring sheets specific to defined counterparty types. ii) The default correlation: it quantifies the chances of simultaneous financial difficulties arising for both the borrower and the guarantor. The higher the correlation between the borrower and the guarantor’s default, the lower the value of the guarantee and therefore the lower (worse) the LG. iii) The value of guarantee instruments and of securities: this value is assessed on the basis of the combination of the issuer’s creditworthiness and the type of instrument used. iv) The contractual framework: a sound contractual framework will add to the loan’s quality and enhance its LG. v) The loan’s duration or, more generally, the cash-flows of the loan: all else being equal, the longer the loan, the higher the risk of incurring difficulties in the servicing of the loan. A loan's expected loss is computed by combining the five elements discussed above and is used as a component of the fair value measurement technique used for loans which meet the eligibility criteria of the amended fair value option and which have been designated on initial recognition at fair value through profit or loss. Depending on the level of this expected loss, a loan is assigned to one of the following LG classes listed below. A

Prime quality loans: there are three sub-categories. A° comprises all EU sovereign risks, i.e. loans granted to or fully, explicitly and unconditionally guaranteed by Member States, where no repayment difficulties are expected and for which an expected loss of 0% is allocated (based on the Bank’s preferred creditor status and statutory protection). A+ denotes loans granted to (or guaranteed by) entities other than Member States, with no expectation of deterioration over their term. A- includes those lending operations where there is some

2014 Financial Report

185

doubt about the maintenance of their current status (for instance because of a long maturity, or for the high volatility of the future price of an otherwise excellent collateral), but where any downside is expected to be limited. B

High quality loans: these represent an asset class with which the EIB feels comfortable, although a minor deterioration is not ruled out in the future. B+ and B- are used to denote the relative likelihood of the possibility of such deterioration occurring.

C

Good quality loans: an example could be unsecured loans to solid banks and corporates with a 7-year bullet, or equivalent amortising, maturity at disbursement, with adequate protective clauses.

D

This rating class represents the borderline between "acceptable quality" loans (D+) and those that have a risk profile worse than generally accepted by the Bank (D-) and which are classified as Special Activities. These are undertaken under specific policies, including size restrictions, the allocation of Special Activity Reserve (SAR) and dedicated risk pricing rules. Loans in the D- category, which have experienced deterioration from their original better classification, are subject to heightened monitoring

E

This LG category includes loans that have explicitly been approved as Special Activities with a risk profile worse than generally accepted, and loans which in the course of their lives have experienced severe problems and their sliding into a situation of loss cannot be excluded. A corresponding allocation to the Special Activities Reserve is being made and the loans are subject to close monitoring. The sub-classes E+ and E- further differentiate the risk profile of the loans, with those operations graded E- being in a position where there is a possibility that debt service cannot be maintained on a timely basis and therefore some form of debt restructuring may be required, possibly leading to an impairment loss.

F

F (fail) denotes loans representing unacceptable risks. F- graded loans can only arise out of outstanding transactions that have experienced unforeseen, exceptional and dramatic adverse circumstances after signature. All operations where there is a loss of principal are graded F and a specific provision is raised.

Generally, loans internally graded D- or below are placed on the Watch List. However, if a loan was originally approved with a risk profile of D- or weaker, it will only be placed on the Watch List as a result of a material credit event causing a deterioration of its LG classification below the one at approval. In addition to the deal-by-deal analysis of each loan, the EIB, also developed a portfolio view of credit exposures via its Economic Capital framework, integrating the concentration and correlation effects created by the dependence of various obligors on common risk factors. By adding a portfolio dimension of credit risks and by focussing on unexpected losses (i.e. losses which may occur on top of the expected ones up to a certain level of confidence), it is possible to complement the LG’s deal-by-deal approach and thus provide a finer and more comprehensive risk assessment of the credit risks in the EIB’s loan book. S.2.3.2.

Loans secured by Guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States

Loans outside the European Union (apart from those under the Facilities (1)) are, in the last resort, secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States (loans in the ACP Countries and the OCT). The agreements decided by the Council of the European Union on 14 April 1997 (Decision 97/256/EC) introduced the concept of risk sharing whereby certain loans of the Bank, including some which are secured by third-party guarantees with respect to the commercial risk, are covered by the budgetary guarantee applying in the case of political risks solely arising from currency non-transferability, expropriation, war and civil disturbance. In accordance with the terms of the Guarantees, the European Union and the Member States secure up to 65%, 70%, 75% and 100% of pool of signed (2) operations in each portfolio. This results in an effectively full coverage of the Group's exposure. For this reason, the Group deems the credit risk associated to each individual loan as fully covered and therefore excludes them from the section S.2.3 (Group's lending activities). The carrying value of the disbursed part of loans signed under this category amounts to EUR 23,795 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 22,340 million) and the undisbursed part amount to EUR 15,372 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 13,718 million). These amounts also include loans granted to current European Union Member States but granted before their accession to the European Union and are guaranteed by the European Union budget or Member States.

S.2.3.3.

Analysis of lending credit risk exposure

In order to limit the credit risk on its loan portfolio, the Group lends only to counterparties with demonstrated creditworthiness over the longer term and with sound guarantees. In detail, the tables below show the maximum exposure to credit risk on loans (the repayable on demand and other loans and advances to credit institutions are not included) signed and disbursed as well as the part of the exposure that has been signed but not disbursed yet for all exposure where the Group is at risk. Therefore, loans outside the European Union secured by the European Union budget or the Member States are not included (Note S.2.3.2).

(1)

Loans granted under Article 16 (previously Article 18) of the Bank’s statute and loans granted under the Pre Accession Facility, the Mediterranean Partnership Facility, the Energy Sustainability Facility and the EFTA Facility. These loans, granted under the Facilities, are not secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States. Therefore, lending under the Facilities is from the Bank’s own resources and at the Bank’s own risk. (2) Under the Guarantee Agreement with the Commission signed on 1 and 29 August 2007, all European Union guaranteed operations signed on and after 17 April 2007 shall be covered up to 65% of "the aggregate amount of credits disbursed". The residual risk borne by the Group in connection with operations is managed in accordance with the Group’s fundamental credit rules and procedures.

186

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

2014 (in EUR million) Corporate Bank Public State Total disbursed(5)(6)(7) Signed not disbursed(5)(6)(7)

Borrower

Corporate 43,511 23,541 2,753 0 69,805 8,441

Guarantor Bank 26,051 32,213 478 0 58,742 7,713

Public 7,005 29,251 13,415 0 49,671 9,903

State 21,905 25,997 26,469 0 74,371 12,576

Corporate 39,406 25,459 3,359 0 68,224 10,101

Guarantor Bank 26,994 30,729 518 0 58,241 8,030

Public 7,441 32,696 12,583 0 52,720 9,903

State 20,367 18,228 25,818 0 64,413 10,871

2013 (in EUR million) Corporate Bank Borrower Public State Total disbursed(5)(6)(7) Signed not disbursed(5)(6)(7) (4)

(5) (6) (7)

Not guaranteed(4)

Total disbursed

Signed not disbursed

65,491 16,846 56,087 42,490 180,914 45,421

163,963 127,848 99,202 42,490 433,503

26,088 27,334 22,815 7,817

Not guaranteed(4)

Total disbursed

Signed not disbursed

60,704 16,021 47,813 37,274 161,812 40,721

154,912 123,133 90,091 37,274 405,410

24,236 27,109 19,495 8,786

84,054

79,626

These amounts include loans for which no formal guarantee independent from the borrower and the loan itself was required, the borrower’s level of solvency itself representing adequate security. In the event of certain occurrences, appropriate contractual clauses ensure the Bank’s right to access independent security. These amounts include loans granted under Facilities. These amounts do not include Loan substitutes (2014: EUR 16,525 million; 2013: EUR 13,197 million). These amounts exclude loans to current European Union Member States but granted before their accession to the European Union and guaranteed by the European Union budget or the Member States.

Regarding the lending activities, the Group’s total direct exposure (3) to the banking sector amounts to EUR 155,182 million at the end of December 2014 (2013: EUR 150,243 million), which is equal to 30.0% (2013: 31.0%) of the total of EUR 517,557 million in loans disbursed and undisbursed as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 485,036 million). Unsecured loans to corporates at the end of December 2014 amounted to EUR 80,656 million(3), (2013: EUR 72,647 million). Unsecured exposure to corporate clients is controlled by bilateral limits and generally individual exposures are capped at 5% of Group’s Own Funds. The Group has also introduced a number of sector limits. S.2.3.3.1. Credit quality on loans Loans internally graded A to D+ represent 95.4% of the loan portfolios as at 31 December 2014, compared with 94.8% at 31 December 2013. The share of loans internally graded D- and below (for which allocations to the Special Activities Reserve are being made), was 4.6% (2013: 5.2%) of the risk portfolio, corresponding to EUR 23.6 billion (2013: EUR 25.0 billion). The credit quality of the loan portfolio stabilised during the year and the Bank’s efforts in mitigating credit risk resulted in a significant increase in loan collateralisation. Both these factors contributed to an improvement in the LG breakdown and led to a decrease of the internal Watch List of loans which are subject to heightened monitoring (all loans graded D- or below, if signed at D+ or above, and all other loans signed at D- or below for which a material credit event has been diagnosed and the LG lowered) to EUR 8,967 million (2013: EUR 10,216 million). To mitigate credit risk, the Group uses, amongst others, the following instruments: • Guarantees issued by third parties of acceptable credit quality; • Financial collaterals; • Mortgages, claims on revenues etc. All credit risk mitigation instruments accepted by the Group have been defined in the Credit Risk Policy Guidelines.

(3)

Including exposure signed but not disbursed yet.

2014 Financial Report

187

Credit quality analysis per type of borrower The tables below show the credit quality analysis of the Group’s loans portfolio as at 31 December 2014 and 31 December 2013 by the Loan Grading application, based on the exposures signed (disbursed and undisbursed). Sovereign

High Grade

Total

A0, P 21,739 25,288 27,120 48,236 122,383

A to B66,966 102,485 88,962 373 258,786

2013

Sovereign

High Grade

A0, P 18,965 16,804 26,483 44,004 106,256

A to B69,156 107,957 77,300 350 254,763

2014

(in EUR million) Borrower

Corporate Bank Public State

(in EUR million) Borrower

Corporate Bank Public State

Total

Standard Grade C 50,211 16,732 3,601 1,517 72,061

Min. Accept. Risk D+ 31,822 7,943 950 84 40,799

D- and below 19,313 2,734 1,384 97 23,528

Standard Grade C 40,925 14,465 3,323 1,505 60,218

Min. Accept. Risk D+ 29,562 7,987 1,082 200 38,831

D- and below 20,541 3,030 1,397 0 24,968

High Risk

High Risk

Total

190,051 155,182 122,017 50,307 517,557

Total

179,149 150,243 109,585 46,059 485,036

Credit risk exposure for each internal risk rating The Group uses an internal rating methodology in line with the Internal ratings based approach under Basel II. The majority of the Group’s counterparties have been assigned an internal rating according to this methodology. The table below shows a breakdown of the Group’s loan portfolio by the better of the borrower’s or guarantor’s internal ratings , where available. In cases where an internal rating is not available, the external rating has been used for this analysis. The table shows both the exposures signed (disbursed and undisbursed) and the risk-weighted exposures, based on an internal methodology that the Group uses for limit management.

Risk-weights are percentages (from 0% to 100%) applied to the outstanding nominal amounts of loans or other credit exposures (e.g. deposits, derivatives and securities). They depend on the perceived credit risk represented both by the types of claims and by the nature of the main obligator or guarantor. The main risk-weights are 0% (Member States, German and Austrian Länder), 20% (public institutions), 50% (banks) and 100% (corporates). The Group continually monitors events affecting its borrowers and guarantors, particularly banks. In particular, the Group is assessing on a case by case basis its contractual rights in case of rating deterioration and is seeking mitigating measures. It is also closely following the renewals of bank guarantees received for its loans to ensure that these are replaced or action is taken in a timely manner. Taking into account the above and the Group's contractual protections, which if breached enable the Group to negotiate remedies, there was no need for a collective impairment allowance as at 31 December 2014 and 2013. The Group did not record impairments in respect of its EU sovereign and sovereign guaranteed exposure as at the year end as the preferred creditor status of the Bank as well as of the EIF and the protection given by the Bank’s Statute are deemed to guarantee a full recovery of the Group’s assets on maturity.

188

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

The table below discloses information regarding the sovereign credit risk on loans granted inside the European Union and outside the European Union granted under the Facilities and under the risk-sharing operations:

In addition, as stated in the note S.2.3.2, loans outside the European Union (apart from those under the Facilities) are in the last resort secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States (loans in the ACP Countries and the OCT). The nominal amount of loans signed under this category as at 31 December 2014 amounts to EUR 46,448 million (2013: EUR 42,286 million). Out of this EUR 46,448 million, EUR 43,376 million (2013: EUR 39,800 million) were guaranteed by the European Union and EUR 3,072 million by the Member States (2013: EUR 2,486 million). S.2.3.3.2. Risk concentrations of maximum exposure to credit risk on loans The Group’s loans portfolio can be analysed by the following geographical regions (based on the country of the borrower):

Including loans outside the EU, approved by the Board of Governors according to Article 16 (previously Article 18) of the Bank’s Statute, as well as loans in EFTA countries. Enlargement Countries as per end 2013 include Albania, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Iceland, Kosovo, Macedonia (FYROM), Montenegro, Serbia and Turkey. Loans in Partner Countries include loans under the Mediterranean Partnership Facility, the Pre-Accession Facility, and Risk Sharing loans. Risk-weights are percentages (from 0% to 100%) applied to the outstanding nominal amounts of loans or other credit exposures (e.g. deposits, derivatives and securities). They depend on the perceived credit risk represented both by the types of claims and by the nature of the main obligator or guarantor. The main risk-weights are 0% (Member States, German and Austrian Länder), 20% (public institutions), 50% (banks) and 100% (corporates).

2014 Financial Report

189

A critical element of risk management is to ensure adequate diversification of credit exposures. The Group tracks its global exposure by industry (shown in the following table), paying particular attention to industries that might be cyclical, volatile or undergoing substantial changes. An industry sector analysis of the Group’s loan portfolio (based on the industry sector of the borrower) is as follows:

Risk-weights are percentages (from 0% to 100%) applied to the outstanding nominal amounts of loans or other credit exposures (e.g. deposits, derivatives and securities). They depend on the perceived credit risk represented both by the types of claims and by the nature of the main obligator or guarantor. The main risk-weights are 0% (Member States, German and Austrian Länder), 20% (public institutions), 50% (banks) and 100% (corporates). The category “Services” includes the credit exposure of the banking sector. At the end of 2014, the total amount of loans directly exposed to counterparts of the banking sector amounted to EUR 155,182 million (EUR 150,243 million at the end of 2013), or EUR 59,307 million in risk-weighted terms (EUR 59,664 million at the end of 2013). Exposure to bank counterparts is subject to limits approved by the Management Committee. In specific cases, available limits have been temporarily suspended, restricted or withdrawn. The Group systematically follows on daily basis publicly available news and, in particular, external rating movements.

The Group places limits on the maximum amount that can be lent to a single borrower, group of debtors or sectors. In addition, it follows the evolution of credit risk concentration using the concept of Credit Value at Risk (CVaR). This is done using a tool for assessing portfolio risk due to changes in debt value caused by changes in obligor credit quality. Importantly, this methodology assesses risk within the full context of a portfolio and addresses the correlation of credit quality moves across obligors. This allows the Group to directly calculate the diversification benefits or potential over-concentrations across the portfolio. The table below shows the concentration indexes the Group follows as at 31 December 2014 and 31 December 2013:

Largest nominal and risk-weighted Group exposures(1) Nominal exposures (% of Group Loan Portfolio): – Top 3 – Top 5 – Top 10

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

4.7% 7.5% 11.7%

4.9% 7.5% 12.2%

6 2 0 1

7 2 0 0

75.2%

74.0%

N° of exposures (% of Group Own Funds): – over 10% – over 15% – over 20% N° of SSSR exposures over 5% of Group Own Funds(2) Sum of all large risk-weighted exposures (% of Group Own Funds)(3) (1) (2)

(3)

Including also the net market exposure of treasury operations. The term "single signature and single risk” (or for brevity, "unsecured” or “SSSR”) is used to indicate those lending operations where the Group, irrespective of the number of signatures provided, has no genuine recourse to an independent third party, or to other forms of autonomous security. The Group defines a Large Individual Exposure as a consolidated group exposure that, when computed in risk-weighted terms, is at or above 5% of the Group’s own funds. This definition applies to borrowers or guarantors, excluding loans to Member States and loans fully covered by an explicit guarantee from, or secured by bonds issued by Member States.

S.2.3.4.

Collateral on loans

In addition to the guarantees received by the Group on its lending exposures as disclosed in the note S.2.3.3, the Group also uses pledges of financial securities. These pledges are formalised through a Pledge Agreement, enforceable in the relevant jurisdiction. The portfolio of collateral received in pledge contracts amounts to EUR 33,755 million at the end of 2014 (2013: EUR 33,902 million). The fair value of the portfolio of collateral received by the Group under pledge contracts that the Group is allowed to sell or repledge amounts to EUR 16,989 million (2013: EUR 12,903 million). None of these collaterals has been sold or re-pledged to third parties.

190

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

Fair value of collateral held against disbursed loans is shown below:

(in EUR million)

Gross exposure

1. Against individually impaired 2. Against collectively impaired 3. Against past due but not impaired (5) 4. Against neither past due nor impaired 5. Against fair value through profit and loss Total 2014

956 0 502

Bonds 0 0 39

304,637 151,203 457,298

27,387 3,910 31,336

Collateral held Equities Cash 0 0 0 0 0 200 326 32 358

1,738 123 2,061

Total 0 0 239 29,451 4,065 33,755

Net exposure 956(4) 0 263 275,186 147,138 423,543

Total 2013 357,751 30,655 654 2,593 33,902 323,849 The carrying value of loans individually impaired amounts to EUR 956 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 784 million). Impairments on these loans have been accounted for and amount to EUR 483.1 million as of 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 361.4 million). The Group has also received additional security from the counterparties of these loans in the form of debts acknowledgement. (5) Above 90 days (4)

S.2.3.5 Arrears on loans Amounts in arrears are identified, monitored and reported according to the procedures defined into the bank-wide “Financial Monitoring Guidelines and Procedures”. These procedures are adopted for all loans managed by the EIB. Loans not secured by global guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States: As of 31 December 2014, the arrears above 90 days on loans on own resources not secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States amount to EUR 87.3 million (2013: EUR 80.6 million). The outstanding principal amount related to these arrears is EUR 327.1 million as of 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 77.4 million). These arrears on loans are covered by an impairment of EUR 267.8 million (2013: EUR 78.2 million). Loans secured by guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States: Loans for projects located outside the European Union and carried out on the basis of mandates are guaranteed by the European Union, the Member States or on a risk-sharing basis. For such loans, if an instalment remains unpaid, the primary guarantee is first called, where available, otherwise the guarantee of the Member States or of the European Union is officially invoked. According to the guarantee agreements, each unpaid instalment is called individually. As of 31 December 2014, these arrears above 90 days amount to EUR 10 million (2013: EUR 9.7 million). Loans called under guarantees of the European Union budget or the Member States: During 2014 EUR 58.7 million have been called under the guarantee of the European Union budget and nothing under the Member States guarantee. Corresponding amounts in 2013 were EUR 63.3 million and EUR 0.7 million respectively. The table below gives an overview of the arrears above 90 days on loans:

Loans not secured by EU or Member State guarantees Amount in arrears (EUR'000) Related principal outstanding (EUR'000) Loans secured by EU or Member State guarantees (callable) Amount in arrears (EUR'000) Related principal outstanding (EUR'000) Loans called under the EU or Member State guarantees Amount called (during the year) (EUR'000) Cumulative amount called and not refunded as at year end (EUR'000) 1

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

87,253 327,081

80,6031 77,413

9,999 175,156

9,662 175,156

58,707 270,892

63,968 205,395

The amount in arrears is higher than the related principal outstanding since it includes accrued interest, penalties and fees.

S.2.3.6.

Securitised loans and loan substitutes

Regarding the Group’s exposure to securitised loans and loan substitutes, this portfolio comprises Covered Bonds and Asset Backed Securities (ABS). Covered Bonds offer full recourse to the issuer, while ABS are issued by Special Purpose Vehicles backing the underlying issues. Some of these transactions have been structured by adding a credit or project related remedies, thus offering additional recourse. As of 31 December 2014, the securitised loans and loan substitutes amount to EUR 20,195 million (2013: EUR 18,685 million). This amount is composed of EUR 16,525 million (2013: EUR 13,179 million) of loan substitutes included in debt securities portfolio (Note B.2) and of EUR 3,670 million (2013: EUR 5,506 million) of securitised loans included in loans and advances to credit institutions and to customers (Note D).

2014 Financial Report

191

The following table summarises the breakdown of the securitised loans and loan substitutes portfolio by asset class:

While Covered Bonds are mostly backed by residential mortgage pools in the majority of ABS structures the securitised assets are SME loans or leases. Aside from eight Diversified Payments Rights (DPR) transactions with Turkish promoters and three Turkish Covered Bonds (amounting to EUR 939 million (2013: EUR 894 million)), all the promoters of the Bank’s Loan Substitutes portfolio are domiciled in the European Union, with the majority being located in Spain (63%), in Italy (14%) and in Portugal (5%). EUR 1,109 million (6%) of the outstanding securitised loans have one external AAA rating, EUR 1,218 million (6%) have at least one AA rating, EUR 12,971 million (64%) at least one single A rating, EUR 4,405 million (22%) a BBB rating, EUR 255 million (1%) a BB rating and EUR 237 million (1%) have B or unidentified rating. During 2014, loan substitutes with a total volume of EUR 6,577 million (2013: EUR 4,227 million) experienced external rating downgrades, out of which, EUR 2,575 million were also upgraded during the same period. Additionally, a further EUR 5,458 million of loan substitutes experienced external rating upgrades during 2014. The Group’s securitised loan and loan substitute portfolio continues to perform as scheduled. Embedded credit mitigants and requirements imposed by the regulation and rating agencies are the initial remedies which are triggered in case of credit event on the issuer. As mentioned above, in some ABS transactions credit or project remedies are available and represent a second way out. Overall no loan substitute transaction is on the Bank’s Watch List. Loan renegotiation and forbearance The Group considers loans to be forborne if in response to adverse changes in the financial position of a borrower the Group renegotiates the original terms of the contractual arrangements with this borrower affecting directly the future cash flows of the financial instrument, which may result in a loss to the Group. However, the financial impact of restructuring activities is in general limited to impairment losses, if any, as financial neutrality is generally applied by the Group and reflected in the renegotiated pricing conditions of the operations restructured. In the normal course of business, the Loan Grading (LG) of the loans in question would have deteriorated and the loan would have been included in the Watch List before renegotiation. Once renegotiated, the Group will continue to closely monitor these loans. If the renegotiated payment terms will not recover the original carrying amount of the asset, it will be considered as impaired. The corresponding impairment losses will be calculated based on the forecasted cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate. The need for impairment for all loans whose LG deteriorated to E- is assessed regularly; all loans with a LG of F require impairment. Once the Loan Grading of a loan has improved sufficiently, it will be removed from the Watch List in line with the procedures of the Group. Forbearance measures and practices undertaken by the Group’s restructuring team during the reporting period includes extension of maturity, deferral of capital only, deferral of capital and interest and capitalisation of arrears. Such forbearance measures do not lead to the derecognition of the underlying operation. Exposures subject to changes in contractual terms which do not affect future cash flows, such as collateral or other security arrangements or the waiver of contractual rights under covenants, are not considered as forborne and hence those events are not considered as sufficient to indicate impairment on their own.

192

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

Operations subject to forbearance measures are considered by the Group as forborne until their final maturity and are reported as such in the table below.

Interest income in respect of forborne operations Exposures written off (following the termination/sale of the operation)

Forbearance measures

Other

Contractual repayment and termination (1)

31.12.2014

0

-28

291

31.12.2013

Extension of maturities

Deferral of capital only

Deferral of capital and interest

Public

319

0

0

0

Bank

103

0

0

0

0

-78

25

Corporate

669

112

346

129

106

-412

950

1,091

112

346

129

106

-518

1,266

(in EUR million)

Total (1)

Decreases are explained by repayments of capital occurred during the year on operations already considered as forborne as of 31 December 2014 and by termination during the year.

S.2.4. Credit risk on treasury transactions S.2.4.1.

Credit risk measurement on treasury transactions

Treasury investments are divided into three categories: (i) monetary treasury assets, with the primary objective of maintaining liquidity, (ii) operational bond portfolios, as a second liquidity line, and (iii) Group Long Term Hedge Portfolio (former Group Investment Portfolio) composed of EU sovereign bonds. Credit risk policy for treasury transactions is monitored through the attribution of credit limits to the counterparts for monetary and bond transactions. The weighted exposure for each counterpart must not exceed the authorised limits.

2014 Financial Report

193

The tables below provide an illustration of the credit exposure of the Group on various treasury portfolios as at 31 December 2014 and 31 December 2013:

Credit Risk Exposures as at 31 December 2014 (based on book values in EUR million)

The credit risk associated with treasury (securities, commercial paper, term accounts, etc.) is managed through selecting sound counterparties and issuers. Limits governing the structure of the securities portfolio and outstanding treasury instruments have been laid down by Management, in particular on the basis of internal ratings as well as ratings awarded to counterparties by rating agencies (these limits are reviewed regularly by the Risk Management Directorate). The total Treasury investments are distributed over different portfolios and diversified products (deposits, securities and derivative products). S.2.4.2.

Collateral on treasury transactions

Collateral received Part of treasury transactions are tripartite reverse repurchase agreements with a nominal balance of EUR 25,415 million (2013: EUR 39,318 million). These transactions are governed by Tripartite Agreement Guidelines and are implemented depending on the acceptability of collateral. The exposure is fully collateralised, with daily margin calls. The market value of the collateral portfolio is monitored and additional collateral is requested when needed in accordance with the underlying agreement. The market value of the securities received as collateral as at 31 December 2014 amounts to EUR 26,289 million (2013: EUR 40,965 million). During the 2014 and 2013 years, the Group did not take possession of any of the above mentioned collaterals. Collateral deposited As at 31 December 2014, the Group has deposited with the Central Bank of Luxembourg securities with a market value of EUR 3.3 billion (2013: EUR 3.3 billion). S.2.4.3

Transferred assets that are not derecognised at the balance sheet date

No assets of the Group were transferred but not derecognised at the balance sheet date.

194

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

S.2.5. Credit risk on derivatives S.2.5.1.

Credit risk policies for derivatives

The risk policy for derivative transactions is based on the definition of eligibility conditions and rating-related limits for swap counterparts. In order to reduce credit exposures, the Group has signed Credit Support Annexes with all its active swap counterparts and receives collaterals when the exposure exceeds certain contractually defined thresholds. The credit risk with respect to derivatives lies in the loss which the Group would incur were a counterparty be unable to honour its contractual obligations. In view of the special nature and complexity of the derivatives transactions, a series of procedures has been put in place to safeguard the Bank against losses arising out of the use of such instruments.

Contractual framework: All the Group’s derivative transactions are concluded in the contractual framework of Master Swap Agreements and Credit Support Annexes, which specify the conditions of exposure collateralisation. These are generally accepted and practised contract types.

Counterparty selection: The minimum rating at the outset is set at A3. The EIB has the right of early termination if the rating drops below a certain level.

Collateralisation: − Generally, there is a reduced credit risk on swaps, because exposures (exceeding limited thresholds for unsecured exposure) are collateralised by cash and bonds. − Very complex and illiquid transactions could require collateralisation over and above the current market value. − Both the derivatives portfolio with individual counterparties and the collateral received are monitored and valued on a daily basis, with a subsequent call for additional collateral or release. The amount of collateral required depends on an assessment of the credit risk of the counterparty. Guidelines are implemented regarding the acceptability of collaterals and valuations parameters. As part of the ISDA agreements, the Group has received securities and cash that it is allowed to sell or repledge. The fair value of the securities accepted under these terms as at 31 December amounts to EUR 36,051 million (2013: EUR 17,651 million) with the following composition:

Swap collateral (in EUR million) Bonds Moody's or equivalent rating

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 to A3 Baa1 to Baa3 Below Baa3 Non-Rated Total 2014

Government

Agency, supranational, Pfandbriefe

Cash

Total 2014

4,398 5,894 970 11,705 1,351 0 24,318

4,252 609 0 0 0 0 4,861

0 0 0 0 0 6,872 6,872

8,650 6,503 970 11,705 1,351 6,872 36,051

Agency, supranational, Pfandbriefe 1,391 9 0 0 0 0 1,400

Cash

Total 2013

0 0 0 0 0 3,677 3,677

3,062 1,789 36 7,376 1,711 3,677 17,651

Swap collateral (in EUR million) Bonds Moody's or equivalent rating

Aaa Aa1 to Aa3 A1 to A3 Baa1 to Baa3 Below Baa3 Non-Rated Total 2013

Government

1,671 1,780 36 7,376 1,711 0 12,574

2014 Financial Report

195

S.2.5.2.

Credit risk measurement for derivatives

The credit risk associated with derivatives varies according to a number of factors (such as interest and exchange rates) and generally corresponds to only a small portion of their notional value. The EIB measures the credit risk exposure related to swaps and derivatives transactions using the Current Unsecured Exposure and Total (Current and Potential) Unsecured Exposure for reporting and limit monitoring, and the Credit Risk Equivalent for capital allocation according to the recommendations of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) sponsored by the BIS. The EIB computes the Current Unsecured Exposure, which is the larger of zero and the market value of the portfolio of transactions within the netting set with a counterparty less the value of collateral received. It is the amount that would be lost upon the default of the counterparty, using the received collateral and assuming no recovery on the value of those transactions as well as immediate replacement of the swap counterparty for all the transactions. As of 31 December 2014 the Current Unsecured Exposure stood at EUR 3,586 million (EUR 807 million as of 31 December 2013). In addition, the EIB computes the Total Unsecured Exposure, which takes into account the possible increase in the netting set’s exposure over the margin period of risk, which ranges between 10 and 20 days, depending on the portfolio of transactions. The EIB computes the Total Unsecured Exposure at 90% confidence level using stressed market parameters to arrive at conservative estimates. This is in line with the recommendations issued by regulators in order to take into consideration the conditions that will prevail in case of default of an important market participant. As of 31 December 2014 the Total Unsecured Exposure stood at EUR 16,352 million (EUR 11,933 million as of 31 December 2013). Limits: The limit system for banks covers two types of exposure: Current Unsecured Exposure and Total Unsecured Exposure. The Current Unsecured Exposure is is limited by the Threshold applicable to the counterparty as defined in the Credit Support Annex and is dependent on the rating of the counterparty. For any exposure exceeding this Threshold, the EIB receives collaterals posted by the counterparty. The Total Unsecured Exposure limit determines the maximum Total Unsecured Exposure accepted for each counterparty. The derivatives portfolio is valued and compared against limits on a daily basis. As from the following table, the majority of the derivative portfolio is concentrated on counterparties rated A1 or above: Grouped ratings

The following table shows the maturities of currency swaps (excluding short term currency swaps), sub-divided according to their notional amount and fair value: Currency swaps at 31 December 2014 (in EUR million)

Notional amount Fair value (i.e. net discounted value)(*)

Currency swaps at 31 December 2013 (in EUR million)

Notional amount Fair value (i.e. net discounted value)(*) (*)

1 year or less

More than 1 year and up to 5 years

More than 5 years and up to 10 years

More than 10 years

Total 2014

21,610 1,077

103,690 7,098

35,992 2,242

11,631 2,948

172,923 13,365

1 year or less

More than 1 year and up to 5 years

More than 5 years and up to 10 years

More than 10 years

Total 2013

29,824 230

86,573 -1,274

30,223 261

12,834 1,394

159,454 611

Including the fair value of macro-hedging currency swaps which stood at EUR 308 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR 144 million)

The following table shows the maturities of interest rate swaps sub-divided according to their notional amount and fair value:

Including the fair value of macro-hedging interest rate swaps which stood at EUR -585 million as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR -362

The Group does not generally enter into any options contracts in conjunction with its risk hedging policy. However, as part of its strategy of raising funds on the financial markets at a lesser cost, the Bank enters into borrowing contracts and loans whose value depends on a variety of interest rates, FX rates, inflation rates, stock indexes and IR volatilities. Such structured borrowings and loans are entirely covered by swap contracts to hedge the corresponding market risk. All embedded option contracts are negotiated over the counter. The Notional amount and fair value of structured swaps is included in the tables above, depending whether or not they incorporate a cross currency element. The table below further details the number, value and notional amounts of structured swaps: Early termination embedded

The fair value of swap transactions is computed using the income approach, applying valuation techniques to convert future amounts to a single present amount (discounted). The estimate of fair value is based on the value indicated by marketplace expectations about those future amounts. Valuation techniques can range from simple discounted known cash flows to complex option models. The valuation models applied are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing financial instruments, and incorporate the factors that market participants consider when setting a price. For a portion of derivative transactions, internal estimates and assumptions might be used in the valuation techniques when the market inputs are not directly available. Generally, there is a reduced credit risk on these swaps, because security exists in the form of regularly monitored collateral. All option contracts embedded in, or linked with, borrowings are negotiated over the counter. The structured deals include a variety of transactions dependent on interest rates, FX rates, inflation rates, stock indexes and IR volatilities. As at 31 December 2014, no futures contracts are outstanding (same in 2013). S.2.5.3.

Credit risk on guarantees and securitisations (GS)

Credit risk arising from the Group’s guarantees and securitisations transactions funded by own resources is managed by risk management policies covered by the Statute and the Credit Risk Policy Guidelines. The Statute limits own-risk guarantees to approximately EUR 9.0 billion. The EUR 5.5 billion exposure at risk at the end of 2014 (2013: EUR 5.1 billion) was well below the statutory limit of EUR 9.0 billion.

2014 Financial Report

197

The Credit Risk Policy Guidelines ensure that the Group continues to develop a diversified guarantee portfolio in terms of product range, geographic coverage, counterparty exposure, obligor exposure, industry concentration and also set out the capital allocation rules based on the ratings of the exposures. Concentration risk is limited because of the granular nature of the Group’s transactions; typically the underlying portfolios are highly diversified in terms of single obligor concentration, sectors, and also with regard to regional diversification. To cover concentration risk, the Group has strict limits (based on capital allocation) for individual transactions and on originator level (maximum aggregate exposures for originators and originator groups). In the context of the Group’s own risk guarantee operations, the credit risk is tracked from the very beginning on a deal-by-deal basis whilst adopting a different model analysis approach depending on the granularity and homogeneity of the underlying portfolios. The industry sector exposures are analysed on a deal-by-deal basis through their impact on the ratings assigned by the Group to each transaction or tranche. For instance, dependent on the financial model to analyse the transaction, industry exposures can be reflected in implicit correlation or can be indirectly captured through the assumption on default rate volatility, as a key model input variable. Furthermore, concentration exposures are analysed in the context of each deal using qualitative measures such as current status and forecast for sectors with high concentrations in the portfolio. Exceptionally, some deals have a concentrated exposure in the same (broad) sector. This is typically captured through increased credit enhancement (e.g. subordination) to the benefit of the Group. Typically, deals with replenishing features have portfolio criteria, such as maximum single obligor, maximum top five obligors, and maximum industry concentration levels. Furthermore, the consideration of sector exposures is part of the Group’s overall portfolio analysis. Counterparty risk is mitigated by the quality of the Group’s counterparties which are usually major market players. The Group performs additional on-site monitoring visits to ensure compliance with procedures and processes during the transaction life. Stress-test scenarios for the portfolio of guarantees, including extreme case assumptions, are regularly carried out to determine the ability of the capital base to sustain adverse shocks. The exposure on guarantees granted by the Group in respect of venture capital operations amounts to EUR nil as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR nil). S.3. Liquidity risk Liquidity risk refers to the ability of the Group to fund increases in assets and meet obligations as they come due, without incurring unacceptable losses. It can be further split into funding liquidity risk and market liquidity risk. Funding liquidity risk is connected to the risk for the Group to be unable to refinance the asset side of its balance sheet and to meet payment obligations punctually and in full out of readily available liquid resources. Funding liquidity risk may have an impact on the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from Group’s positions, due to potentially increasing immediate risks to meet payment obligations and the consequent need to borrow at unattractive conditions. Market liquidity risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Group’s positions due to potential inability to execute a transaction to offset, eliminate or reduce outstanding positions at reasonable market prices. Such an inability may force early liquidation of assets at unattractive prices when it would be better to avoid such liquidation. This risk is tied to the size of the position compared to the liquidity of the instrument being transacted, as well as to potential deterioration of market availability and efficiency.

S.3.1. Liquidity risk management Liquidity risk management of the Bank Liquidity risk is managed prudently in order to ensure the regular functioning of the Bank’s core activities at reasonable cost. The main objective of liquidity policy is to ensure that the Bank can always meet its payment obligations punctually and in full. In contrast to commercial banks, the EIB does not have retail deposits but relies on its access to capital markets to raise the funds it on-lends to its clients. The Bank manages the calendar of its new issues so as to maintain a prudential liquidity buffer. Liquidity planning takes into account the Bank’s needs to service its debt, disbursements on loans and cash flows from the loan portfolio. It also takes into account the sizeable amount of signed but un-disbursed loans, whose disbursements typically take place at the borrowers’ request. The Bank further assures management of liquidity risk by maintaining a sufficient level of short term liquid assets, and by spreading the maturity dates of its placements according to the forecasts of liquidity needs. Liquidity risk policy also incorporates a floor on treasury levels. The Bank's total liquidity ratio (defined as a target percentage of annual projected net cash flows) must at all times exceed 25% of the average forecast net annual cash flows for the following year. The Bank has in place a Contingency Liquidity Plan (CLP), which specifies appropriate decision making procedures and corresponding responsibilities. The CLP has been benchmarked against the “Principles for Sound Liquidity Risk Management and Supervision” by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (September 2008). The CLP is subject to ad-hoc updates and is presented to the Management Committee annually for approval. Regular stress-testing analyses tailored to the specific business model of the EIB are executed as a part of the liquidity risk monitoring and drive the size of the Bank’s liquidity buffer.

198

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

On 8 July 2009, the Bank became an eligible counterparty in the Eurosystem’s monetary policy operations, and therefore has been given access to the monetary policy operations of the European Central Bank. The Bank conducts the operations via the Central Bank of Luxembourg, where the Bank maintains deposits to cover the minimum reserve requirement.

Liquidity risk management of the Fund Liquidity risk is managed in such a way as to protect the value of the paid–in capital, ensure an adequate level of liquidity to meet possible guarantee calls, private equity commitments and administrative expenditure and earn a reasonable return on assets invested with due regard to minimisation of risk.

S.3.2. Liquidity risk measurement The table hereafter analyses the financial liabilities of the Group by maturity on the basis of the period remaining between the consolidated balance sheet date and the contractual maturity date (based on contractual undiscounted cash flows). Liabilities for which there is no contractual maturity date are classified under "Maturity undefined". The numbers represent undiscounted cash flows inclusive of interest coupons and therefore do not generally reconcile with the Balance Sheet figures. Principal cash flows and interests are slotted in the bucket corresponding to their first potential contractual payment date. This therefore does not represent an expected scenario, but rather a theoretical scenario. Some of the borrowings and associated swaps include early termination triggers or call options granted to the hedging swap counterparties, and the Group also has the right to call the related bonds before maturity. In these cases, the cash flow is represented in the bucket corresponding to the first possible termination date. However, this is a conservative measure, as the Group is contractually not obliged to redeem early the related callable bonds and under realistic scenarios there would be no reason to call all such bonds at first possible occasions. Outflows for committed but undisbursed loans are represented in line with the internal methodology for liquidity stress-testing. In particular, the maximum amount of loans that under severe conditions of stress could possibly be subject to early disbursement is represented in the first maturity bucket. Net cash flows are represented for interest rate swaps and forward rate agreements. Gross cash flows are represented in the maturity analysis for interest rate derivatives where settlement is gross (essentially Cross Currency Interest Rate Swaps) and foreign exchange derivatives such as FX-forwards and FX-swaps.

S.4. Market risk Market risk is the risk that the net present value of future cash flows of financial instruments will fluctuate due to changes in market variables such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates and equity prices.

S.4.1. Market risk management Market risk for the Bank: As is the case with the “four-eyes principle” applied in lending activities via the Bank’s credit policies, so the market risk policy of the Bank establishes that the Risk management Directorate shall provide an opinion with respect to all financial activities of the Group that introduce material market risks, and with respect to financial transactions that may create credit risk, such as treasury hedging or derivatives operations. Market risks are identified, measured, managed and reported according to a set of policies and procedures updated on a regular basis called the “Financial Risk and ALM Policy Guidelines” (FRPG). The general principles underpinning these policies are described below. Stress testing is a widely used method to analyse the impact of possible scenarios on the Bank’s earnings and economic value of own funds, especially when analysis of historical market movements are viewed to be insufficient to assess future risks. Scenarios applied may relate to changes in market rates (interest rates, FX rates, spreads, equity prices etc.), liquidity conditions, or to worst-case events that may impact the former, such as sudden and adverse macroeconomic changes, simultaneous default of sizeable obligors, widespread system failures and the like. Stress testing is performed on a regular basis and the results of the change in the economic value of the Bank and of the change of the earnings profile is reported within the Bank’s market risk measurement process. Market risk for the Fund: The Fund’s market risk exposure arises mainly in the form of interest rate risk attached to cash and cash equivalent positions as well as investments in debt securities. Approximately 80% of these assets held have an average duration of up to 5 years, thereby safeguarding the Fund against the substantial fluctuations in its long term revenues.

S.4.2. Interest rate risk Interest rate risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Group’s positions due to adverse movements in market yields or the term structure of interest rates. Exposure to interest rate risk occurs when there are differences in re-pricing and maturity characteristics of the different assets, liabilities and hedge instruments. Interest rate risk management of the Group: In measuring and managing interest rate risk, the Group refers to the relevant key principles of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS). The main sources of interest rate risk are: re-pricing risk, yield curve risk, basis risk and spread risk. An interest rate risk that is particularly relevant for the Group is spread risk. Spread risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Group’s positions due to movements in the funding or lending spread of the Group. The Group manages its global structural interest rate position on a basis of a notional reference portfolio. The majority of the financial risk indicators and controls in use at the Group apply to this portfolio. Financial indicators and controls for the rest of the activities outside this portfolio

200

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

only relate to the risks, which are not transferred to it via the transfer pricing system, and therefore remain with their respective activities, such as the equity risk in the venture capital activity or the interest rate or credit risks taken in those treasury portfolios predominantly managed for yieldenhancement purposes. S.4.2.1.

Value-at-Risk for the own funds of the Group (economic perspective)

Group’s ALM strategy aims at maintaining a balanced and sustainable revenue profile as well as limiting the volatility of the economic value of the Group. A clear preference has been given to the revenue profile in light of the objective of self-financing of the Group’s growth. This overall objective is achieved by investing Group's own funds according to a medium to long term investment profile, implying an own funds duration target of 4.5 – 5.5 years. Apart from the duration target for own funds, the Group’s balance sheet should be match-funded with respect to currency and interest rate characteristics. However, small deviations are authorised for operational reasons. The net residual positions that arise from outstanding operations are managed within pre-set limits to constrain market risk to minimum levels. The Risk Management Directorate quantifies the VaR of own funds for both interest rates and foreign exchange risk factors. It is measured on the Group’s positions using a 99% confidence level and a one-day time horizon. As at 31 December 2014, the VaR of the Group’s own funds amounted to EUR 185 million (2013: EUR 204 million). The evolution of the VaR of own funds since 2013 reflects the effective decrease of the volatility of the risk factors and not a change in the risk profile of the Group’s positions. The computation is based on the so-called Riskmetrics methodology, which assumes a linear dependency between the changes in portfolio or position values and the underlying risk factors. Given the nature of the positions held by the Group, the Bank deems this assumption appropriate to measure its exposure to interest rate risk. Volatility and correlation data are computed internally on the basis of historical market data. More generally, the VaR does not purport to measure the worst loss that could be experienced. For this reason, it is complemented by regular stress testing. As of 31 December 2014, the impact of a 200 basis point upward parallel shift of the interest rate curves would reduce the economic value of own funds by EUR 7.76 billion (2013: EUR 6.52 billion). Among the financial instruments in the Group’s portfolio, some deals (borrowings and associated swaps) present callability options and may be redeemed early, introducing uncertainty as to their final maturity. At cash flow level all such borrowings are fully hedged by swaps so that they can be considered synthetic floating rate notes indexed to Euribor/Libor. Below is a summary of the features of the Group’s callable portfolio as of 31 December 2014 and 31 December 2013, where the total nominal amount, the average natural maturity and the average expected maturity (both weighted by the nominal amount of the concerned transactions) are shown per funding currency and per main risk factor involved:

The sensitivity of earnings quantifies the change in the Group’s net interest income over the forthcoming 12 months if all interest rate curves rose by one percentage point or decreased by one percentage point. Such exposure stems from the mismatches that the Group accepts, within approved limits, between interest rate re-pricing periods, volumes and rates of assets and liabilities. With the positions in place as of 31 December 2014, the earnings would increase by EUR 73.2 million (2013: EUR 152.5 million) if interest rates increased by 100 basis points and decrease by EUR 83.1 million (2013: EUR 129.3 million) if interest rates decreased by 100 basis points. The Group computes the sensitivity measure with dedicated software that simulates earnings on a deal by deal basis. The sensitivity of earnings is measured on an accrual basis and is calculated under the ‘’ongoing’’ assumption that, over the time horizon analysed, the Group realises the new loan business forecast in the Corporate Operational Plan, maintains exposures within approved limits and executes monetary trades to refinance funding shortages or invest cash excesses. Earnings are simulated on monthly time steps, assuming that all the fixed rate items carry their contractual rate and that all floating rate items are subject to interest rate repricings according to the interest rate scenario applied in the simulation. The monetary trades to refinance funding shortages or invest cash excesses carry rates equal to the money market rates prevailing according to the interest rate scenario applied in the simulation. In line with the current practice of the Group, the model uses the hypothesis that simulated earnings are not distributed to the shareholders, but are used to refinance the Group’s business. The administrative costs are projected according to the forecasts of the Corporate Operational Plan. The sensitivity of the EIF is computed by taking into consideration the coupon re-pricing of all the positions present in the EIF treasury portfolio managed by the Group on a deal-by-deal basis. Each fixed rate asset is assumed to be reinvested at maturity in a new asset with the same residual life of the previous one as of end of year’s date. Positions in floating rate assets are assumed to have quarterly repricings. S.4.3. Foreign exchange risk (in EUR million) The FX risk is the volatility in the economic value of, or in the income derived from, the Group’s positions due to adverse movements of FX rates. The Group’s is exposed to FX risk whenever there is a currency mismatch between its assets and liabilities. FX risk also comprises the effect of unexpected and unfavourable changes in the value of future cash flows caused by currency movements, such as the impact of FX rate changes on the Group’s future lending intermediation revenue. The sources of foreign exchange rate risk are to be found in the margins on operations and in general expenses incurred in non-euro currencies. The Group’s objective is to eliminate exchange risk by reducing net positions per currency through operations on the international foreign exchange markets. A foreign exchange hedging programme exists in order to protect the known loan margins in USD and in GBP for the next 3 years on a rolling basis.

In compliance with its statute, the Bank actively hedges its FX risk exposures. The main objective of the Bank’s FX risk management policy is to minimise the impact of a variation of FX rates on the income statement by keeping FX positions within the limits approved by the Management Committee. Related to the quantification of the VaR of own funds for both interest rates and foreign exchange risk factors, refer to Note S.4.2.1. S.4.4. Equity price risk Equity price risk is the risk that the fair values of equities decrease as the result of changes in the levels of equity indices and the value of individual equity investments. As of 31 December 2014, equity price risk was limited to those strategic activities approved by the Board of Directors (venture capital investments made by the Fund on behalf of the Bank and on its own resources; infrastructure funds; equity-like investments as Special Activity; participation in the EBRD). These activities are subject to special forms of monitoring and the resulting exposures are supported by sound capitalisation. The value of privately held equity positions is not readily available for the purposes of monitoring and control on a continuous basis. For such positions, the best indications available include prices for similar assets and the results of any relevant valuation techniques. The effect on Own Funds for the Group (as a result of a change in the fair value of equity investments at 31 December 2014 and 31 December 2013) due to a reasonable possible change in equity indices, with all other variables held constant is as follows:

202

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

2014 Change in equity price % -10 -10 -10

Venture Capital Operations (1) EBRD shares Investment funds

2013 Effect on Own Funds EUR ’000 -212,644 -45,880 -54,766

Change in equity price % -10 -10 -10

Effect on Own Funds EUR ’000 -192,402 -42,410 -54,501

(1)

The sensitivity of Venture Capital operations is calculated by the EIF based on the market risk of the positions on the public market.

S.5. Operational risk The management of operational risk is performed at all levels within the organisation and is a responsibility of all the various departments of the Group. The Risk Management Directorate is responsible for defining the operational risk framework and related policies while the responsibility for implementing the framework as well as day-to-day operational risk management lies with the Group’s operational departments. The Group employs an assessment methodology that takes into account all available information including loss history, results of risk selfassessment and the business and control environment through a set of Key Risk Indicators (KRIs) organised in an Operational Risk Scorecard. A statistical model and a Value at Risk calculation engine complete the operational risk environment. Information concerning operational risk events, losses and KRIs, and updates on the activities of the New Products Committee, are regularly forwarded to the Group’s senior management and to the Management Committee.

Note T – Accounting classifications and fair values of assets and liabilities (in EUR million) The table below sets out the Group’s classification of each class and category of assets and liabilities:

Note U – Segment reporting (in EUR million) The segment information disclosed in this note has been prepared in accordance with the "management approach" applied by IFRS 8 meaning that the definition of segments as well as the preparation of information used for segment reporting are both based on information prepared for internal management decisions. The EIB Group has one single reportable segment which is the EIB long term finance activity comprising EIB lending operations inside and outside Europe, borrowing and treasury operations. The Management Committee as the Group’s chief operating decision maker reviews internal management reports on the performance of the Bank’s long term finance activity on at least a quarterly basis. The second EIB Group operating segment, the financial support of SME’s carried out by the European Investment Fund through venture capital investments and the provision of guarantees does not meet any of the quantitative thresholds for determining a reportable segment in 2014 or 2013. Information about reportable segment

Long term lending finance activity 2014

2013

3,222 101 133 -2,127 0 18 1,347

3,100 48 171 308 0 3 3,630

-53 -53

-104 -104

634

2,895

Reportable segment assets

606,846

545,502

Reportable segment liabilities

549,323

487,799

External revenues: Net interest income Net income from shares Net fee and commission income Result on financial operations Other operating expenses Other operating income Total segment revenue Other material non-cash items: Impairment losses on loans and shares

Reportable segment profit

Reconciliation of reportable segment revenues, profit and loss and assets and liabilities 2014

2013

1,347 82 1,429

3,630 87 3,717

634 41 675

2,895 23 2,918

Total assets for reportable segment Other assets Consolidated total assets

606,846 1,953 608,799

545,502 1,399 546,901

Total liabilities for reportable segment Other liabilities Consolidated total liabilities

549,323 965 550,288

487,799 740 488,539

Revenues: Total revenues for reportable segment Other revenues Consolidated revenue Profit or loss: Total profit for reportable segment Other profit or loss Consolidated profit Assets:

Liabilities:

2014 Financial Report

207

Note V – Commitments, contingent liabilities, pledged assets and other memorandum items (in EUR ’000) The Group utilises various lending-related financial instruments in order to meet the financial needs of its customers. The Group issues commitments to extend credit, standby and other letters of credit, guarantees, commitments to enter into repurchase agreements, note issuance facilities and revolving underwriting facilities. Guarantees represent irrevocable assurances, subject to the satisfaction of certain conditions, that the Group will make payment in the event that the customer fails to fulfil its obligation to third parties. The contractual amount of these instruments is the maximum amount at risk for the Group if the customer fails to meet its obligations. The risk is similar to the risk involved in extending loan facilities and is monitored with the same risk control processes and specific credit risk policies.

The Investment Facility, which is managed by the EIB, has been established within the framework of the Cotonou Agreement on cooperation and development of the African, Caribbean and Pacific Group of States and the European Union and its Member States on 23 June 2000 and subsequently revised. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Investment Facility.

V.2.

Guarantee Fund

The Guarantee Fund for External Actions was set up in 1994 to cover defaults on loans and loan guarantees granted to non-Member States or for projects in non-Member States. The European Commission (‘EC’) entrusted financial management of the Guarantee Fund to the EIB under an agreement signed between the two parties in November 1994. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Guarantee Fund.

V.3.

NER300

The EIB supports the EC as an agent in the implementation of the NER 300 initiative - a funding programme for carbon capture and storage demonstration projects and innovative renewable energy technologies. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for NER300.

V.4.

JESSICA (Contribution and Holding Funds)

JESSICA (The Joint European Support for Sustainable Investment in City Area) is an initiative developed by the EC and the EIB, in collaboration with the Council of Europe Development Bank. Under new procedures, Managing Authorities are being given the option of using some of their EU grant funding to make repayable investments in projects forming part of an integrated plan for sustainable urban development. These investments are delivered to projects via Urban Development Funds or if required Holding Funds (JESSICA Holding Funds). JESSICA Holding Funds are used in the context of the JESSICA initiative. As Manager, EIB gathers the funding received from the Managing Authorities and invests it in Urban Development Funds, according to investment guidelines agreed with the donors. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for JESSICA.

V.5.

Risk-Sharing Finance Facility (‘RSFF’)

The RSFF has been established within the framework of the Co-operation Agreement, entered into force on 5 June 2007 between the EC on behalf of the European Union and the EIB. The RSFF aims at fostering investment in research, technological development and demonstration, and innovation. As part of the RSFF, the EIF set up the Risk Sharing Instrument for Innovative and Research oriented SMEs and small MidCaps (‘RSI’). The RSI provides guarantees to banks and leasing companies for loans and financial leases to research-based small and mediumsized enterprises (SMEs) and small Mid-Caps. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the RSFF.

V.6.

EU-Africa Infrastructure Trust Fund (the ‘Trust Fund’)

The Trust Fund has been created within the framework of the Trust Fund Agreement between the EC on behalf of the European Union as the Founding Donor and the EIB as Manager, also open to Member States of the European Union which subsequently accede to this agreement as Donors. On 9 February 2006, the EC and the EIB Group signed a Memorandum of Understanding to promote jointly the EU-Africa Infrastructure Partnership and, in particular, to establish a supporting EU-Africa Infrastructure Trust Fund. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Trust Fund.

V.7.

Special Section

The Special Section was set up by the Board of Governors on 27 May 1963. Under a decision taken on 4 August 1977, its purpose was redefined as being that of recording financing operations carried out by the EIB for the account of and under mandate from third parties. It includes the FED, MED/FEMIP, IPA (Instrument for Pre-Accession) and Turkey mandates.

V.8.

InnovFin (incl. InnovFin SME Guarantee)

The InnovFin or “InnovFin-EU Finance for Innovators” is a joint initiative between the EIB, the EIF and the European Commission under the new EU research programme for 2014-2020 “Horizon 2020”. On 11 December 2013, Regulation (EU) N 1291/2013 of the European Parliament and the Council establishing Horizon 2020 – the Framework Programme for Research and Innovation (2014-2020) and repealing Decision N 1982/2006/EC (“Horizon 2020 Regulation”) was adopted. On 12 June 2014 the European Commission, the EIB and the EIF signed a Delegation Agreement establishing the financial instrument InnovFin. InnovFin consists of a series of integrated and complementary financing tools and advisory services offered by the EIB Group, covering the entire value chain of research and innovation (R&I) in order to support investments from the smallest to the largest enterprise. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the InnovFin.

210

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

V.9.

JEREMIE

JEREMIE (The Joint European Resources for Micro to Medium Enterprises) is an initiative of the European Commission’s Directorate General for Regional Policy (DG Regio) and the EIB Group.

V.10.

GF Greece

The Fund is a joint initiative between the Hellenic Republic, the EC and the EIB and was set up to support the lending to SMEs in Greece. Established by using unabsorbed Structural Funds for Greece, the Fund will guarantee EIB loans to SMEs via partner banks in Greece.

V.11.

Loan Guarantee Instrument for Ten-T Projects (’LGTT’)

The LGTT has been established within the framework of the Co-operation Agreement, entered into force on 11 January 2008 between the EC on behalf of the European Union and the EIB. The LGTT aims at facilitating a greater private sector involvement in the financing of Trans-European transport networks infrastructure. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the LGTT.

V.12.

European Neighbourhood and Partnership Instrument (‘ENPI’)

The Framework Agreement between the European Union and the EIB on the implementation of operations financed from the general budget of the European Union in the countries covered by the European Neighbourhood Policy is channelled through the ENPI. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for ENPI.

V.13.

SMEG 2007

In the SMEG 2007 under the Competitiveness and Innovation Framework Programme (CIP/SMEG 2007), the EIF is empowered to issue guarantees in its own name but on behalf and at the risk of the Commission.

V.14.

Project Bond Initiative (‘PBI’)

A Cooperation Agreement between the EC and the EIB in respect of the Project Bond Instrument: Pilot Phase was signed in November 2012. The PBI is designed to stimulate capital market financing for infrastructure delivered under ‘project finance’ structures, including Public Private Partnerships (PPPs). The initiative will seek to enhance the credit rating of bonds issued by project companies to a rating level that is attractive for investors and to lower the project’s overall financing costs.

V.15.

AECID

This partnership agreement signed between the Kingdom of Spain (the Spanish Agency for International Development Cooperation (AECID) and the EIB was set up to invest in operations in the countries covered by the FEMIP together with Mauritania (the "Southern Mediterranean region"), targeting mainly risk capital activities for micro and small/medium enterprises as well as engaging in the wider development of the private sector in the region.

V.16.

GIF 2007

In the GIF 2007 under the Competitiveness and Innovation Framework Programme and the Technology Transfer Pilot Project (CIP/GIF 2007), the EIF is empowered to acquire, manage and dispose of investments, in its own name but on behalf and at the risk of the Commission.

V.17.

COSME LGF & EFG

The Programme of COSME EFG provides the establishment of the Equity Facility for Growth and the establishment of the Loan Guarantee Facility. The financial instruments aim to improve access to finance for small and medium-sized enterprises in the form of debt and equity exclusively. In that context, an Equity For Growth has been structured in the form of an equity financial instrument supporting Union enterprises growth and Research Innovation. The Programme of COSME LGF provides the establishment of the Loan Guarantee Facility. The financial instrument aim to improve access to finance for small and medium-sized enterprises in the form of debt and equity exclusively. The Loan Guarantee Facility has been structured in the form of a direct and indirect guarantee financial instrument. The objective of LGF is to contribute to the reduction of the structural shortcoming of the SME financing market and to support the creation of a more diversified SME finance market. Through direct and indirect guarantee, LGF aims to guarantee debt financing which addresses the particular difficulties that viable SMEs face in accessing finance. Furthermore, by guaranteeing the mezzanine tranche of eligible and transparent securitisation transactions, LGF aims to provide new avenues of financing for SMEs.

2014 Financial Report

211

V.18.

InnovFin SME Guarantee

In the context of the “Access to Risk Finance Programme” of Horizon 2020 and specific programme provides for the establishment of a financial instrument for debt and a financial instrument for equity. A Risk-Sharing facility called InnovFin SME Guarantee has been structured in the form of a guarantee, using the EU’s contribution for first defaulted amount taking and the risk-taking capacity of the EIF for second-Defaulted Amount taking. The objective of the Facility is to incentivise Intermediaries to extend loans or financial leases to small and medium sized enterprises and Small Mid-caps with significant activities in Research, Development and Innovation.

V.19.

Neighbourhood Investment Facility (‘NIF’) Trust Fund

The NIF Trust Fund managed by the EIB was set up to achieve the strategic objective of the European Neighbourhood Partnership Instrument through targeted funding aimed at strengthening infrastructure interconnection between the EU and its neighbours in the areas of Transport and Energy, at addressing common environmental concerns and at supporting other relevant activities. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the NIF Trust Fund.

V.20.

SME Guarantee Facility

The EIF is empowered to issue guarantees in its own name but on behalf and at the risk of the European Union according to the Fiduciary and Management Agreement concluded with the European Union.

V.21.

Greater Anatolia Guarantee Facility (‘GAGF’)

Under the GAGF signed in May 2010, the EIF manages the Instrument for Pre-Accession Assistance (IPA) funds allocated for the Regional Competitiveness Operational Programme by the European Union and Turkey. The facility provides tailor-made financial help to SMEs and microenterprises in Turkey’s least developed provinces in partnership with major Turkish banks.

V.22.

WB EDIF

The Western Balkan Enterprise Development & Innovation Facility (“WB EDIF”) is a joint initiative signed in December 2012 by the EC (DG ELARG), EIB Group and the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD). It aims at improving access to finance for SMEs in the Western Balkans and to foster economic development in the region through the deployment of the Instrument for Pre-Accession Assistance (IPA) funds. Within WB EDIF, EIF acts as platform coordinator, Trustee on behalf of the EC for the Enterprise Expansion Fund (ENEF), Trustee on behalf of the EC for the Enterprise Innovation Fund (ENIF), and manager of the Guarantee Facility.

V.23.

MAP Equity

Under the Multi-Annual Programme (MAP) for enterprises and entrepreneurship, the EIF manages resources on behalf and at the risk of the EC.

V.24.

Heavily Indebted Poor Countries (‘HIPC’) Initiative

The HIPC Initiative (the ’Initiative’) is an international debt relief mechanism that provides special assistance to the world's poorest countries. It was launched in 1996 following a proposal from the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund. The principal objective of the Initiative is to reduce the debt burden of poor countries to sustainable levels. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the Initiative.

V.25.

RSI

In the context of the Risk Sharing Finance Facility (RSFF), a joint initiative of the EC (DG Research & Innovation) and the EIB, EIF has been managing the Risk Sharing Instrument (RSI Facility) since December 2011. The aim of the RSI Facility is to create a pilot guarantee scheme for the benefit of innovative and research oriented SMEs and mid-caps.

V.26.

FEMIP Trust Fund

The FEMIP (Facility for Euro-Mediterranean Investment and Partnership) Trust Fund, which is also managed by the EIB, was set up to enhance the existing activities of the EIB in the Mediterranean Partner Countries, with the support of a number of donor countries and with a view of directing resources to operations in certain priority sectors through the provision of technical assistance and risk capital. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for the FEMIP Trust Fund.

V.27.

MAP Guarantee

This resource is split equally between private equity and guarantee products. The equity segment known as ESU 1998 (G&E) and ESU 2001 (MAP) covers the ETF start-up investments. The guarantees segment known as SMEG 1998 (G&E) and SMEG 2001 (MAP), provides guarantees against the beneficiary’s undertaking.

212

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

V.28.

EPTA Trust Fund

EPTA (The Eastern Partnership Technical Assistance) Trust Fund is focused on increasing the quality and development impact of EIB Eastern Partnership operations by offering a multi-purpose, multi-sector funding facility for technical assistance. It will be complementary to the Neighbourhood Investment Facility. The EIB prepares separate financial statements for EPTA Trust Fund.

V.29.

G43 Trust Fund

Under G43 Anatolian Venture Capital Fund, signed in August 2012, the EIF is entrusted with a mandate by Central Finance Unit of Turkey (CFCU). It is dedicated to make investments in SMEs in South-Eastern Anatolia region of Turkey. V.30.

European Progress Microfinance Facility (‘EPMF’)

The EPMF aims to increase access to finance for individuals who have difficulties entering the labour market and to promote the start-up and growth of micro-enterprises with a particular view to providing jobs for the unemployed or the disadvantaged.

V.31.

European Technology Facility (‘ETF’)

Under the ETF Start-Up Facility, the EIF is empowered to acquire, manage and dispose of ETF start-up investments, in its own name but on behalf of and at the risk of the EC.

V.32.

Private Finance for Energy Efficiency Instrument

The Private Finance for Energy Efficiency (PF4EE) instrument is a joint agreement between the EIB and the European Commission with aims to address the limited access to adequate and affordable commercial financing for energy efficiency investments. The instrument targets projects which support the implementation of National Energy Efficiency Action Plans or other energy efficiency programmes of EU Member States. In December 2014 the European Commission and the EIB signed a Delegation Agreement establishing the financial Instrument PF4EE.

V.33.

RDI Advisory

RDI Advisory was set up in partnership with the European Commission under a 7 year framework agreement signed in June 2014, as part of the InnovFin programme under Horizon 2020. It has two main lines of activity: (i) upstream project related advisory and (ii) horizontal activities destined to improve the overall framework conditions for RDI investments as well as the financing tools under Horizon 2020.

V.34.

Fi Compass Advisory Platform

The fi-compass advisory platform provides EU Member States and their managing authorities as well as microcredit providers with advisory support and learning opportunities for developing financial instruments, within the scope of European Structural Investment Funds (ESIF) and the Programme for Employment and Social Innovation (EaSI). It is implemented by the EIB and funded by the EC under a Framework Contract for the period 2014-2020.

V.35.

BIF

The Baltic Innovation Fund (“BIF”), signed in September 2012, is a fund-of-funds, structured as a partnership, which invests in venture capital and private equity funds and focused on the Baltic region. It is funded jointly by the EIB Group and the following Baltic national agencies: Fund KredEx in Estonia, Latvijas Garantiju Agentiira in Latvia and lnvesticiju ir verslo garantijosin Lithuania.

V.36.

PGFF

The Polish Growth Fund-of-Funds (“PGFF”), signed in April 2013, is a fund-of-funds, structured as a partnership, which invests in venture capital and private equity funds and focused on Poland. It is funded jointly by the EIB Group and the Bank Gospodarstwa Krajowego.

V.37.

GEEREF (Fund and Technical Support Facility)

GEEREF (Global Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Fund) is a fund of funds set-up at the initiative of the EC. Its objective is to make investments in private equity funds that focus on the fields of renewable energy and energy efficiency in emerging markets (ACP, ALA and European Neighbour countries). The EIF also holds a technical assistance mandate for which related activities are implemented by the GEEREF front office.

V.38.

Bundesministerium für Wirtschaft und Technologie

The EIF manages funds on behalf of the German Bundesministerium für Wirtschaft und Technologie (Federal Ministry of Economics and Technology) and the European Recovery Programme.

2014 Financial Report

213

V.39.

Technology Transfer Pilot Project (‘TTP’)

Under the TTP, financed by the EC and signed in November 2008, the EIF has supported a technology transfer structure through pre-seed funding and seed funding.

V.40.

JASPERS

JASPERS (The Joint Assistance to Support Projects in European Regions) is a major joint policy initiative of the EIB, EC (Regional Policy Directorate-General - DG Regio) and the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development. It provides advice to the 12 Central and Eastern EU Member States and Croatia during project preparation to help improve the quality of the major projects to be submitted for grant financing under the Structural and Cohesion Funds.

V.41.

European Parliament Preparatory Action (‘EPPA’)

In 2010, the EIF signed the EPPA with DG REGIO. The EIF is providing risk capital and financial support for capacity building purposes in order to help a select number of microfinance institutions to reach a meaningful size and improve their prospects for sustainability.

V.42.

Mezzanine Dachfonds fur Deutschland (‘MDD’)

The MDD in an investment programme signed in June 2013 and funded by the German Federal Ministry of Economics and Technology (BMWi) and various institutions of the Federal states to subscribe into hybrid debt and equity funds investing in German MidCaps.

V.43.

LfA-EIF Facility

LfA-EIF Facility, signed in 2009, is a joint EIF and LfA Förderbank Bayern venture providing investments to support technology-oriented early and expansion stage companies in the region of Bavaria, Germany.

V.44.

GEEREF

Under the Global Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Fund (GEEREF), EIF has been acting since December 2007 as investment advisor. GEEREF is supported by the EC, the Federal Government of Germany and the Kingdom of Norway and its objective is to invest primarily in regional funds with assets in projects and companies involved in energy efficiency and renewable energy enhancing access to clean energy in developing countries and economies in transition. The GEEREF business development is formally delegated to the EIB under a sub-advisory agreement.

V.45.

Green for Growth Fund (‘GGF’)

The Green for Growth Fund was set up by the EIF in December 2009 and focuses on energy efficiency financings in South East Europe including Turkey.

V.46.

FP7 Guarantee Fund

The 7th Framework Programme (‘FP7’) is designed to support research, technological development and demonstration projects all over Europe. The rules and principles for the management of the FP7 are laid out in the Agreement between the EC on behalf of the European Atomic Energy Community and the EIB. The EC entrusted financial management of the FP7 Guarantee Fund to the EIB under an agreement signed between the two parties in December 2007. The EIB prepared separate financial statements for FP7 Guarantee Fund until 2013 and the FP7 Guarantee Fund was transferred back to the European Commission in 2014.

V.47.

ECHA

On 1 April 2011 the EIB entered into an asset management agreement with the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA). Under this agreement the EIB manages the investment portfolio of ECHA in accordance with the pre-agreed Asset Management Guidelines.

214

Financial Report

2014

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

Statement of Special Section(1) as at 31 December 2014 and 2013 (in EUR ‘000) ASSETS Turkey From resources of Member States Disbursed loans outstanding Total(2) Instrument for Pre-Accession ('IPA') From resources of Member States Disbursed loans outstanding Total(3) Mediterranean Countries From resources of the European Union Disbursed loans outstanding Risk capital operations - amounts to be disbursed - amounts disbursed Total(4) African, Caribbean and Pacific State and Overseas Countries and Territories From resources of the European Union · Yaoundé Conventions Loans disbursed Contributions to the formation of risk capital - amounts disbursed Total(5) · Lomé Conventions Operations from risk capital resources - amounts to be disbursed - amounts disbursed Total(6) Total LIABILITIES Funds under trust management Under mandate from the European Union - Financial Protocols with the Mediterranean Countries - Financial Protocols with the instrument for Pre-Accession ('IPA') - Yaoundé Conventions - Lomé Conventions - Other resources under the Lomé Conventions Under mandate from Member States Total funds under trust management Funds to be disbursed On loans and risk capital operations in the Mediterranean countries On operations from risk capital resources under the Lomé Conventions Total funds to be disbursed Total

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

3,595 3,595

4,914 4,914

21,883 21,883

20,933 20,933

72,725

84,145

42,732 76,323 119,055 191,780

49,244 106,105 155,349 239,494

2,430

3,584

419 2,849

419 4,003

2,084 315,117 317,201 317,201 537,308

2,099 399,543 401,642 401,642 670,986

31.12.2014

31.12.2013

149,048 21,883 2,849 315,117 0 488,897 3,595 492,492

190,250 20,933 4,003 399,543 0 614,729 4,914 619,643

42,732 2,084 44,816 537,308

49,244 2,099 51,343 670,986

For information: Total amounts disbursed and not yet repaid on loans on special conditions made available by the Commission in respect of which the Bank has accepted an EU mandate for recovering principal and interest: a) Under the First, Second and Third Lomé Conventions as at 31 December 2014 EUR ‘000 369,925 (2013: EUR ‘000 393,482) b) Under Financial Protocols signed with the Mediterranean Countries as at 31 December 2014 EUR ‘000 72,908 (2013: EUR ‘000 79,121) In the context of the European Union – European Development Finance Institutions Private Sector Development Facility, the implementation agreement for the Guarantee Component was signed on 20 August 2014. Total amount of the EU guarantee to be issued is EUR ‘000 43,200 as at 31 December 2014 (2013: EUR nil). Note (1): The Special Section was set up by the Board of Governors on 27 May 1963. Under a decision taken on 4 August 1977, its purpose was redefined as being that of recording financing operations carried out by the European Investment Bank for the account of and under mandate from third parties. However, for the Investment Facility under the Cotonou Agreement, the EU-Africa Infrastructure Trust Fund, the Neighbourhood Investment Facility (NIF) Trust Fund and the FEMIP Trust Fund, separate financial statements are presented. In addition, since 2005, the EIB also prepares financial statements of different types for other mandates.

2014 Financial Report

215

The Statement of Special Section reflects amounts disbursed or to be disbursed, less cancellations and repayments, under mandate from the European Union and the Member States. Amounts disbursed and to be disbursed and funds received and to be received are carried at nominal value. No account is taken in the Statement of Special Section of provisions or value adjustments, which may be required to cover risks associated with such operations except for definite write-offs. Amounts in foreign currency are translated at exchange rates prevailing on 31 December. Note (2): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in Turkey under mandate, for the account and at the risk of Member States.

Initial amount: add: less:

exchange adjustments cancellations repayments

405,899 20,514 215 422,603 -422,818 3,595

Note (3): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects under the Instrument for Pre-Accession, for the account and at the risk of the European Union.

Initial amount: less:

29,640 exchange adjustments cancellations repayments

7,757 0 0 -7,757 21,883

Note (4): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in the Maghreb and Mashreq countries, Malta, Cyprus, Turkey and Greece (EUR 10 million lent prior to accession to the EC on 1 January 1981) under mandate, for the account and at the risk of the European Union.

Initial amount: less:

840,457 exchange adjustments cancellations repayments

51,048 130,445 467,184 -648,677 191,780

Note (5): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in the Associated African States, Madagascar and Mauritius and the Overseas Countries, Territories and Departments (AASMM-OCTD) under mandate, for the account and at the risk of the European Union.

Loans on special conditions Contributions to the formation of risk capital Initial amount: add:

139,483 2,503 141,986 capitalised interest exchange adjustments

1,178 9,823 11,001

less:

cancellations repayments

3,310 146,828 -150,138 2,849

Note (6): Initial amount of contracts signed for financing projects in the African, Caribbean and Pacific States and the Overseas Countries and Territories (ACP-OCT) under mandate, for the account and at the risk of the European Union:

Note W – Capital and Reserves W.1. Share capital and reserves The European Investment Bank (EIB), the financing institution of the European Union, was created by the Treaty of Rome of 25 March 1957. The members of the EIB are the Member States of the European Union, who have all subscribed to the Group's capital. The subscribed capital of the Bank amounts to EUR 243,284,154,500 (31 December 2013: EUR 243,284,154,500) and the uncalled capital to EUR 221,585,019,550 as of 31 December 2014 (31 December 2013 EUR 221,585,019,550). New Member States or Member States that increase their share in the Bank's subscribed capital pay their part of the called capital plus their part of the reserves, provisions equivalent to reserves and similar amounts, normally in several equal instalments over the course of several years. The Accession Treaties and/or the Board of Governors decisions to increase the Bank's capital establish the specific modalities of such payments, including the calculation of the share of the new Member States in the Bank's capital, which is normally based on the national GDP figures officially published by Eurostat. As a result of a decision taken by the Member States, the subscribed and called capital of the Group increased by EUR 10 billion on 31 December 2012. The Member States are due to pay in their respective shares of this EUR 10 billion capital increase over no more than three instalments, with 95.8% of the capital increase due no later than 31 March 2013 and the remainder in two equal instalments no later than 31 March 2014 and 31 March 2015 respectively. All contributions due on 31 March 2014 and 31 March 2013 were settled in full. As at 1 July 2013, the subscribed capital has increased from EUR 242,392,989,000 to EUR 243,284,154,500, by virtue of the contributions of a new Member State that joined on 1 July 2013: Croatia. As a consequence of this capital increase, the new Member State had to contribute to its share of Paid-in capital (EUR 79.5 million), and also its share of the reserves (EUR 128.4 million) for the amounts outstanding as of 30 June 2013. The total amount to be paid has been equally spread over 8 instalments: 30 November 2013, 30 November 2014, 30 November 2015, 31 May 2016, 30 November 2016, 31 May 2017, 30 November 2017 and 31 May 2018. The instalments up to and including 30 November 2014 were settled in full. The amount of EUR ‘000 572,447 shown in the balance sheet under the caption Subscribed capital and reserves, called but not paid is the discounted valued of EUR ‘000 576,097 which represent EUR ‘000 420,197 receivable from the Member States in 2015 in respect of their share of the capital increase and EUR ‘000 155,900 related to net receivable from the new Member State, Croatia. Voting powers in the Bank's Board of Governors and Board of Directors are established partly on the share of capital subscribed by each Member State, partly on different criteria, set forth in Articles 8 and 10 of the Bank's statute, applied jointly or exclusively depending on the specific voting procedure. Withdrawal from the status of EU Member State or decrease of the subscribed capital amount for a Member State is not foreseen by the legal provisions currently in force.

W.2. Capital management Even though the Group is not subject to formal supervision, it has generally voluntarily submitted to major EU banking regulations and adopted market "best practice". In particular, this applies to the Capital Requirements Directive and Regulation (CRR IV), issued in 2013 by the European Parliament, translating the Basel III framework into EU law and applied to EU credit institutions and investment firms since 1 January 2014 (575/2013/EP of 26 June 2013). The implementation of the "Advanced Internal Ratings Based Approach (Advanced IRB)" for credit risk and Advanced Measurement Approach (‘AMA’) for operational risk has been done under the technical assistance of the Commission de Surveillance du Secteur Financier (‘CSSF’). In addition to the monitoring of Basel III minimum capital requirements, stress tests assess the sensitivity of capital requirements to changes in the macroeconomic environment and in the activities of the Group. As at 31 December 2014, the Group’s capital adequacy ratio stood at 25.2% (28.1% at the end of 2013). The stability of the ratio is explained by the positive impact of the increase of the consolidated regulatory own funds (adjusted for unrealised results accounted for under the fair value option after the application of Basel III prudential filters), which offset the negative impact resulting from the increase of risk-weighted assets. As at 31 December 2014 and based on the statutory financial statements, the Bank’s Basel III capital adequacy ratio stood at 26.0% (26.1% at the end of 2013).

2014 Financial Report

217

Note X – Conversion rates The following conversion rates were used for establishing the balance sheets at 31 December 2014 and 2013:

Note Y – Related party transactions – Key Management Personnel The Group has identified members of the Board of Directors, the Management Committee and the Directors General heading the different EIB organisational directorates as key management personnel. Key management personnel compensation for the relevant reporting periods, included within General administrative expenses (Note P), is disclosed in the following table: (in EUR ’000) Short-term benefits(1) Post employment benefits(2) Termination benefits

2014 7,881 660 600 9,141

2013 8,026 750 550 9,326

(1) Short-term employee benefits comprise salaries and allowances, bonuses and social security contributions of the Management Committee, the Directors General and other Directors, and benefits paid to the members of the Board of Directors and the Audit Committee. (2) Post employment benefits comprise pensions and expenses for post employment health insurance paid to members of the Management Committee and Directors General and other Directors.

Open balances with key management personnel as at 31 December 2014 comprise the compulsory and optional supplementary pension plan and health insurance scheme liabilities, and payments outstanding as at the year end: (in EUR ’000) Pension plans and health insurance (Note J) Other liabilities (Note G)

31.12.2014 -48,832 -12,181

31.12.2013 -33,636 -12,217

Note Z – Post balance sheet events There have been no material events after the balance sheet date that would require adjustment of, or disclosure in, the consolidated financial statements as at 31 December 2014.

2014 Financial Report

219

Independent Auditor’s Report To the Chairman of the Audit Committee of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK 98-100, Boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 LUXEMBOURG

REPORT OF THE REVISEUR D’ENTREPRISES AGREE We have audited the accompanying consolidated financial statements of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK, which comprise the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 December 2014, the consolidated income statement, consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in equity and consolidated cash flow statement for the year then ended, and a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information. Management’s responsibility for the consolidated financial statements The Management is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these consolidated financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union, and for such internal control as the Management determines is necessary to enable the preparation of consolidated financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. The procedures selected depend on the judgement of the Réviseur d’Entreprises agréé, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the Réviseur d’Entreprises agréé considers internal control relevant to the entity’s preparation and fair presentation of the consolidated financial statements in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity’s internal control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the Management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.

Responsibility of the Réviseur d’Entreprises agréé Opinion Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing as adopted for Luxembourg by the Commission de Surveillance du Secteur Financier. Those standards require that we comply with ethical requirements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free from material misstatement.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements give a true and fair view of the consolidated financial position of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK as of 31 December 2014, and of its consolidated financial performance and its consolidated cash flows for the year then ended in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union.

KPMG Luxembourg, Société coopérative Cabinet de révision agréé

E. DOLLÉ

EIB Group Consolidated Financial Statements under IFRS

Statement by The Audit Committee The Audit Committee reports to the Board of Governors, the following statement being communicated to the Governors prior to their approval of the Annual Report and the financial statements for the past financial year.

-

met regularly the Head of Internal Audit and discussed the relevant internal audit reports, and studied the documents which it deemed necessary to examine in the discharge of its duties,

Statement by the Audit Committee on the EIB’s consolidated financial statements prepared in accordance with the International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the EU (IFRS)

-

received assurance from the Management Committee concerning the effectiveness of the internal control structure and internal administration,

and considering The Committee, instituted in pursuance of Article 12 of the Statute and Chapter V of the Rules of Procedure of the European Investment Bank for the purpose of verifying that the operations of the Bank are conducted and its books kept in a proper manner, having -

noted that the opinion of KPMG on the consolidated financial statements of the European Investment Bank for the year ended 31 December 2014 is unqualified,

-

convened on a regular basis with the Heads of Directorates and relevant services including, •

the Financial Controller,

•

the Directors General of Risk Management and Transaction Monitoring and Restructuring,

-

the consolidated financial statements for the financial year ended 31 December 2014 as drawn up by the Board of Directors at its meeting on 12 March 2015,

-

that the foregoing provides a reasonable basis for its statement and,

-

Articles 24, 25 & 26 of the Rules of Procedure,

to the best of its knowledge and judgement: confirms that the consolidated financial statements, comprising the consolidated balance sheet, the consolidated income statement, the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the consolidated statement of changes in equity, the consolidated cash flow statement, and a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information give a true and fair view of the financial position of the Bank as at 31 December 2014 in respect of its assets and liabilities, and of its consolidated financial performance and its consolidated cash flows for the year then ended, in accordance with IFRS.